Tektronix 555/22A, 555/21A Instruction Manual

INSTRUCTION

IVIANUAL

Serial

Number

__

___

_

Tektronix,

S.W. Millikan

070-403

Inc.

Way e P.

0.

Box

500

•

Beaverton,

Oregon

97005

•

Phone

644-0161 •

Cables:

Tektronix

464

ktronix

;;·;

§ll!lif'VJ~a

is

geared

all requestS for repairs

pad

should

ix

Field

Ofti

. This procedure

possible service.. Please inc

-illililrnrn•nt Type

p,'t_-.:,·

t:•ioJUtJSTs for

repair

parts

and

replacement-part

directly

or.

and

to

the

be

directed to

Representative

Witl

as.s

Serial number with

or service.

and

price

field., there-

and

replace-

the

in

_ure you

·

Tekyour

the

ii

T.

0.

33Al-1.3-152-ll

18 SeptEmber 1968

I

This

ITO

replaces

1.

PURPOSE~

authorizing

for

CONTRACTOR--ClMMERCIAL TITLE---

DATE--ADDITIONAL

2.

FILE

3.

SUPPL~ENTARY

commercial

NUMBER--- TJpe 555/2ll/22A

Instructions

Hot

dated.

IDENTIFICATION:

LOCATION.

publication

IDENTIFYING

ITO 33Al-1.3-152-ll, dated 1

This

technical

official

Tektronix

with

order

is

use a commercial

Parts

Breakdown

The

above

INFORMATION.

is

listed

The

information contained

supplemented

TECHNICAL

July'

issued

for

publication

..

- Oscilloscope

commercial

as

follows

ORDER 1968, and

the

purpo'e

identified

publication

in

for

official

the

cODRercialaanual.

of

identifying

as

follows'

is

filed

the

above

in

listed

use.

and

Marma1

Chaage

Reference Page

PUBLISHED This

NOTICE:

in

this

UNDER

technical

Reproduction

publication

...

Modification

1-1,

Table

AUTHORITY

order

issued

for

is

not

Insert,

1-1:

OF

THE

by

SAAMA

nonmilitary

Type

Delete

tor !actor

Delete Delete

the

'l';ype

0.005 the the

Type H plug-in.

SOCRETARY

(SANST)

use

permitted without

555,

Mod

101D,

risetime

lAl

to

of

plug-in

0.05

passband "de

riset:ime

OF

THE

cf

the

or 1123

AIR

information

specific

Copyright

11

14.5

over

v/c:ra.

to

FORCE

approval

1966

nsec" and add "16 nsec

the

calibrated

24

•c"

and add •de

nsec" and add

or

illustrations

of

the

issuing

defiection

"24

nsec"

11

to

23

ac."

tor

contained service.

AF,

Nunna &

Hhnler,

Inc

.. , C1nc1nnat1,

Ob1o4oo, 11-68

"LIBRARIAN: CHECK FOLD-OUT PAGE FILING SEQUENCE"

iv

SECTION J

CHARACTERISTICS

Type

555/21A/22A

The following Type

555

with

Type

characteristics

Oscilloscope

21 A and

GENERAL

The Type 555 Oscilloscope laboratory-type time measurements

Two

complete mit completely Either

of

sweep

of nels utilize to

select the

required

instrument providing

in

horizontal

independent

the

two

either

separate

for your

time-base

or

both

plug-in preamplifier units, allowing you

bandpass,

application.

PLUG-IN

TYPE

Wide-Band

High-Gain 0.05

TYPE

CA

Dual-

Trace

DC

TYPE

1A1

Wide-Band

Dual-Trace

TYPE

Gain

High-

DC

Differential

TYPE

low-level

AC

Differential

TYPE

Wide-Band

DC

Differential

TYPE

Wide-Band

High-Gain

TYPE

Fast-Rise 0.05 v

DC

TYPE

Fast-Rise

High-Gain 0.05 v

TYPE

Four

Trace

DC

•Data

on

special-purpose

the

of

risetime,

TYPE B 5

D

E

G

H

K

L 5

M

NOTE

are

for

the

Tektronix

(5/N's

Type

22A

7000

Time

and

Base

units.

INFORMATION

is a wide-range

de

and

vertical deflection systems peroperation

plug-in units

the

beams

accurate

to

30

Me frequency

of

the

. The

type

DEFLECTION

mv/cm

0.05

0.005

0.05

1

mv/cm

50

11-v/cm

0.05

0.005

mv/cm

0.02

vertical plug-Ins given

can

two

of input

Vertical .

v/cm

to

v/cm

Characteristics

CALIBRATED

to

0.05

to

to 20

to

0.05 v

20 v / em

to

50

to

v/cm

to

/em

to

to 2 v/cm

/em

to

vertical chan-

and

20

/em

10

20 v/ cm

20 v

10

above)

dual-beam

voltage

range.

two

beams.

control the

sensitivity

FACTOR

v/cm

mv/cm

20

v/cm

/em

v/cm

at

and

TABLE

the

end

Special circuit;

of

an

accurate,

tion of

one

.

05

microseconds to 50 seconds after

gering

pulse. This feature permits you to portion of the measurements the

delayed

oscilloscope screen.

Characteristics for both vertical channels of the oscillo-

scope

are

marily on the vertical plug -

See

Table

when using various plug-in units.

1-1

with

Specific

PASSBAND

2 cps to 12

de to 20

de to 24

de to

de

to 2

0.06 cps to 60

de to 20

de to 15

de to 30

3 cps

de

to

de to 20

of

me

23

me

to 33

me

to

24

me

30

me

this section.

incorporated

continuously-variable

of the sweeps. The

delayed

and

detailed

and

the

undelayed

VERTICAL

identical. The

1-1 for the vertical characteristics

Plug-In Units*

RISETIME

30 nsec

18 nsec

15 nsec

16 nsec

11

0.18

kc

6

11-sec

18 nsec

24 nsec

12 nsec 20 pf

15 nsec

12 nsec

18 nsec

in

the system provide selection

delay

sweep

may

application

sweep,

thereby

observation of the signal.

DEFLECTION

actual

in

units used with the Type 555.

nsec

11-sec

providing precise time

sweeps

are

SYSTEM

specifications

INPUT

CAPACITANCE

47

pf

20 pf

15 pf

47

pf

50 pf

47

pf

47

pf

20 pf

47

pf

in

be

expand

presented

the presenta -

delayed

of

from

of a trig-

a selected

Both

on the

depend

the system

pri-

®!

1-1

Characteristics-

Type

555/21A/22A

HORIZONTAL

Sweep

calibrated steps. control of sweep rates between the calibrated steps, tends slow sweep

%1

1

Rates

From

0.1 microsecond to 5 seconds

Accuracy of calibrated sweep rates

with magnifier off.

An

range

DEFLECTION

uncalibrated control provides variable

to

about

12 seconds per centimeter.

SYSTEM

per

centimeter

and

is

within 3% (typically

in

24

ex-

Magnifiers

Provide horizontal meter portion of the unmagnified crt display when the internal time

second 5% with magnifiers on.

base

Extend the fastest sweep rate of either beam to 0.

per

centimeter. Sweep rates

5X

magnification

generators provide the horizontal deflection.

of

the center 2-centi-

ore

accurate to within

02

micro-

External Horizontal Inputs

Rear-panel connectors permit application of external horizontal signals.

(3

db

approxi

down)

at

Deflection Foetor-Continuously variable from mately 0.2 volts per centimeter to approximately 20 volts per centimeter .

Passband-De

maximum gain.

Input Impedance - Approximately 1 megohm resistance

with

47

pf parallel capacitance with the

switch set

to approximately 350

at

EXT

. A

TTEN. X1.

kc

HORIZ. DISPlAY

Triggering

15/N

11000-upl

Internal- Signals producing a

of vertical deflection (

meters of deflection (+

External- Signals with minimum

(+

AC

to 30

me

(The

the

VERNIER overall signals larger than + 10.1 volts, but the lEVEl control

triggering level.)

15/N

7000-109991

Internal- Signals producing a minimum

of

vertical deflection, up

tion up to 30

External-Signals

up

to

10

(The volts, but the lEVEl control volts. The

Delayed

Sweep

ly

variable.

Incremental

1 0.00 positions of the single setting

Overall Accuracy- Within Time Jitter- less

Signal

and + DC)

.

triggering lEVEl control has

control has a

range

+ 10.1 volts. The instrument

will

not

me.

me,

or

instrument will trigger on signals

VERNIER

Requirements

+

AC

AC)

up to 30

up to 1

be

completely effective

with minimum

0.5 volts up

control

kc,

range

to

5 me,

to

is

operates

only) up to 1

30

effective

Sweep

Delay-0

.1 microsecond

Accuracy-Within

of

DElAYED

the TIME/CM switch.

3%

than 1 part

mm1mum

of

or

of

me.

to

0.2%, between TRIGGER

of

in

20,000.

of 0.2 centimeter

me.

0.6

range

of

1 centimeter

over a + 1-volt

50 seconds, continuous-

the indicated value.

kc,

0.5 volt

+ 1 volt, making the

0.2 volts peak-to-peak

over a range

peak

volt(+ AC

of + 10 volts

will

and

in

determining the

of

0.2 centimeters

greater

the

control, on

or

2 centi-

to

peak

only) up

and

trigger on

VERNIER

of

deflec-

than 10

of

+ 10

range

1.00

and

any

.)

Sweep

matic baseline,

matic baseline, single sweep, sweeps once for each 'A' delayed trigger, tr

igger.

repetition rates other sweep modes must be used.

Modes

Type

21 A in

Type 22A

Automatic baseline mode operates only on signals with

Time Base A compartment- Normal, auto-

and

single sweep.

in

Time Bose B compartment- Normal,

and

triggerable once for each 'A'

above

20

cps. Below

20

cps one of the

delayed

auto

Triggering Signal Sources

Upper beam or lower beam vertical amplifiers, external signals or power line signals; upper beam or lower beam plug-in units when using multi-trace vertical plug single-channel trigger pickoff.

Trigger Slope

Positive

and

Coupling

(+)

or negative (- ) slope, oc- or de-coupled.

in units with

1-2

CATHODE

RAY

TUBE

Type

T5550-2-1 (internal graticule). *

-

Phosphor

Type

P2

other types

normally supplied; types

available

on special

order

Accelerating Potential

1 0,000 volts.

Useable

6 by 10 centimeters. The 6-centimeter vertical dimension

consists of

common to both beams.

Trace

Traces

per 1 0 major horizontal divisions, when the traces

tered vertically

• Crt

SIN

Viewing

4 centimeters for

Alignment

are

type

is

's

7000-8999

parallel to

and

there

T5550-2

.

Area

each

is

no input signal.

(external

other

graticule)

(crt)

P1,

P7

and

P11

.

beam

with 2 centimeters

within 0.1 major division

for instruments with

optional;

are

cen-

@

Internal Unblanking

Intensity-type, de-

coupled.

External Intensity Modulation (Z-axis)

Coupling-Input

through

low external

will

rear-panel

Input Time Constant- Typically

Amplitude-Typ

Input

produce

signals ac-

connectors.

impedance

normal intensity modulation .

coupled

about

.

ically a 20-volt peak-to-peak signal

to crt control grids

10 milliseconds with

Characteristics-

Line

Fuses (located on the front panel

unit)

ore 7

amp

slow-blowing for the slow-blowing for the amp

slow-blowing for the

ing fo r the

DC

Supplies for 234-volt operation .

Line Frequency

50 cps to 60 cps.

Power Consumption

Maximum of

consumption.

about

1050

Type

555/21A/22A

of

the

AC

Heater$ Supplies for 117-volt AC

Heaters

watts

and 3 amp

including plug-in power

power

and 5 amp

operat

slow-blow-

supply

ion; 4

Multi

channels.

Trace Chopped Blanking

Crt circuit permits vertical plug-in units with multi-

blanking to tum off

the

display

while switching

between

Internal Graticule

Markings--6 divisions; 2-millimeter markings (minor divisions) on cal centerline zontal centerlines 2 centimeters from the the graticule.

Illumination-Variable

vertical

and

on

and

the

10

horizontal 1-centimeter (major)

upper

beam

edge

lighting.

AMPLITUDE CALl

and

BRA

lower

top

TOR

and

Output Waveform

Square-wave

Output

0.2 millivolts to 100 volts

signal

Voltage

at

approximately

peak-to-peak

1,000 cps.

in

18 steps.

Accuracy

Peak-to-peak

with

load

amplitude

impedance

above

within

1 kilohm.

3%

of

indi

cated

trace input

the

verti-

beam

hori-

bottom of

voltage

OTHER

Output Signals

Calibrotor- 1 kilocycle (approx .)

tudes from 0.2 millivolts to 100 volts .

Delayed approximately the

'

A'

of

'

A'

peak-to-peak, with a pulse duration

'A'

bose

'8' +Gate

peak-to-peak, with a pulse duration

sweep

'B' base

'A' Sawtooth- Time bose

150 volts

'B' Sawtooth-Time

150 volts

Trigger

5 volts

delay

period. Repetition rote of pulse

time

bose

+

Gate-Positive-going

sweep

and

generator.

generator

a repetition rote

- Positive-going signal

and

a repetition rote

.

in

ampl itude.

in

amplitude.

CHARACTERISTICS

Available

Pulse-Differentiated

in

amplitude

generator

.

bose

signal

'A'

'B'

square

, occurring

approximately

equal

to

app

equal

to

sweep

wave, at

positive-going pulses

is

the

to the duration of

that

of

roximately 25 volts

to the duration of

that

of the '

sawtooth waveform,

at

same

the '

the

25 volts

A'

ampli-

end

as

that

time

B' time

Ventilation

Separate the event of overheating, the self-resetting thermal relay interrupts instrument

forced filtered air systems for the two units.

power

.

of

In

INSTRUMENT POWER

Internal Power Supplies

Electronically

power line voltages from 105 volts to 125 volts when wired

for 117-volt

wired for 234-volt operation.

Line

Voltage

The line

cated

on

unit.

Changes

operation

indicated on

changes

Wiring and

fans

regulated

operation

voltage

a metal

can

on

design-center voltages the

are

all shown on

; from 210 volts to 250 volts when

for which

tag

on

the

be

made

Decoupling Network schematic

for the

power

circuits for

the

rear

in

the

transformers, s

the

diagram

stable

instrument is wired

panel

of

the

internal wiring to permit

of

117 or 234 volts,

.

operation

power

aturable

is

indi-

supply

diagram

reactor

on

as

Construction

Aluminum-alloy ·chassis dized front panels; blue vinyl-finished cabinets panels. Side

and

bottom panels

and

cabinets. Photo-etched ano-

separately

Dimension!!

Indi

cator

Unit- 13 inches wide; 20 inches high; 24 inches

ight without vert ical plug-in units: 68 pounds .

deep. Weight

Unit-13

inches wide; 10 inches high; 17

: 45 pounds.

Accessories

in

extension (013-013)

OX

BNC

to binding post

power

cable

Attenuation

(012-032)

adapt

ers (1 03-033)

.

deep. We

Power Supply inches

Standard

1- Time bose plug4- Attenuotor probes, 1 l- Inter-unit 2-

(01

0-127)

and

removable.

rear

1

/

1-3

2

Characteristics-

Type

555/21

A/22A

1-Test 1-Polarized 1-3-conductor 1-3 2-lnstruction

SPECIAL-PURPOSE

Type

The Type N Sampling Unit Oscilloscope permits fractional the input signal

of the signal

the input signal lent time nanosecond imately 600 factor with less

volt ond

Type

The Type 0 Plug-In Unit

amplifier

tion, differentiation, function linear amplification.

scope channels simultaneously, such

Input from 10 kilohms to 1 megohm, from 1 0 impedances amplitude pedance

Type

The test signal

ideally 107 ardization of a Tektronix plug -

is

240 tive able time

Type

The Type Q Plug-

oscilloscope such gages strain unit. The unit

'for green

groticule;

lead

(012-031}

light filter (378-545}*

power

cord

(161-01

to 2-wire

adapter manuals

(1

03-013}

(070-403}

VERTICAL

N

observation

nanosecond

base

dynamic

per

centimeter to

and

. Characteristics

risetime,

me;

range;

(1

are

is

10 millivolts

than

0·9 second} risetimes.

taken,

slightly farther

reconstructed on a relatively long

each

corresponding

2 millivolts of system noise; ± 120-milli-

equivalent

per

10

nanoseconds

0

capable

the

passband

can

impedances

picofarads

is

± 50 volts

is

approximately

of

When

of

be

used

as can

to 1 microfarad. Selection

from

an

is a dual

performing the

generation,

used with

each

channel

in

series to

double

be

selected

identical

and

30

ohms.

P

Type

P Plug-In Unit

of

known

compensated

Square-Wave

of

the main -unit vertical amplifier transient

step

functions

polarity

. Step function

between 0 and

is

approximately 4 nanoseconds.

generates

waveform,

Type K Unit driven with a Tektronix Type

Generator

in

per

. The Type P permits the

type

oscilloscope. Pulse repetition

second, with

amplitude

3 major

Q

In

Unit permits

as

and

gages

instruments

plastic

polarized

other

the Type 555 to

transducers. Excitation

and

transducers

provides

in

(378-514).

serial

filter

high

number

Green

is

for

gain,

± 5 milliamps,

0}

PLUG-IN

when

used

with the Type 555

of

repetitive signals with

sample

of

sweep

integration.

simulating the

graticule

are

ronge

filter

internal

on a different cycle

along

the

Type

to a

passband

centimeter

rates

per

centimeter.

channel

operations

and

the

Type 555 Oscillo-

is

de

to 25

perform

from 5 resistance

and 6 capacitance

range

of

a fast rise

either

positive

is

continuously

divisions. Pulse rise-

any

Textronix plug-in

be

operated

provided

low noise,

voltages

7000-8999, is for

graticule

UNITS

Samples

waveform,

N include: 0.6

input deflection

from 1

linear

me.

two

of

values.

and

step

output

by the plug-in

and

use

with

crt.

and

equiva-

of

approx-

nanosec-

operational

of

integra-

and

non-

The

two

operations

values, values,

feedback

Output

output im-

-function of

stand

response

rate

or

nega-

adjust

type

with strain

for the

extremely

light

filter

external

of

an

low drift. Frequency de

to 6 kc; sensitivity 10,000 microstrain tinuously

risetime

is

calibrated

variable

is

per

between

TypeR

The Type R Plug-In Unit

pulse

generator characteristics method. When scope,

delay

be

displayed factors meter. A directly nally

and scope 50 millivolts

between

range

to

derived

Pulse risetime

minimum

is

about

which

of

junction transistors

the

Type R is

time, risetime,

simultaneously. from 0.5 milliamp

pushbutton

the

input

waveforms.

of

the

displayed

12

nanoseconds.

to

10

steps

. Repetition

volts

the

TypeS

The

Type conductor junction Performance

dicted

tics. Since an

element can observing uring the resistance, components

The

steps

in

six

is 9 picofarads,

per

centimeter

Type

The

scope

of

operation: ferential input comparator. With age

em. Maximum resolution

As a passband do

not

volts/ em

As a differential input common-mode tion factor, 40,000 to 1. Maximum input signal

/7

volt

is

As a

three ± 10 volts,

S Plug-In Unit

diode

capacitance,

by

analyzing

be

used

the junction

Type

from 1 to 20 milliamps,

steps

parameters,

of a diode

it

is

essentially a means

while

passing

for

other

.

S offers

from 0

to

and

calibrated.

Z

Type

Z Plug-In Unit

voltage

range

nsec,

comparison

measurements.

(1}

as a conventional

preamplifier,

of

± 100 volts,

conventional

of

de

overscan

calibrated

to

the

to

25 v/ cm

signal level ± 1

and

offers a

or

-1

and

zero

sensitivity

13 me with

differential

voltage

response

approximately

is

switch

of

Type

and

the

characteristics

capacitance

calibrated

2 milliamps.

deflection

preamplifier,

screen. The deflection

in

volt f 5 nsec.

to + 100 volts.

of

the

in

10

steps

major

graticule

steps

.

is a combined

used

to

measure

used

storage

Calibrated

to

connects

the

oscilloscope

R Unit

risetime with

in 8 calibrated

the

in a particular

recovery

constant

applications

the

of

9 fixed,

preamplifier,

ranges: zero

is

Pulse

rate

is

designed

such

stored

and

for plotting current

forward

and

reverse

factors

extends

It

can

or

(3}

as a calibrated

of

50

mv

effective

the

Type

the

calibrated

00

common-mode

comparator,

Type

60

microseconds. Strain

from

division

by

in

the

time,

100 milliamps

a front-

less

the

amplitudes

is

120 pulses

to

as

charge

"turn-on"

as

of

or

inductance

currents

Diode

ore

the

be

used

preamplifier,

/ em

scale

Z Unit

the

Type

the

volts

rate

Q Plug-In Unit

10

microstrain

and

is

con-

power

supply

the

high-frequency

the

pulse-response

Type

555

and

falltime

vertical

panel

for

observing

than 5 nanoseconds

Type

555

steps

and

test

certain

junction

at

the

circuit

can

voltage

through well. For transistors,

in

currents

shunt

capacitance

0.05

and

accuracy

in

three

and

insertion volt-

range

is

Z Unit offers a

555 for

factors steps

Type Z

at

minimum deflec-

rejection

of

change

the

to ± 1 volt,

and

Oscillo-

may deflection per

centi-

terminal

exter-

Oscillo-

range

from

variable

per

second.

semi-

resistance

junction.

be

pre

characteris-

across

it, the unit

example,

or

meas-

of

circuit

five fixed

calibrated

0.5 volts

of

oscillo-

modes

(2}

as

a dif-

differential

is

± 2000

0.005% .

signals

that

ore

0.05

.

accepts

ratio

is

+ 1

Type Z has

zero

is

to

,

-

a

of

to

1-4

®

SECTION 2

GENERAL INFORMATION

The Type 555

is

adaptable

of

the potentialities

use familiar with the function ous controls. information the controls, the use of

the

sweep,

Oscilloscope

to a great

This

section

required

and

for

of

operation

Horizontal Sweep

The

two

plug-

in

'time deflection (sweeping) Either

beam

both

beams

The

Upper

are

used

beams.

In

most

used

in two positions base automatic the triggering circuit .

TION switch permit use sweep

The settings switches. the

trigger identical rates Uncalibrated

be

varied

switches,

per

centimeter when

Beam

to

applications,

the AUTO

units .

sweep

modes

sweep

of

the

In

sweep

ranging

continuously

and

can

select the time

provide

In

of

rates

turn, the

holdoff

from

VARIABLE

can

of

be

deflected

be

swept

and

Lower Beam HORIZ.

BASELINE

normal

addition,

of

the

Other

operation.

of

the

appropriate

sweep

period

characteristics. There

.1

p.seconds to 5

extend

the

Sweep Triggering

The oscilloscope

of

the

crt

screen while

of

tion random, of traced

the

drift across the screen .

appear cha

To

must In is

the

or

the

input signal,

out

woveshope

In

most cases

stationary racteristics produce a stationary

be

time-

the Type 555 Oscilloscope,

display

beam

from left to right

an

input

beam. If

at

voltage

the

some

rate

a different horizontal position

would either

it

is

desirable

on

of

the

wav

to

displayed

OPERATING

is

number

of

operation,

the

between

the

a versatile instrument which

of

the

and

of

input

base

the two

the

trace

of

two

. The

controls permit

the

switch

is

sweeps

not

eform

display, the

applications.

instrument, you should

operation

the

manual

including the functions

cables

and

of

the

delayed

units

produce

cathode-ray

by

simultaneously

repetition

waveform

either

base

units

to

SWEEP FUNCTION switches

or

NORMAL positions. These

triggered

AUTO

when

positions

the single

beams

TIME/CM

rate

sweep

formed

signal

be

for a repetitive

oscilloscope screen so

the

operation

BASELINE

no

signal

of

sweep

are

and

determines

two

time-base

are

seconds

the

steps

rate

is

in

the 5 SEC

by

the repetitive

across

produces

were

allowed

to

waveform

indistinguishable

con

be

start

rote

starting

by

To

of

each

provides

probes,

sweep

the

tube

time

base

by

the

DISPLAY

drive

the

provides

is

the

SWEEP FUNC-

and

determined

HORIZ.

the

24

calibrated

per

the

sweep

of

the

to

about

position.

the

oscilloscope

vertical

the

repetition

each

waveform

examined

of

each

of

the

input signal.

time

of

using the input sig-

make

become

of

the

tri

ggering

feature.

horizontal

same

switches

separate

of

the

applied

delayed

DISPLAY

duration

units

centimeter.

rates

TIME

12

seconds

to

occur

would

time

or

that

in

the

vari-

basic

beams

unit,

unit.

time

by

have

sweep

/ CM

sweep

deflec

would

detail. sweep

sweep

INSTRUCTIONS

nal

or

full

of

or

are

an

to

the

of

to

at

rate

be

and

to

the

another 2-1

Figure nal, the triggering signal, for a typical sine-wave superimposed on a holdoff waveform so the crt

retrace

again

before the trigger signal

sweep.

.

Fig. 2-1 .

sweep

operation.

The two units

air

can

by

fans

at

the

rear proper the fans

-

becomes

power

the this occurs , check units. A constant

ation

of

onc

e with the instructions given

of

this manual.

Transformer Conver

This instrument

indicated

Power Supply Unit.

60 cycles. The transfor me r

time-related

shows the time-relationship

to the left

of

the screen

Input

and

display

------------+---

' ' I

Triggering

1

I I

I

Horizontal

rvv1

Ladder

diagram

circulate freely

in

the

separate ur,

of

the units.

operation. Never

operating. If too

high, a thermal cuto ut w

until

the instrument. Keep the

on the

showing

INSTALLATION

of

the osci

about

Side

the inteonol

the temper

the

air

filt

temp

erature

sion

is

wired

tog

adjacent

Li

ne freq

signal to

and

Crt

llos

its

operate the oscilloscop e without

ature has

ers

lo

cc.

start

(trigger) the

between

the

horizontal

. The triggering signal

and

is

allowed

Signal

I

''--;,....

Holdoff

. I

Sweep

I I

Display

waveform

cope

should

them . Ventilation

that

draw

panels

should

temperature

ill

returned to normal.

and

the

is

important

air

filters

in the

operate

to the

u<=

ncy must

;1

be convented for

sweep

be

ready

to

___

Signal

1

rv

sequence

be

placed

air

in

through filters

be

open

and

clearance

for

accurate oper

clean

Maintenance

with the line

power

be

between

sweep

the input sig-

voltage

beam

con

to

sweep

start

a new

_

in

triggered

so

that

is

provided

in

place

for

in

either un!t disconnect

around the

in

accord

section

voltage

plug on the

50

and

operation

.

is

If

-

·

®

2-1

Operating

Instructions-

Type

555/21A/22A

on nominal line

ing connections on the saturable

on the Decoupling

Fuse

data

fuses

or

The Type 555 Oscilloscope letter-series the two vertical deflection systems,

Time-Base Units to

The use

change

to meet a wide ticular plug-in units to requirements plug-in units, flection factor

Plug-

in servicing supplied with the Type 555 allows operated the oscilloscope. For normal are

left

screws

located

The side

access

to

voltages

reactor

. Rewire

is

given

converting

SELECTION

and

1-series plug-in units

of

plug-in units

the vertical characteristics

range

of

your applications.

yo~

and

type

time-

and

calibration

with either time

in

the Type 555,

at

panels

of the oscilloscope must

the retaining screws (see

of 117 volts

two

transformers, the fans

according

Network

to

generate

must consider

number base

the

schematic

in

the

electrical Parts list for

another

OF

PLUG-IN UNITS

the horizontal

at

the vertical inputs permits you

of

application

be

used must

and

units

are

. The plug -

base

operation,

and

rear

of

line

is

designed

the

type

used primarily for

unit

are the time-

or

234 volts, by

to

the

diagrams

diagram

voltage

as the input

and

of

requirements. The

be

selected to satisfy the

In

selecting the vertical

bandpass

of

in

the

partially

held

Fig

. 2-2).

.

Types

the

inputs

extension

instrument

the Time Base Units

in

base

be

replacing

to use Tektronix

stages

21 A and

sweep

oscilloscope to

, risetime, de-

required

accessory

extended

place

by

compartments

removed

chang

and

the

shown

for

22A

voltages

par

.

ease

to

from

thumb-

to

gain

of

be

22A must

delayed

The Type 555

of

the

Operating

damage

not plies to instrument will plies

are

.

-

All the Type 555 scope oscilloscope (s complex section,

FUNCTIONS

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR Switch

.

CAL Connector

SCALE Control

DELA

YEO TRIGGER FROM 'A' TIME (1

-1 0

DELAYED

TRIG

. OUT

Connector

be used

sweep

feature

Oscilloscope

plug-

in

units installed

the instrument with a

the

oscilloscope,

go

out

of

regulation

not

regulating

FRONT

controls

and

functions

in

the discussions

.

AND

and

connectors

are

located

its plug-

ee

Fig. 2-3). Some

are

OF

Sets square-wave OUT 18 peak-to-peak.

OUT

ILLUM.

BASE

MULTIPLIER)

Provides 1 for checking systems probes. Amplitude controlled sw

Controls intensity lamps. Rotate clockwise ination; counterclockwise ination. The markings for measurements

Sets time

A pulse.

CM control.) livered and layed

Provides a from Time Base A for nal device .

setting

and control. (See Fig

for Time Base B

of

the

instrument.

should

or

but

operate

due

correctly unless

in

not

connected

plug-in

may

cause

to

insufficient

order

be

used

by

unit missing will

the

REAR-PANEL CONTROLS

required

on

units

treated

of

the

and

in

the

in

CONTROLS

Indicator Unit

the

amplitude

signal

connector

steps

from .2 millivolts

kc

square-wave

gain

and

for adjusting

itch.

sweep

by

lamps

accurate

.

duration

and

(Operates

Delayed

to

DELA

to

Time Base B Trigger circuit for de-

sweep

operation.

delayed

Delay

of

Time Base A TIME/CM switch

DELAYED

for front on

of

greater

various

AND

. Amplitude

AMPLITUDE

output

with Time Base A

YEO

TRIGGER (1-10

2-1

the

panels

the

rear

the controls which

detail

modes

CONNECTORS

of

the 1 kc

available

is

of

output

the

vertical deflection

compensation

of

output

graticule

to

edge-light

time

decrease

time

between

of

Delayed

trigger

TRIG. OUT

trigger

triggering

is

determined

0).

of

increase

to

use

the

without extensions.

power

loading.

power

operation

the

panel

later

of

at

adjustable

to

CALIBRATOR

illumination

the

and

triggering

pulse

output

MULTIPLIER)

all

sup

The

sup

oscillo-

of

the

have

in

this

operation.

(approx.) the

CAL

100

volts,

primarily

signal

illum-

graticule

voltage

Trigger

TIME

is de-

connector

pulse

an

exter-

by

-

of

in

of

is

of

/

Fig.

2-2

screws.

Base A plugin Type 22A

. Location

Normally,

the Time Base B

may

2-2

of

the

a Type

in

21

compartment,

compartment

be used

lime-base

A Time-Base Unit

for Time Base A; however, a Type

and

vertical plug-in locking

is

used

and

a Type 22A Time-Base Unit . Either a Type

in

the

21 A or

Time

a

INTENSITY Control

Upper Beam and Lower Beam

Adjusts

compensate caused ing crease crease

the

brightness

for

by

changing

rates

. Rotate control clockwise

brightness; counterclockwise

brightness.

of

changes

the

sweep

display

in

brightness

or

trigger

to

to de-

to

-

in-

Operating

Instructions-

Type

555/21A/22A

CAUTION: Excessive intensity nently

damage screen. Use the

beam

the

level

the

crt

spot

FOCUS Control

HORIZ. Switch

HORIZ. POSITION

Control

Beam-Position Neons

CRT Connector

(rear

CRT

Switch internal multi-trace

EXT. INPUT

EXT GAIN

Trigger INPUT Connector

DISPLAY

CATHODE

panel)

CATHODE Selects intensity

HORIZ. Permits

Connector

. HORIZ.

Control

Adjusts focus for mimimum The internal ASTIG. control for tive

beam

beam. See

adjustment

source

Selects age

from

external

either

an magnification (X. rate

and

ternal

horizontal

Controls

trace;

positions display controls of coupling

Indicate or

Small

direction the light during

sweep

will

vertically.

Permits intensity creases intensity. 1 0-volt signal appreciable connector external

externally CATHODE CATHODE position in

nal for Front-panel HORIZ. be

Controls produced Horizontal varia

em with HORIZ.

TEN. X1;

at

Time

Permits from

onto

both

the

beam

the

spot,

whether

arrows

screen

rate

be

unlit

application

intensity; positive-going

signal.

chopped

application

horizontal

in

one

ble

from

EXT

ATIEN .

Base A and

application

an

external

the

INTENSITY control

brightness

that

causes a halo

or

trace.

of

trace

also

the

Calibration

of

the of

horizontal

either

time-

horizontal

unmagnified

2)

X1

or

X1 0 attenuation

input signal.

horizontal

any

the

coarse

position, using a

between

electrical position

beside

of

the

beam

. Both

the

is

slow;

if

modulation.

intensity

grounded

applied

connector.

mode.

of

the

amount

by

externally

deflection

approximately

from 2

to

X10.

Time Base B

source

can

phosphors

turned

crt

spot

width

affects

ASTIG. control.

base

input. Also selects

(X1)

of

the

position portion

crt

screen and

the

two

on

or

off

the

lamps

from

horizontal

sweep

both

the

display

of

external

Negative-going

modulation.

except

modulation

chopped

signals

leave

except

of

external

deflection

DISPLAY

EXT.

A TIEN positions.

of

horizontal deflection

factor

DISPLAY

20

volts/

of

that

of

down

to form

or

trace

or

spot

the

focus

Procedure

deflection

unit

or

display

time-base

of

crt

of a magnified

. Single knob

fine

adjustment

"backlash"

controls.

of

the

crt

indicate

the

lamps

of

the

dot

vertical

is

signal for

change

when

signal from

switching through switch

when

voltage

of

switch must

applied

is

continuously

0.2 to 2

switch

em with switch

triggering

is

time-

permathe

crt

to

keep

below

around

. Adjust

diameter

respec-

of

the

for

volt-

from

the

or

SX

sweep

of

an

ex-

spot

the

trace

screen

the

center

may

if

the

lamps

centered

in-

decreases

produces

leave

applying

CRT

in

CRT

operating

sig-

crt

beam.

voltage

volts/

EXT. AT-

signal

of

or

.

Switch

.

Control SWEEP

Switch

.

Trigger SOURCE Switch

Trigger COUPLING Switch

Trigger SLOPE

Trigger Control

Trigger VERNIER

FUNCTION

TIME/CM Switch

VARIABLE Control

UNCALIBRATED Neon

LEVEL

the

to switch

Selects from

Selects input

nal

Selects falling form for

Selects causes Operates

Selects range small

Selects

basic

(The last Type operation.

Sets

using the

from

meter Varies

steps

sweep

meter Sweep VARIABLE BRATED ments.

lights in

input signal. Set

to

EXT.

the

source

one

of

six sources :

UPPER signal, Vertical Amplifier

UPPER BEAM off positions in

LINE cuit (50 to

EXT. trigger ternal

NORMAL; AUTO

SINGLE SWEEP; SWEEPS

TRIG.;

TRIGGERABLE DLY'D

BEAM

from

beam;

BEAM

PLUG-IN, from the

in

the

apply

units with

signal, from

trigger

either

triggering

or

external

either

(-)

portion

triggering

trigger

over

triggering

for fine

triggering

mode

of

modes:

BASELINE;

ONCE

TRIG

two

22A.)

See

sweep

rote

that

time-base

sweep

CALIBRATED

voltage.

.1

p.seconds

.

sweep

of

TIME

rote

to

with switch

rate

is

control.

positi

when

the

vertical plug-in unit. (These

60

the

.

on

trigger

to

use

external

of

the

triggering signal

or

LOWER

the

trigger

of

PLUG-IN

only to multi-trace plug-

trigger

pickoff);

the

cps);

signal

INPUT

oc-

signal

source.

rising (

circuit a ± 1 0-volt

adjustment

signals. sweep

positions

text

of

rate / CM switch, about

not

for making time measure-

VARIABLE

position.

regulated

applied

conector

or

de-coupling whether

+)

of

the

triggering

the

sweep

waveform

to

level

over

operation

FOR

EACH

ONCE

FOR

are

for specific

the

beam

unit for

Sweep

to 5 seconds

continuously

12

seconds

in

the 5 SEC

calibrated

leave

control in

SOURCE

trigger.

BEAM

pickoff

the

respective

or

LOWER

trigger

through ex-

.

from inter-

portion

(see Fig. 2-6).

level

start a sweep.

range.

a ± 1-volt

or

for use on

from five

"A'

EACH

only on the

mode

(or beams)

generation

rates

per

between

and

extends

per

position.

when using

Control

input

in

pick-

oc

of

or wove

that

DLY

range

centi-

CALI-

is

the

Cir-

the

-

'D

'A'

of

not

2-3

Operating

Instructions-

Type

555/21A/22A

2-4

Fig.

2-3.

Front-

and

rear-panel

controls

and

connectors.

®

PUSH

TO

RESET

Button triggerable condition. READY

STABILITY Adjustment

SAWTOOTH

Connector

+GATE

Connector

POWER Switch

Power Indicator lamp

Output

front panel of the Type 555 Oscilloscope sytsem. These are: an Amplitude Calibrator square wave; a Delayed Trigger pulse; a Sawtooth waveform from each time base. Typical wave-

forms trace vertical plug channel signal output for triggering oscilloscopes from only one single-channel signal to the triggering circuits through ternal wiring.

ing or driving external devices this application, the time-base unit running sweep.

Neon

ON

Signals

Several low-impedance signal outputs

+Gate

are

input signal.

Use

of

the

Calibrated

The

edge with 10 horizontal 2 millimeter subdivisions marked on the vertical centerline and

the two horizontal centerlines. The deflection factors of

the crt beams the marks provide a calibrated scale for making time voltage measurements.

To

protect the graticule shield and viewing plastic scratch shield. For viewing under bright ambient light conditions, use the light filter to provide better traceto-screen contrast. When using the light filter, however, be

careful not to set the beam intensity so high that

the crt phosphor.

crt (instrument

or

plastic light filter

filter

and

Resets Single Sweep lockout circuit to a

lights when Single Sweep lockout circuit is

in

triggerable condition; light

is

when sweep of the crt.

Sets input level of Sweep

stable

triggering.

Provides output voltage waveform, 150 volts peak-to-peak, capable devices. Time Base B sawtooth waveform includes layed mode.

Provides output of sweep gating waveform,

20 volts peak-to-peak. Time Base B waveform contains delay time when

ating

in

Power

Applies line power transformers. A time-delay relay allows the tube cathodes to warm up before de power

is

Indicates that the low-voltage circuit.

waveform from each time-base unit;

illustrated

+Gate

in

Fig.

-i

n units provide

In

the Type 555, these units

and

held off after single sweep

of

horiz.:>ntal

of driving

delay

delayed

Supply

applied

2-4.

Sawtooth waveforms for trigger-

or

triggering external

time when operating

mode.

Unit

to

low-voltage power

to circuits.

ac

line voltage

are

In

addition, some multi-

an

amplified single-

is

illustrated

is

usually set for a free-

goes

Gate

circuit for

deflection

is

applied to

available

apply

in

Fig.

+Gate

2-8.

Graticule

-lighted internal graticule and

6 vertical 1-centimeter divisions

are

calibrated to these graticule marks.

bonded

are

provided with the instrument.

for photographing the display, use the clear

plastic faceplate of the internal

S/N's

9000-up), always use a scratch

in

front

is

accurately marked

of

the crt. The shield

For

it

will

normal

in

oper

at

and

Thus

burn

out

de-

the

a

the

in-

In

and

Operating

Instructions-

Type

555/21A/22A

I I

7 Volts:.l

-

I I

t-

__.,.

Selected

I

voltage

amplitude

-

T

-

25

Volts

..1.

T

150

Volts

.i

Fig.

2-4.

Output

For instruments with external graticules (S/N's 7000-8999), the color of the graticule illumination may be changed from white to red, or vice versa, by rotating the graticule

180°.

Vertical Controls

The vertical plugfront-panel vertical positioning that beam. Refer plug-

in

units for operation of the vertical controls.

CONNECTING

Input signals on the crt screen two vertical plug-

Use

of

Coaxial

In

general, coaxial cables should signal source to the vertical input. The use of coaxial cables nearly eliminates pickup from stroy electromagnetic fields, and

also eliminates radiation from the connecting cables by grounding the outside conductors. use

an

and

unshielded input lead

if

its

frequency

r-1Del~y

t--

'-I

tije

Frequency - 1

/ v

v

v.

.....

d.

waveforms

in

unit for

to

the instruction manuals

TO

t~at

are

to be displayed

are

applied

in

units.

Cables

is

low.

.l

...

~

I

kc

-

.I

Sweep'4

~

-

I

tir

/

/ v

Sweep

rmi

I

available

at

each

and

THE

to the input connectors on the

if

the signal amplitude

When

an

r-

~

1--

1---1

v

.

...

It-!-

I

the

front

panel.

beam contains all the

deflection controls for

of

SIGNAL

as

vertical deflection

be

used to connect the

It

is

sometimes possible to

unshielded

DELAYED TRIGGER

AMPLITUDE

CALIBRATOR

+

GATE

r-

SAWTOOTH

the particular

SOURCE

is

lead

is

high

used,

2-5

Operating

Instructions-

Type

555/21A/22A

connect the chassis

signal sources impedances. Unterminated connections result tions within the waveforms. The input

nate

of the plug-in unit will provide sufficient termination for sig-

nal reflections . However, erably end

oscilloscope on the signal source must resistance 1 megohm which a negligible

capacitance

pacitance tive versely affect both the

tion

reduce

Use

attenuator

played permits observation of signals

limits amplitudes, however, must able

properly adjusted

manual with the vertical plug-in unit accompanying

by connecting the

and on the crt screen. The compensating

justed to provide minimum distortion

another

In

high-frequency work

the signal source,

different from

of the

When

connecting

loading

of

the signal source. Attenuator

capacitive

of

In

addition

waveform by

of

value

Before a

observing several cycles of

corner of the

lead

of

the signal source.

and

connecting

cables

coaxial

that

cable

may

an

at

the input

adequately

value

. However,

of the vertical plug-

of the input

at

high frequencies

and

Probes

to reducing the

probe

also

the

the oscilloscope

of the

probe

is with the plug-in unit. according

used,

to the

the

probe. In

probe

square-wave

between

and

also

input signal,

of

displayed

resistive

decreases

being used.

the oscilloscope chassis

it

is

usually necessary

cables

in

cause

distortion of the

cable

a termination

if

the source

of the connecting

need

the vertical plug-in unit

cable

attenuation

and

be

it

must

procedure

cable

will often serve to termi-

impedance

to

be

terminated.

the

loading

limits low-frequency

at

high frequencies, the input

in

and

becomes

loading

load

beyond

plug-

limited

Compensation

general,

to

signal (see

significant.

may

be

waveform

probes

to

on the signal source,

the

amplitude

factor

the normal

in

combination. Signal

to

the maximum allow-

be

compensated

given

and

this adjustment

one

of the vertical inputs

the

calibrator

capacitor

of

the Fig

and

to

their characteristic

placed

be

the distributed ca-

very small

of the

terminate

in

signal reflec-

displayed

at

the input

is

cable,

considered. The

sufficient

and

can

in

top

. 2-5).

consid-

the source

effect

of

is

usually

loading

Capaci-

to

the

opera

be

used

values

of

the

probe

. This

amplitude

to

operate

of the

probe

the instruction

the instructions

is

done

waveform

is

then ad-

and

leading

the

ad-

dis-

an

Internal Triggering

Either time-base unit Upper Amplifier, the

plug-

in source applied

base

unit. Selection

SOURCE switch.

It

is

of

the UPPER these

positions, a

from the

to

the Trigger circuit.

off or internally

is

same

.

triggering.

is

If

a multi-

is

used,

LOWER

triggered

If a Type to Units, ing base loscope cal

If a Type be Units, provide channel the IN nected.

Sources

can

be

Beam Vertical Amplifier,

unit, or can

usually most convenient

input signals by setting the SOURCE switch

BEAM

point

Upper

the

be

to the

external

or

selected

trace set

BEAM

to

the Trigger circuit. in each

555

be

used

the

wire

plug

and

unit)

should

will

plug-in

555

used

with

the

oscilloscope

internal

triggering

UPPER

BEAM

positions

Order

Beam plug-

power

used for triggering with the

trigger

of

the triggering signal

LOWER

sample

Vertical Amplifier circuit

plug-in unit with single-channel

the SOURCE switch

PLUG-IN

this manner,

time, relative

with

Serial

with

Type

between

the

ceramic

be

not

be

compatible

units with

with Type

connection

signal.

PLUG-IN

of

the

modification

triggered

line signal.

INPUT connector

to

BEAM. With of the vertical signal

to

apply

When

each

NOTE

Number

21

and

19

strip

removed. Otherwise

single-channel

Serial

Number

21A

and

will

need of

Without

and

SOURCE

kit

internally from the

the

lower

Beam Vertical

in

unit,

the

In

addition,

trigger

the switch

to

UPPER

the single-channel signal

a multi-

trace

to

the

7000

Type

on

the

(inside

with

below

Type

to

the

multi-trace

the

LOWER

switches

number

lower

trigger

on

is

made

internally from

is

and

trigger

BEAM

trace

is

triggered

channel used for

or

above

22

Time-Base

interconnect-

each

the

multi-trace

pickoff.

7000

22A

Time-

be

modified

modification,

BEAM

are

040-328.

an

external

the time-

with the

to

in

one

picked

applied

PLUG-IN

display

time-

oscil-

verti-

is

Base

single-

PLUG-.

discon-

Beam

signal

one

either

of

off

to

pick-

at

the

is

to

TRIGGERING

For most

gered

being of a suitable triggering signal controls.

applications

by some signal

observed

on the crt. This section discusses the selection

-

------

the oscilloscope

that

is

Incorrect

2-6

THE

SWEEP

sweep

must

be

trig-

time-related to the input signal

and

the

use of the triggering

._

.

~

r

Fig. 2-5.

\...

r !

Probe

Triggering from the the vertical input signal This

type

of satisfactory for triggering . Set the SOURCE switch for

stable

waveform.

\...

I...

,

(

Incorrect Correct

compensation

waveforms.

operation

triggering on the constant-

\.,

J,.

~

power

line

is

time-

is

used when the input signal

....

1-

is

- - -

-

sometimes useful when

to

the line frequency.

line-frequency

-

....

~

is

not

to

LINE

-

Operating .Instructions-

Type

555/21A/22A

External Triggering Sources

If

a triggering signal than those of the input signal, the external trigger introduced through a jumper lead, a coax connected

switch on the time-base unit

External triggering device under test. The triggering signal can any observed anywhere triggering controls. Phasethe signals

when the triggers

particularly useful with multi-trace plug-in units.

Triggering from

of

time-jitter measurements when

stable

to

the trigger

convenient point

can

be

than the displayed input signal.

is

required with characteristics other

it

can

be

applied

INPUT

connector. The signal may

INPUT

connector. Set the

to

EXT.

is

convenient for signal-tracing

in

the circuit, then signals can

in

the circuit without readjusting the

and

determined directly from the crt display

are

taken from a single source.

an

external source increases the accuracy

time-relationships between

the

trigger source

by means of

cable,

be

or

taken from

Triggering Controls

The trigger

from either the rising (

of

the tions it the desired display, although some waveforms can gered

on either slope. Generally, waveform will provide the most selection of the triggering slope will nature of the triggering signal. desired.

SLOPE

switch provides selection of triggering

+ slope)

triggering waveform (see

is

necessary

Sweep

on

to

trigger on the proper slope

triggen

+

slope

SLOPE

or

falling (-slope) portion

Fig. 2-6).

the

stable

and

In

many applica-

to

steepest portion of the

triggering, but final

depend

the type

f7

on both the

of

~+

a probe

SOURCE

in

This

is

more

provide be

trig-

display

I\ I\

be

is

The trigger gering signal AC

position

cations, since triggering

position of the waveform on the crt screen. The of the switch should ticular de level, signals.

a

The trigger the triggering waveform where triggering occurs (see

2-6).

These the display. The volt range,

To

trigger

rotate the

is

form triggering level can then Turning counterclockwise causes triggering tive point on the waveform, triggering are

approximately centered when the display triggered. The the trigger level when small

are

nals

The following procedure strument beam

operation

Connect the two main units of the instrument together with the inter-unit power line. With time-base

stalled following positions:

FOCUS

INTENSITY

HORIZ.

COUPliNG

is

ac

of

the

or

LEVEL

are

the last controls to

LEVEL

has

ten times the effect of the

the

LEVEL

presented on the crt screen. Fine adjustment of the

used.

control until a stable display of the wave-

at

a more positive point. Normally these controls

VERNIER

FIRST-

in

operation

is

illustrated.

cable

in

the lndicatqr Unit, set front-panel controls to the

DISPLAY

switch determines whether the trig-

or

de-coupled

COUPliNG

is

be

used

if

triggering

and

VERNIER

control, which

sweep, center the

be

control

TIME

to

and

connect the Power Supply Unit to the

Upper

Centered Counterclockwise TIME

to

the Trigger circuit. The

switch

is

then not affected

if

triggering

is

done on very low frequency

controls

be

operates

VERNIER

made

with the

and

turning clockwise causes

is

or

display the input signals. Dual-

convenient for adjusting

high-frequency triggering sig-

OPERA

is

and

liON

suggested for setting the

vertical plug-in units in-

Beam

BASE A Xl

used for most appli-

by

the vertical

DC

position

is

desired

at

a par-

set

the level on

control.

is

properly

-+-

Fig.

1

and

in-

set when triggering

over a

VERNIER

control

VERNIER at

a more nega -

0-

Fig.

LEVEL

!(5\

Waveforms with set

2-6

. Effects

LEVEL

in

the

Sweep

on

of

or

VERNIER

obtained

+ region

triggers

- slope

the

control

trigger

SLOPE,

LEVEL

!(5\

Waveforms

with

LEVEL

set in

the

LEVEL

and

VERNIER

or

VERNIER

obtained

- region

control

controls.

FOCUS INTENSITY HORIZ. DISPLAY

Time

TIME/CM

VARIABLE SWEEP

FUNCTION LEVEL SLOPE

COUPLING

Lower Beam

Centered Counterclockwise

TIME

BASE B Xl

Base A and

Set

input waveform;

with .5

CALIBRATED AUTO

Clockwise Set to

negative slope, AC

frequency triggering.

Time

to

display 2 or 3 cycles of the

mSEC.

BASELINE

+ for positive slope; - for

for most signals;

Base

B

if

unknown, start

as

desired.

DC

for low-

2-7

Operating

Time SOURCE

Time Base B SOURCE

lnstrudions-

Base A

Type

UPPER

LOWER

555/21A/22A

BEAM

Vertical Plug-In Units

Deflection Factor

Input Coupling

Connect input signals

both beams as described previously. If ing signal connector

Turn panel of the Power Supply Unit the units to warm up. A time-delay relay Unit delays the operation

45 seconds after the

allows the tubes sufficient time ating voltages

for

the de power

Using the beam-position neons free-running traces on the crt screen, then adjust the SITY

Rotate the the triggering signal · NIER Position the traces with the they start FOCUS controls for the sharpest possible focus.

Use

The HORIZ.

selection of five times magnification on that sweep. switch from the 2

em then (see

expanded,

appropriate

The sweep indicated by the TIME/CM switch. The true centimeter

the reading of the TIME/CM switch by 0.2, by five.

If sweep magnification the this section.

Use

The two beams The Upper Beam

Upper Beam display; the Lower Beam HORIZ. POSITION

is

desired, connect

and

set the

on the instrument with the POWER switch on the front

are

an

instant, the normal 45-second

is

restored.

control for a trace

LEVEL

control may

at

the left

of

SX

Magnification

beam,

using either time-base

To

magnify the display, move the HORIZ.

of the display with the switch

expanded

Fig.

delayed

of

to cover the entire 1 0

2-7). Any 2-cm portion of the original display, now

can

HORIZ

rate

of

the magnified

sweep magnification

Horiz. Position Controls

Set to produce 2 tion on crt screen.

AC

for most signals;

mining de levels.

to

the vertical input connectors

it

appropriate

power

applied.

controls to trigger

is

be

adjusted for the most stable triggering.

edge

DISPLAY

X1

position to the

be

positioned on the crt screen with the

. POSITION control.

of the magnified display

have HORIZ.

to the external trigger

and

of

the instrument for approximately

switch

to

If the

of

adequate

small or of high frequency, the

HORIZ.

of the graticule,

switch

of

sweep

greater

independent horizontal positioning.

POSITION control positions

or 3 em

an

SOURCE switch to

allow a few minutes for

in

is

turned on.

heat

before the

ac

power

delay

as

a guide, position the

intensity.

the

POSITION controls

either

of

the signal displayed

generator

X.2

position. The center

on

the

em

is

found by multiplying

than

5X

mode

described later

of

deflec-

DC

for deter-

external trigger-

INPUT

EXT

the Power Supply

This

delay

de

is

will occur before

two displays.

and

beam

X1

of

the crt screen

is

five times

sweep

or

is

oper-

interrupted

INTEN

adjust

provides

to

drive the

DISPLAY

position

time

by dividing

required, use

of

VER-

so

the

that

per

the

control positions the Lower Beam display. Clockwise rota-

tion

of

either control causes the to move rotation moves the PLAY POSITION control portion

coarse

backlash coupling position the control slightly to the desired final position. The fine adjustment control only

operates

For

.

POSITION control clockwise for the the then turn the control slightly counterclockwise for fine

justment

to

the right

switch

of

the

Each HORIZ. POSITION front-panel knob

and

fine adjustment

trace

in

example, to move the

trace

HORIZ.

the backlash

position

of

the

DISPLAY

on

the crt screen,

trace

is

set for

expanded

past

trace

5X

provides sufficient

display.

between horizontally, turn the HORIZ. POSITION

where

is

about 2 mm

position.

X.2

•

xo

-

If

HORIZ.

X.

2

Xo M •

Fig.

2-7. Operation

is

DISPLAY

Unmagnified

.,

......

of

the

SX

OPERATING

The Type 555 Oscilloscope provides many modes

operation,

applications. The normal triggered mode, is

started

input signal,

of

both time-base units

Sweep modes.

in

Triggered

Set

AUTO

display with the

previously. (AUTO is a sweep low-frequency automatic triggering

Tektronix oscilloscopes.) For triggering rates

making the instrument

by a signal

is

that

the most common

Sweep

the

SWEEP

BASELINE

FUNCTION switch

for normal triggered

LEVEL

and

BASELINE

mode with automatic baseline, rather

trace

of

the particular

to

the left. magnification

of

the positioning by means

the controls inside the unit. To

you

of

the

trace

-

1-

and

When

(X.2),

range

want

it,

then move

coarse

to

adjustment control.

the

right, turn the HORIZ.

coarse

past

the desired location,

- -

-

,

I--

swHp

magnification.

MODES

adaptable

in

is

time-related to the

sweep

is

the same

VERNIER

in

the Type

mode.

except

to

either NORMAL

operation

controls

21 A and

mode

counterclockwise

the HORIZ.

to view

operates

adjustment until

1-

-

1-1-1-

beam

the HORIZ.

DIS-

any

both

of

it

back

-

~:..

-

of

to

which the

for the

found

above

sweep

a variety

sweep

displayed

Operation

Delayed

. Trigger the

as

described Type 22A

than

in

many

20

cps,

a

ad-

of

or

the

2-8

Operating

Instructions-

Type

555/21A/22A

triggering LINE.. baselme rates

~UNCTION

mterm1ttent free-running

With

swe:p

rece1ved. After the

is

the

same

in

either

In

addition,

trace

below

AUTO

when

BASELINE

no triggers

20 cps, use NORMAL position

switch, since AUTO

baseline

the

SWEEP FUNCTION switch

is

held off until a

beam

trigger

has

are

swept for the next triggering pulse, then pulse

reaches

With

~ontrol

I~

the T1me-Base trigger pulse triggered to

be

triggered). However,

1

/20th

the Time-Base

pulse

is

Free

Run

To

free run the on the time-base plug-in unit the

LEVEL

wise.

In

the

sweep control, signals causing intermittent free run mended range. This will the

trigger free run the set the SOURCE switch triggers (e.g.

A free-running tioning the crt can

be

the

swit~h

set

for tngge_red

absence

of

Generator

is

received within 1

sweep

of

of a second,

Generator

received.

control

AUTO

BASELINE,

will free run

however

when

that

random

the control

the

also

amplitude

sweep

EXT.).

beam

used

to

establish a reference

selected

set

triggering level.

to

AUTO

BASELINE

operation,

tnggers.

When a trigger

stops free running. Then,

/20th

the

trace

will occur (if the

if

the

sweep,

no trigger pulse arrives within

auto

baseline circuit will

to

free run until

set

the SWEEP FUNCTION switch

to

either

fully clockwise

with no triggering signal

in

nearly

triggering will

is

set

at

operation

LEVEL

control

allow

is

less than 10 volts. If you desire

in

the

to

sweep

is

be

a signal

presence of a

some position receiving no input

convenient for locating

while no input signal

de measurements.

With a free-running tors

can

Sawtooth

initiate the input signal by using the

output test. The response the

sweep

repetition present a switch tion

stable

and

VARIABLE

rate. (This

waveform with the

To

display

beam

crt put +Gate mode To

display more than form, set base

unit for driving the crt

one

with the time-base unit

or

of

operation

the

HORIZ.

second time-base unit for

To

display both the from the external device, vertical INPUT

sweep,

one

waveform

may

rate

of

control

be

observed

other

time-base unit.)

to

trigger

will then

the

on

to

time-base

the

produce

cycle of the response

Sawtooth waveform.

with Time Base B

one

cycle

DISPLAY

switch

beam

triggered

output

waveform

apply

and

the response signal

NORMAL

or

AUTO provides a free-running applied.

BASELINE

in

this frequency

of

the

and

begins

the

sweep

For triggering

of

will

at

NORMAL the

proper

amplitu,de

retraced,

when the

and

the triggering

is

free running

is

received, the

the SWEEP

produce

if

of a second

a normal

swe:p

again

another

AUTO

BASELINE

or

fully counterclock-

any

position of the

occur

the

. Therefore

set

display

on stray noise

zero

triggering level,

at

either

to

free run

large

it

is

end

input signal,

and

is

voltage

of

applied. It

level for making

the

time-base

+Gate

or

drive a device

be

synchronized with

generator

crt. Set the TIME/CM

the desired repeti-

by monitoring the

waveform

that

is

generating

Fig

. 2-8 illustrates this

and

or

a portion of the

to

, drive the

the Lower Beam.

the

second

. Set the controls

operation.

and

to

the

the response

signal

other

the

output

BASE-

range

it

waits

trigger

another

is

ready

cause

trigger

and

turn

applied,

LEVEL

recom-

of when

posi-

also

genera-

under

and

will

output

the out-

wave-

time-

of

the

to

one

INPUT.

an

.

its

to

or

is

Fig.

2-8.

Using

th"

+GATE

or

drive

The

external

two

equipm

beams

ously. Similarly,

under

vice

two

the

Delayed

section of

test

beams

sweep

the

manual.

..

nt.

will then display

two

may

and

multi-trace plug-in units.

pulse

SAWTOOTH

sw

..

ep

is

usually

or more response signals from the de-

be

displayed

generation

Single Sweep

Single

sweep

mode

is graphing tive

To

tion, first

a portion

or

that

varies

display a triggered

set

up

FUNCTION switch

then move the switch to SINGLE SWEEP. Press

TO

RESET

button immediately, the button will light, indicating the time-base circuit be

triggered sweep be

held off until the and

Single

ex

cept

. Then, when o trigger arrives, the crt

once, the

released

READY

.

sweep

s wili not occur without a triggering signal

by turning the triggering level. signal, the SOURCE switch

the

LEVEL

sweep

pressed released

In

PUSH

when

control

circuit

and a sweep

.

addition

TO

RESET

the

instrument

is

to

its usual function

button may also

used primarily for viewing

of

an

input

waveform

in

amplitude

the

triggering controls with the

set

to

and

release it.

READY

or

single

sweep

NORMAL

lamp inside the

lamp will turn off,

PUSH

TO

RESET

LEVEL

To

produce

adjusted armed

of the

contrd through the normal

single

may

be set to

for line triggering. Then the single

as

the

PUSH

trace

be

is

operating

waveform

free

the

waveforms simultane-

together

is

discussed

to

running

.

through use of

later

that

is

not repeti -

shape.

of the crt presenta-

or

AUTO

BASELINE,

the

If

no trigger

PUSH

is

TO

is

beam

and

the

is

again

without

LINE

RESET

as

the button

sweep

position

button

sweeps

TO

occurs

in

single-sweep mode, the

used to cut off the

normally

in

one

of the trig-

trigger

in

or

photo

SWEEP

PUSH

received

RESET

ready

pressed

an

input

button

sweep

or

this

-

to will will

and

is

®

2-9

Operating

gered held in, the sweep cannot Normal operation

Instructions-

or

free-run modes. Whenever the button

is

Type

555/21A/22A

be

triggered

restored when the button

and

is

pressed

will

not free run.

is

released.

and

Delayed Sweep

The Delayed Trigger pulse which occurs during

of 'A' Time-Base

Generator This

Delayed Trigger from Time Base A can be used to hold

as

Generator

well

as

to

is

applied to the 'B' Time-Base

the

DELA

YEO

TRIG.

off the triggering or sweep of Time Base B for a certain selected period after the

The delay time

is

continuously variable from .05 p.sec to 50

seconds. When the Time Base B

is

in

the

SWEEPS

ONCE

Time

FOR

Base A sweep has started.

SWEEP

EACH

'A'

DLY'D the Time Base B sweep occurs immediately the delay period.

MODE

When

1:

SWEEPS

~~.·

----------------~~--------------------~~~~

~

I

'A' Trigger

pulse

the

ONCE

SWEEP

FOR

FUNCTION switch

EACH

each

sweep

OUT connector.

FUNCTION switch

TRIG

position,

at

the

end

is

'A'

DLY'D

TRIG

'A'

starts

of

in

Sweep

Dly'd

the

TRIGGERABLE tion, the Time Base B sweep delay

period,

and

ONCE

FOR

will sweep

EACH

is

triggerable

as

soon

'A'

as

DLY'D

at

the

a pulse

from the Time Base B Trigger circuit. These two modes

illustrated

Operation

magnification

Use of the is

a.

To nal device connect a connector to the device under test signal to the

runs

trigger

'B'

sweep

in

Fig

. 2-9.

given

in

Delayed

of the

delayed

the Applications section

Trigger

are

delayed

described

trigger

in

and

the following paragraphs.

sweep for making time measurements

of

this manual.

use the Delayed Trigger pulses for triggering

cable

from the

INPUT

of either vertical plug-in unit. Set the

DELA

and

connect the response

v-'1

delayed

YEO

TRIG

end

is

received

an

TRIG

posi-

of

the

are

sweep

exter-

. OUT

MODE 2:

'A' Trigger

Delay time

(Variable from

0.1 t<sec

f\.-JLJL.J\.:-_fL~~-

A

Sweep

presentahon

,,----------------------------------

:

'

B'

TRIGGERABLE

l

Kl

I

p~lse

t

:

lr<

I 0 1 t

1 • t<sec o sec

I

I I

I

: I

I I

1\

Sweep

presentation

ONCE

-------------~~------------------~

. Delay time

----------~~--------~~~:

.t\-JLJL.~L

A

Sweep

presentatoon

to

SO

secl

FOR

EACH

'A'

DLY'D

'A'

Dly'd

arms

'

B'

(Variable. from 1

so

1

'READY'

goes

J

LJLJL--~LL'L

-------------

-----------

I

'READY'

_______

light

may

go

on

i

I

I I

I

.J

Brightened portion l

of

waveform

__

1\. 1\.

TRIG

'A'

Sweep

runs

'

B'

trigger

L/'1

light

on

Sweep

is

triggered

I

Brightened portion

of

waveform

J

LILJL.JLJL.l

------------------------,

r

~::

v"'"l

.

'----

------,

.'U

'

/-------------------- -------------

1\.

'B'

Sweep

presentation

1\

~----------1\.

1\.

....

~

I

Fig.

2-9.

tensified portion

Comparison

2-10

of

tho

of

the

'A'

two

delayed-sweep

presentation

shows

modes.

the

part

of

In

each

case

the

'A'

the

Input

waveform

presentation

that

is

displayed

represents

in tho 'II'

tho

Input

to

presentation.

both

vertical systems Tho

in-

•

®I

H.

ORIZ. DISPlAY ?•splay one cycle JOg

source

switch for that

of

and

the

sweep mode will

The Delayed Trigger pulse

TRIG.

OU~

generator

sweep,

TRIGG~R

CM

IS

runnmg.

at

a time determined by the setting of the

1-10

swrtch

MULTIPLIER

and equals the desired (see

Fig.

2-1

0).

TIME

lASE A

TIME/CM

conn:ctor

the

at

One

1-10

delay

beam

to Time Bose A

waveform. Selection

depend

is

available

any

time the Time Bose A

output pulse

on the application.

at

will

of

the

occur for each

X1

the trigger-

DELAYED

sweep

DElAYED

dial. Set the Time Bose A TIME/

MULTIPLIER

time, from

DELAYED

1-1 0

dial so their product

0.1

p.5ec

to

135

TRIGGER

MULTIPliER

seconds

to

Operating

tion

of

the signal that follows the triggering point. There-

fore

~ith

normal !riggering

exomme any section

immediotelr

after

mode prov1des a means

by a

sel~cted

a~y

porhon

usmg the

trigg~r

by

T1me

Both

the magnified

amount following the triggering point, so that

~f

vanoble

Time Bose

Bose A can

lnstrudions-

it

is

of

the waveform that does not occur

a triggering point. The

of

delaying the start of

the waveform

Type

555/21A/22A

not possible to expand

delayed

each

can

be

expanded. Thus

Delayed Trigger from Time Bose A to

B,

any

portion

be examined

and

the unmagnified waveforms con then

of

a waveform displayed

in

detail with Time

and

sweep sweep

by

Bose

be displayed together on the crt screen. The maximum sweep

speed

of the beam driven by Time

creased,

o!

VIdes

and

the

apparent

delaying the Time Base B

up to 1

O,OOOX

Time Bose A display

magnification

apparent in

this manner.

Bose B is

sweep

. Delayed triggering pro-

not actually

is

merely the result

sweep magnification of the

in-

B.

the

Time

em

of displace-

delay

time

lase

wave

If

of

about

A

A.

it

the

(Ill

by

muhiplying

reading.

control determines the time of

Fig.

2-1

0.

sweep

rate

Since the

occurrence

X

Delay

time

is

by

the

1-10

of

the Delayed Pulse, it also positions the

calculated

1-10

MULTIPLIER

form on the crt screen when sweeping with Time Bose

Each whole number ment from the left

Time Bose A con

operated

in

free run mode, the repetition rote of the Delayed Trigger pulses will 'A' Time-Bose the TIME/CM switch.

8

p.5ec

to

50 seconds with the TIME/CM switch.)

If

Time Bose A

on

edge

be

the some

Generator

(This

is

operated

the dial represents 1

of

the screen.

either triggered

as

circuit

at

rote con

in

a triggered mode, on output

or

the repetition rote

that particular setting of

be

varied from

free run.

Delayed Trigger pulse will only occur after Time Bose A has been triggered time period. Time Bose A must complete trace before of the Delayed Pulse output when Time Bose A will

depend

and

the repetition rote

Time Base B con

cycle

of the waveform when Time Base A rote. However, the display produced by Time Bose B hove to DElAYED source

is

externally from Time Bose A

and

it

is

on both

the signal

has swept for the duration of the

its

sweep

again

triggeroble. Thus the repetition rote

the

frequency of the triggering signal

of

the Time-Bose Generator circuit.

be

used for displaying more than one

or

for viewing

an

expanded

is

set for a low repetition

delay

and

is

triggered

portion of

will

be

triggered

TRIGGER

and

1-10

will not

be

MUlTIPLIER

positionoble with the unless the triggering

derived from Time Bose A. (Trigger Time Base B

+GATE

if this positioning

re-

desired.)

b.

Delayed

Because triggering circuits

Iorge changes

gered directly from the input signal

Sweep

Magnification

are

in

the input signal, any crt display that

designed to

can

only display the

operate

is

on trigpor

Either crt beam

sweeping

it

can

be

with Time Bose

operated

B,

in

the

delayed

but usually the Upper Beam

used to display the unmagnified waveform

and

the

lower

Beam

is Bose B). beams

In

the following discussion

ore

operated

To magnify a portion

used for the magnified sweep

it

is

in

this manner.

of

the Upper Beam display:

assumed

1. Connect the some signal to both vertical nectors.

2.

Set the Time Bose B TIME/CM switch for a sweep rote

-

is

somewhat foster than that of Time Bose

3. Set the

0.50

DElAYED

and

9.50.

TRIGGER

1-10

4. Trigger the Upper Beam display with the usual manner.

5. Set the Ti SWEEPS

Position the INTENSITY displays of

me

Bose B

ONCE

lower

and

FOCUS controls

adequate

SWEEP

FOR

EACH

'A'

Beam display on the crt

of

intensity.

both beams for sharp

(Time

MUlTIPLIER

FUNCTION switch to DlY'D

Bose B triggering con-

trols hove no effect on the display.) The Upper Beam trace

should hove a brightened portion indicating the section

that

is

the 1-

magnified by the

10

MUlTIPLIER

dial

lower

Beam (see

and

note that the brightened por-

tion moves smoothly along the Upper Beam display.

any portion of the Upper Beam display (except the extreme ends) con be magnified on the

triggering

of

Time Bose B with the 1-10

dial readings indicate the number

lower

Beam by adjusting the

MULTIPLIER.

of

major groticule divisions

between the beginning of the Upper Beam display

intensified portion of the trace.

The

the set for 1 mSEC/

is

the magnification

degree

ner

is

equal to the ratio of the Upper Beam sweep rote to

lower

of

sweep

magnification presented

Beam sweep rote. For example,

em

and

is

1 00 times.

Time Bose B

is

set for

if

If some input other than the Upper Beam signal

played

by the

lower

Beam, the intensified portion indicate the time-relationship between the two sweeps, but the

lower

Beam presentation

of the Upper Beam display.

-

will

not

be

a magnified view

mode by

(Time

Base

that

the crt

INPUT

A.

between

Time

Bose A

TRIG

.

and

adjust the

Fig.

2-11

).

and

in

this man-

Time Bose A

10

fLSEC/

is

will

is

A)

(Time

con-

in

Turn

Thus

The

the

is

em,

dis-

still

®

2-11

Operating

Instructions-

Type

555/21

A/22A

/

Intensified

portion

'

fig

. 2-11. Thr.

ponded anc!

c. T

riggerable

W hen using a high

mod

e, time-jitter con sometimes be a

jitter

is

delay system. The TRIGGERABLE

DLY'D TRIG

gered

time, to eliminate time-jitter.

Set up the viously described, then set the Time Bose B T

ION TRIG. Set the Time Bose B the

input MULTIPLIER be

triggered

the

delay display the 1-10 MULTIPLIER

If

no completion be

held Bose B READY ready

to

the Time-Base

will

turn

Base

A sweep

depend

nal

as

If

separate sweep period

. Therefore the brightened display or

might

d.

Delayed +Gate

To

use a delayed

for

pulsing

for

ment Bos

e B +

for

free-run

FUNCTION

TRIG. This

form

for

row

nar

intensified

dis

played

by

portion the

lower

of

the

beam

upper

.

Magnification

magnification

due

to

jitt

er

in the signal,

mode

allows

by

any

small

delayed

switch

to

TRIGGERABLE

signal. Then turn the DELAYED TRIGGER 1-10

dial

and

at

any

interval. The

will

jump from one

triggering

of

the

off

be triggered. Then, when the

off

on the occurrence

well

might

may

not

delayed Gate

each sweep

puise car.

delay

untii a

lamp

Generator

. Thus the time between the start

and

as

on the settings

triggering

occur

appear

or

driving

or

operation

switch to

will

produce a single Time

the Time Bose B sweep to be

triggering

sweep presentation in the manner

triggering

notice

that

small

triggering

brightened

triggering

dial

is

turned.

signal

is

applied

period,

triggering

will

light

will

sweep

the start

at

any

at

+Gate

sweep

Sawtooth to the device.

of

be

of

the Time

of

signals any

time

place post the

all

.

and

Sawtooth

or

on external device, set up the instru -

operation,

and

set

SWEEPS

obta

ONCE

the

'A'

Time-

ined with Time

ratio

problem

and

port

ONCE

event

following

ONCE

FOR controls

the

magnif

point

portion

of

point

to

Time

the Lower Beam sweep

pulse

is

received. The Time

to

indicate

trigger and

the Time

the

ore

following

portion

delayed

the Time

Bose

Bose B triggering

delay

applie

d, the Time

of

delay

Sawtooth

then a

FOR

Bose B output

Bas

e Gene

~

1\'

beam

display

is

in the

delayed

. Port

of

is

due

FOR

SWEEP

EACH

ied sweep con occurring

the

to the next

Bose B at

that the sweep

signal appears,

the READY

-time controls .

the

pply

Set

Bose B SWEEP

EACH

Base

to

EACH 'A'

the

delay

FUNC-

'A'

DLY'D

to

trigger

after

Upper

Beam

lamp

of

the Time

B sweep

Base

delay

Upp

time position ,

Time

rator

time

er Beam

waveform

the Time

Bose

'A'

DLY'D

wov

. A very

B set for a

ex-

the the

trig

pre

on

the

will

will sig-

as

A

e-

sweep rote much foster than

amplitude

Monitor oscilloscope The repetition rote setting control; Time

e.

Uses

urements

from

of

the Time

the

Bose

Time

Measurements

of

the

ore

+Gate;

the Time Bose B

to

set

up

of

Bose

duty

factor

B TIME/

CM

delayed

given in the

that

of

Time

150 volts from Sawtooth).

output

waveform

the

repetition

the

output

A TIME/

is

determined

switch

mode

for

Applications

pulse

CM

and

making

rote

and

is

determined

switch

by

the setting

VARIABLE

accurate time meas-

section

External Horizontal Deflection

To deflect one ternally-derived through set the corresponding front-panel HORIZ. DISPLAY switch to one

control varies the deflection volts/em TEN

-

the switch

vides

-

comparing comparisons. The

about

signals

through intensity

the rear-panel

of

the

with

Xl

position,

Horizontal

low-frequency X-Y

350 kc, therefore

below

Time relationship

Intensity

The

two nectors on the lation

signals.

is

B

To

modulate CATHODE CRT

CATHODE switch

apply

a 10- to 50voltage going the front-panel INTENSITY control.

information shape to able the beams on the crt screen

is

signals decrease the beam intensity

voltages increase the intensity from the level set

Intensity

of

the

make time measuremen

from the

two

beams can be used to

Be

sure to

not in use.

Multi-Trace

Th

e Type 555 provides a multi-trace sync pulse from each

of

il s time-base units

verti cal

plug

of

the crt beams

voltage

EXT

. A TTEN positions. The

the HORIZ. DISPLAY switch

at

EXT

deflection

one function to another,

this frequency.

modulation

signal,

EXT

and

from

. A TTEN

with

operation

upper-limit

X-Y

of

the

horizontally

apply

HORIZ. INPUT connector

factor

about

Xl

0.

an external

of operation

X-Y

with

the external signal

EXT. HO.

from

2 to 20

voltage

of

the oscilloscope

or

the

display 10-

for

horizontal

must be

may

or

20-volt

Modulation

beams have separate

rear

panel

one

of

connector, check that the CHOPPED

modulation

to the displayed signal

waveform.

graticul

ground

the crt beams, unground the

is

in the

volt

signal to the connector. Positive-going

can be used to relate

Intensity time markers can be

ts

e marks . Identical signals

or

the

CRT

CATHODE

for

application

CRT

more precise than those

horizontally

to

correlate

CATHODE

of

CATHODE position

without

reference the

them in time.

connector when it

Operation

for

channel switching in multi -tra

-in units. The

use

of

multi-trace units

Bose A (25

with

another

duty

factor

and

of

about at

making phase

intensity modu -

and

by

VARIABLE

of

control.

this manual.

with

on ex-

RIZ.

GAIN

0.2 to 2

the

EXT.

volts/em

signal

passband

limited

be

provided

timing

pulses.

input

BLANKING

negative-

other

voltag

changing

added

obtain

applied

provid

volts

the

and

AT-

with

pro

for

to

con-

CRT

-

and

by

the

to

two

ce

es

.

-

is

e

-

2-12

®

simultaneous viewing traces resulting from played

trigger signal the or that

input signal, thus showing the time-relationships of played in

put, channel. If the time-relationships est,

on

one

multi-

waveforms.

each

trace

an

external

trace uni

in uni

is

SOURCE switch

BEAM

trace

For plug -

trigger

LOWER

the Triggering section for use of

For multi-

of

several input signals .

one

vertical input unit will

beam

and

at

the

same

sweep

rate

ts

with single-channel trigger pickoff, the

applied

will

internally

PLUG-IN,

t.

This permits triggering on only

(Be

sure

units without a single-channel tri

be

triggered

trigger

signal can

to

is

set

to

depending

to

read

on

of

the time-

UPPER

the

older

the the

be

base

BEAM

on the position of

compatibility NOTE

instruments.)

waveform from signals

used,

or

are

the triggers

All

of

be

.

unit when

PLUG-IN

one

the

gger

out that

of

inter-

the

dis-

Operating

can

be

derived

the

other

beam.

Provision switching transients Chopped a

sequence

the next, an

instant, then

CHOPPED

panel blank the crt

-

one

channel

desirable

the CHOPPED BLANKING-CRT CATHODE switch

CATHODE for normal

is

mode

of

so

that

BlANKING-CRT

of the Type 555

beam to

for

Chopped

Instructions-

from a time-

included

. During

rapid

another.

in

when

the signal the

while the multi-

the Type 555 for blanking the

operating

each

switching occurs from

signal

to

CHOPPED BLANKING. This will

Single-

mode

operation

in

one

in

the next channel. Set the

CATHODE switch on the

trace

channel

operation. Be

.

Type

555/21A/22A

single input

a multi-

channel

in

the

unit

triggering

trace

Chopped

one

is

applied

unit

in

the

mode,

channel

displayed

switching from

sure to return

is

usually

to

for

rear

CRT

to

2-13

NOTES

SECTION 3

APPLICATIONS

GENERAL

The displayed waveform on the oscilloscope crt screen normally a plot played horizontal deflection. The Type 555 Oscilloscope con for making accurate measurements for flection factors measurements

ships between input signals.

one

in

or

of

the vertical direction

more input signals by means

of

the two deflection systems. Comparison

can

also

VOLTAGE

Vertical deflection

to the

voltage

unit

at

the time of measurement. The amount of displacement

for

any

uotor (Volts/Cm) switch

ficient deflection for best resolution, set the vertical deflec-

tion factor so the display spans a

cule. Keep the

In

general, all voltage measurements way, though the techniques may vary for different types input signals. Voltage-difference measurements (including peak-to-peak) displayed waveform, be made from reference level. The instruction manuals accompanying most

vertical plugsible with the particular units. The basic methods of measure-

ment will

When measuring between points on

sure to measure consistently from either the

tom of the trace. This will avoid including the width

in

trace

at

the

given voltage

VARIABLE

can

be

any

point

in

units describe the voltage measurements pos-

also

be given briefly here.

the measurements.

INFORMATION

voltage

per unit time. Voltage

and

time

of

both voltage

be

made

of

phase

is

of

the calibrated de-

and

MEASUREMENTS

of

the

crt trace

INPUT

connector

can

be

on

the plug-in unit.

control

made

of

and

instantaneous measurements can

on

the display

is

directly proportional

of

the vertical plug-in

selected with the input aHen-

To

large

portion

in

the

CALl

BRA

are

made

the

ac

components

to

some established

any

crt display, be

top

represented

is

be

and

time-relation-

provide suf-

of

the grati-

TED

position.

in

the

same

of

or

the

of

dis-

used

time

any

bot

the

Voltage-DiHerence Measurements

The

ac terms of the peak-to-peak value difference between cases either input. to use oc-coupling to prevent the de component of the signal from deflecting the trace off the screen. quency input signals, de-coupling must measurements.

Always check the gain making voltage measurements. Set the input attenuotor to .05 calibrator signal.

To peak or between two points on the display, use the following procedure:

component

ac-or

In

certain applications, however,

volts/

em

and

make a voltage-difference measurement from peak-to-

of

any

two

de-coupling

of

check for 2

waveform may

or

points on the display.

can

be

the vertical plug-

em

of deflection with a

be

in

terms

of

used

at

it

may

be

For

be

very low fre-

used for accurate

in

measured

the vertical

a voltage-

In

many

necessary

unit before

.1

volt

as

of

in

1. With the deflection ploy.

is

Be

position.

2.

Multiply the divisions ical setting of the input ottenuat factor of any external ottenuators or attenuator probe. product a

peak

-to-peak measurement, this

J \ I

aid

of

in

centimeters between the two points on the dis-

sure the

is

the voltage difference between the two points. For

the groticule scale, measure the vertical

VARIABLE

control

of

vertica l deflection by the numer-

or

is

in

the

and

by the attenuation

the

ac

signal amplitude.

\

fJ

r\

v

1

2.1

an

deflection

of

J

'

Fig.

3-1. Voltage-difference

display.

Vertical

=

Voltage

Example: 2.1an

As

an tween two points on the display. at 1 volt/em, product of 2.1 volts, the voltage Assuming the signal

other external attenuator, multiply the 2.1 volts by 10 to

obtain

For sinusoidal waveforms, the

can

be

the use

deflection

.

X 1

example, Fig.

multiply

21

volts

as

converted to peak, rms,

of

standard conversion factors.

Instantaneous

To

measure the instantaneous

level

of chassis ground, use the for voltage-difference measurements. Before connecting the input signal, establi this, first set the timeset the vertical input coupling to reference voltage to the vertical input at should be selected on the basis of polarity the signal to be duce the signal, level. From this time Vertical Position control . Disconnect the reference voltage.

the input signal

one of the horizontal graticule lines. The graticule line

applied

it

measu,.....ent

X Deflection

volt/em X 10 = 21

3-1

shows

2.1

em

is

applied

the voltage

Voltage

and

some reference voltage such

same

general procedure

sh

a de reference level on the crt.

base

unit for a free-running trace,

. If a probe

should also be used to set up the reference

on

, make no further adjustmen

between

factor X Attenuation

volts.

2.1

em

If the input attenuator

by 1 volt/em to

at

through a

at

the source.

peak

or

of

the

INPUT

lOX

-to-peak measurement

overage

Measurements

(de)

voltage between the

DC.

Connect the desired de

and

position the trace

and

is

to

be

CALIBRATED

This

~

two

I

v

\

points

on

the

factor

deflection be-

probe, with no

values through

used to intro-

is

set

obtai

n a

connector.

as

described

To

do

and

amplitude of

ts

with the

as

3-1

Applications-

Type

555/21A/22A

I

renee

Refe

level

/

'

"

Fig.

3-2.

nal

Example: -1.7

established reference level trace. Fig measurement.

-34

reference level

ponent level

taneous

estimated by drawing on imaginary line through the ponent

the waveform

line (see Fig. 3-

Instantaneous

and

reference

Apply the signal

volts, being measured

This method may

of

the

of

level.

em X 2

. 3-2 shows.on

In

of

any

waveform

oc

component

voltage. In

the signal

and

3)

.

~

v

L

voltage

volts/em X 10

and

measure

example

the

example,

zero

volts (chassis ground) .

also

by

general,

so

that

the

line,

I I

-1.7

em

deflection

of

I-"'

~

measurement

and

the instantaneous

in a negative

be

used

estimating the

and

treating this level the

the

area

is

equal

/

....

between

= -

34

the

voltage

the selected point of the

of

on

instantaneous

to

measure the

overage

on the screen,

above

A

~

displayed

volts.

between

direction from a

overage

as

de

level con

and

1

olh

o

v

voltage

de

com-

voltage

an

instan-

oc

com-

between

below

sig-

the

be

the

calibrated VARIABLE

Either of the sweeps may

of

the HORIZ. The CM

In

1

to Time measurements with the later

To make a time measurement between two points on a waveform displayed by a single procedure

1. Using the groticule scale, measure the horizontal deflec-

tion

Be

sure the

position.

2. Multiply the divisions of horizontal deflection

numerical sett ing

is

unit time

3.

apparent time interval. If the HORIZ. actual

and

all measurements must

Time/Cm control

sweep

setting by 0.2.

addition, the Time Bose A 10,000 times

in

this section.

in

centimeters between the two points on the display.

that

between

If

the HORIZ.

time interval

DISPLAY

rote

is

.

VARIABLE

is

sweeping the beam. This product i.s

the points.

time

by

be

mode

with the

in

the CAliBRATED position.

be

magnified 5 times through use

switches for increased resolution.

then determined by multiplying the TIME/

sweep

may

be

and

measured

Time/

of

the TIME/CM switch

DISPLAY

0.2 (or divide by

is

equal

in

delayed

Cm

control

switch

DISPLAY

to

the

sweep

beam,

is

5)

apparent

magnified from

delayed

will

use

is

in

the CAliBRATED

of

set

at

X.2, multiply the

to

obtain

switch

time.

sweep

be

described

the

is

at

mode.

following

by

time-

bose

apparent

actual

X1,

the

Fig.

3-3. De-component

de

level

separates

The

calibrated

any

horizontal distance on the screen to represent a specific

of

interval displayed measured directly from convenient for measuring the input signal con with the TIME/CM switch on the time-bose unit.

Set the taining the two points tion

time. Thus the time

by

either

sweep

of

the groticule. The

measurement

waveform

TIME

sweep

rate

into

MEASUREMENTS

rates

beam

on

the

crt screen. The

so

that

of

interest

sweep

of

displayed

regions

of

the horizontal systems

lapse

between

the

oscilloscope screen con

the

part

is

spread

rates

signal.

equal

area.

any

sweep

of

the

wav

over a Iorge por-

must

be

Average

cause

two

events

be

rote most

selected

eform con -

accurately

5.3

em

HORIZ

DISPLAY

:

X

.2

Fig.

3-4

. Time

measurement

Sweep

rate X magnification

Example:

ment from the display. Assuming the TIME/CM switch to at 1 mSEC

izontal deflection

obtain

then multiplied by 0.2 to give 1.06 msec

interval. Basic Accuracy of the time measurement con checking the

5.3

Fig

. 3-4 illustrates on

and

the

apparent

If the two events

gering point on the waveform, separate

If this

magnify the waveform

the points sufficiently for

is

the

1

em X 1msec/cm X 0.2

example

the HORIZ.

of

5.3

em

time

sweep

accuracy

case,

of

use

of

interest

one

and

Sweep

rate: 1 msec/cm

from

display. Horizontal

Time.

1.

06

msec.

of

time interval measure-

DISPLAY

is

of

5.3 msec. The

the particular

of the

measure the time interval

switch

multiplied by 1 msec/cm to

is

3"/o

do

not closely follow a trig-

it

may not

delayed

apparent

as

at

all

be

sweep

accurate

at

the

be

measurement.

sweep

deflection

X.2,

the hor-

time

actual

sweep

improved by

rates.

rote.

possible to

modes to

X

be

is

time

as

3-2

Applications-

Type

555/21A/22A

described

actual time interval will

urement multiplied by the Time Base B

above,

directly from the

be

the horizontal deflection meas-

Dual-Beam Time Measurements

Time-comparison measurements can time-related events beams

are

advisable

beams. This reduces rate

Since

necessary to register

fore brator

AMPLITUDE

TIME/CM .5

Input Attenuator

Trigger the display on the positive

. two waveforms to .superimpose them

center

controls on the vertical line change the

beams

Remove the nectors played.

tween points on the two single

Accuracy racy of the particular

driven

to use the

tolerances.

the

applying

signal to both inputs

of

the graticule. Adjust the two HORIZ. POSITION

so

the rising portion

the

position

are

and

connect the

Now

beam.

of

displayed

at

the

same

the

two

beams

the

the input signals.

CALIBRATOR

at

the

of

thus registered.

time-interval measurements

either HORIZ. POSITION control

calibrator

the time measurements

sweep

by

same

overall error resulting from

are

two

left

signal from the two INPUT con-

two

beams

the two beams,

sweep

time-base unit for driving both

positioned independently

beams

with respect to time be-

To

do

and

set

.1

.05

at

the start

edge

of

time-related signals to

as

rate

used.

the

slope

described

delayed

rate.

this, connect the cali-

VOLTS

mSEC

volts/em

on

of

the

depends

sweep.

sweep

rate.

be

made

between

if

It

following controls:

and

each

other

each

trace

graticule. Do not

can

be

above

on the

both

is

generally

sweep

it

position the

at

begins

after

be

made

for a

accu

The

the

dis-

be-

play

at

the vertical centerline. Record

MULTIPLIER

6. Turn the 1-10 the brightened portion then center the point on the cord

7. Subtract the first the

by

the time interval

A variation of this method applied on the

is

then positioned with the 1-10 two points above

Precision mode separated of

the MULTIPLIER sweep of

the

accuracy

all

%

1 ticular and

If a number

different rates the various fractional correction factors. This will permit tion

-

measurements

dial (e.g. 5.14).

MULTIPLIER

at

the

the setting

setting of

to only

lower

. .

can

measurements

rate

1-10

error

sweep

Delay Stop adjustments

and

of

accurate

of

the 1-10

reading

the

Time Base A TIME/CM switch to obtain

between

one

Beam. The

and

the

of

time measurements

be

as

great

by 9

em

dial,

as

used

and

MULTIPLIER

is

within

3%

of

measurements

by

checking

rate

of

sweep

accurate

rates, check the calibration

the

DELA

sweep

time-interval determinations from the time

made

the

INPUT

and

beg

time interval

as 1 part

on

the

crt screen. However, the accuracy

depends

well

as

on the

the

accuracy

dial

is

at

all

the

used,

rates,

sweep

and

measurements

YEO

TRIGGER 1-10

and

with

the

sweep

the

setting

of

the 1-10

dial to position the start of

second point on t

lower

Beam display. Again re-

MULTIPLIER

from the second and multiply

two points.

is

obtained

the

waveform not mon itored

inning

of

the intens ified portion

MULTIPLIER

calculated

made

in

900 if the two points

on

the

linearity

accuracy

of

observations. linearity

within

0.5%.

rates; however, the over-

can

be

increased

rote

that

accuracy

sweep

MUL

table

by calibrating the Delay Start

at

make a

delay-time controls.

he

control.

with the signal

at

each

as

described

the

delayed

of

Calibrated

rate

are

of

the 1-10

the particular

to

less than

on the par-

.

to

be

made

of

the

TIPUER

percentage

rapid

display,

of the

sweep

dial

calcula-

are

at

or

Increased Accuracy Time Measurements

The

delayed

time measurements on

intensified portion of the display method,

dial.

To

display, use the following procedure:

1. Connect the signal source to both of

connectors.

2. Set up the instrument for described previously, with the Time Base B TION switch TRIG

position.

3. Trigger controls.

4. Adjust the Upper Beam intensity so

of

the

tion CM

switch

form to a small

5.

With

position the start

on the

interval to and

position the corresponding point

sweep

mode

may

be

the

Time Base A display using the

the

time interval

measure

in

the

displays with the Time Base A triggering

trace

is

to

reduce the

spot

the

DELA

Upper

of

Beam display,

be

measured. Then observe the magnified display

is

between

SWEEPS

easily visible. Set the Time Base B TIME/

the

read

two points on the Upper Beam

brightened

or

a small portion

YEO

TRIGGER

brightened

used to make

as

a time marker.

from

the

1-10

the

vertical INPUT

delayed

ONCE

at

sweep

SWEEP

FOR

EACH

the

brightened por-

portion of

of

the display.

1-10

MULTIPLIER

portion to the first point

the beginning

in

the

lower

MULTIPLIER

operation

of

accurate

In

this

FUNC-

'A'

Dl

Y'D

the

wave

dial,

the

time

Beam dis-

as

Frequency Measurements

Since

the

frequency

of

its

reciprocal quency one previously (see Fig. 3-5). Frequency ample,

be

cycle

2.1

can

if

p.sec,

be

as

determined

the

period

the

period

calculated

of

frequency

J\

.l.

"\

-

3-5.

Fig.

Example

Sweep

: f = 2_1 f.1sec

.\

I

~2·:f

I

'~

Frequency

'fl

rote: 1 p.sec/

measurement

1

em

of

any

repetitive signal

(time required for

directly from the time interval of

by

one

of

the

= 1

a recurrent waveform

equals 1 /2.1

\

1

I

'\

.\

I

J\

\

;I

em

using

the

relation:

=4.76X10'

cps=476kc

is

equal

one

cycle), the fre-

methods described

/Period.

is

measured

p.sec,

or

f\

.\.

.1

\

I

v

' I

f = -

.

to the

For ex-

4.76 me.

,.

1

~

1

T-

to

3-3

Applications-

An

alternate method display that obtained by dividing the per centimeter of screen by the sweep rate of the display

Fig. 3-6)

(see

ft

v

Type

555/21A/22A

of

determining frequency from the

is

usually easier

. Determine the frequency

1\

"

average

1\

I

1\

and

"

I I

\

\j

\

9.5

cycles

faster to calculate

number

1\ 1\

II

~

of

cycles displayed

as

follows:

1\

I I I

v

J

1\

~

u

tot'

Sweep

rote

: 2

p.sec/

ern

Fig.

3-6

. Frequency cycles per rate

Example:

9.5

waveform on the crt screen. switch

em

age

TIME/CM switch. The result form.

fr

equency

actual frequency

sweep rate of 2 p.sec/cm the number of cycles displayed exactly 9.5 over the 10 divided by 10 gives 0.95 cycles/em.

0.95 cycles/em divided by 2 p.sec/cm, which converts to

centimet~r

= Frequency.

ISame

cydes/10

J.Lsec/cm

2

1.

Set the TIME/CM switch to display several cycles of the

is

in

2. Count the exact number of the graticule.

3. Divide the number

number of cycles per centimeter.

4. Divide the

(If

the

will

As

an

example, using the same signal

measurement

of

display.

signal

as

cm

the

CALIBRATED

HORIZ. DISPLAY

Fig. 3-51 :

0.95

--

-

2

average

have to be multiplied by 0.2 to obtain the

.)

475

kc

made

from

ITotal cycles +

/

cydes

J.Lsec = 475

Be

sure the

position.

of

cycles displayed on the 1 0

of

cycles by 10 to obtain the aver-

cycles/em by the setting of the

is

the frequency of the wave-

switch

em

of the screen.

.

average

10

kc.

VARIABLE

is

at

X.2,

as

The

frequency then

or

0.475

cml +

the

before, w

The

cycles/p.sec,

number

Sweep

Time/Cm

apparent

ith

9.5 cycles

Dual-Beam Phase Measurements

is

of

a

is

For phase-angle measurements using either dual-beam or

multi-trace operation, it

the sweep

play.

TIME/CM

of the input waveform covers each display may gested because it produces a brates the sweep meters.

The relative amplitude phase measurement the horizontal centerline. However, it the phase difference adjusted to

measure phase mode:

1.

in

Dual-Beam Time Measurements.

2. vertical vertical

3. Set both and BEAM controls.

4.

controls so that 1 cycle of the reference waveform covers 8 em Fig. 3-7)

in

degrees of phase

For

instance,

and

VARIABLE

centimeter then corresponds to

is

calibrated

be

used for this calibration. The use

be

the same. Use the following procedure to

angle

Reg

ister the two beams horizontally

Connect the reference phase signal to the Upper Beam

INPUT,

INPUT

the

. Trigger the displays with the Time Base A triggering

Adjust the sweep rate with the TIME/CM

of

the graticule, to calibrate the sweep

.

Reference

Waveform

.~

........

and

.

HORIZ.

Time

Base A trigger

v

~

is

if

the sweep rate

Time/Cm

at

45"

at

1 quadrant

as

long

if

the display amplitudes have been

between two signals

the second signal to the

DISPLAY

1

8

.........

~

/

"'~'-

..

1.9

ern

often convenient to first calibrate

angle

per centimeter of dis-

is

adjusted with the

controls so

8 centimeters

/em.

Any convenient relationship

large

display

(9(t)

of

the signals does not affect the

as

each signal

is

switches to Time Base A

SOURCE

(Jft

~

360°

0

~

['+"

that

one cycle

of

the groticule,

45

degrees,

of

far every two centi-

often easier to read

in

as

described

switch to

/

,..

and

45"

/em

is

and

is

centered on

the dual-beam

lower

and

at

45"

.........

sug-

also cali-

above

Beam

UPPER

VARIABLE

/em

K

/

v

z2

ref

ere line

(see

the

Xl

nce

PHASE

One

complete cycle of a sinusoidal waveform , trigonometric waveform , Phase comparisons between two same frequency can be made with the Type 555 Oscilloscope. Phase angle measurements comparing input formers be used to display the phases simultaneously on the crt screen.

phase relations of sinewaves up to 300

at nectors through similar lengths of coaxial cable. Triggering of the two-trace displays must be from a single source.

and

filters. Dual-beam

X-

Y operation can also

To

retain exact phose relationships between the signals

their sources, they should be

MEASUREMENTS

is

..:onsidered to

or

and

output signals

or

appl

be

more waveforms of the

are

commonly used for

from

amplifiers, trans-

multi-trace

be

used for determining

kc

.

ied to the

or

360 degrees.

operat

ion can

INPUT

other

con-

3-4

Fig.

3-7. Pha

play

Example:

The

second

5. Position both waveforms

zontal graticule line. Adjust the trigger lEVEl control so

the reference waveform starts positive slightly below the

centerline.

6.

be made with the

se-diHerence

calibrated

For

at 4S" / cm.

1.9 cm X

signal

lags

phose angles up to 90", the measurement should

measurement

45

" / cm = 81 ".

the

reference

HORIZ. DISPLAY

waveform

to

from a linear

center on the middle hori-

switch set

by

81 •.

dual

at

beam

X.2 for

dis-

Applications-

Type

555/21A/22A

maximum accuracy. For

measurements must

at

X1.

set between corresponding points on the two phases.

7. Multiply the centimeters of horizontal displacement by

the calibrated angle X.2,

The

the

one

be

the reference waveform.

the left,

it lies

More precise measurements can phase angles, after setting up the display increasing the

TIME/CM switch. Do not ABLE to include this increase. For example, increased by a factor at

X1},

The

time interval between phases by using the brightened portion of display exactly drive both beams. Set the Time Base B TIME/CM switch for a very fast to

SWEEPS ened portion displays MULTIPLIER

Measure the horizontal distance

in

the

"leading"

to

control. The

the calibrated

delayed

sweep

degrees. With the

sweep

is

calibrated

waveform

to the left on the crt display, though this may not

it

leads the reference signal by the phase angle;

the right,

the

and

it

sweep

display

as

sweep

ONCE

of

the display can then

the horizontal displacement

dial.

phase

angles

be

made

with the

rate

(e.g.

45°/

HORIZ. at

9o

is

generally considered to

If

the second waveform lies to

lags the reference signal.

rate

by a factor of 2 or more with the

change

rate

in

degrees/em

of

10 (with the

rate

will then

mode

can also

as

a time marker. Set up the dual-beam

described

rate

FOR

and

EACH

above,

the

SWEEP

'A'

greater

HORIZ.

em)

to obtain the phase

DISPLAY

/em.

be

made

the position of the

if

the sweep

HORIZ. DISPLAY

be

4.5°

/em

be

used to measure the

using Time Base A to

FUNCTION switch

Dl

Y'D

TRIG.

be

read

than 90°,

DISPLAY

in

centimeters

switch set to

of very small

as

described, by

will then

.

The bright-

positioned on the

from the 1-10

switch

be

VARI-

change

rate

switch

X-Y Method

To

measure nals with frequencies up to 300 tion may

provides horizontal deflection other

signal provides vertical deflection . The between the two signals can then lissajous figure displayed.

1.

Connect

INPUT

connector,

HORIZ. INPUT

if

is

2.

Set the HORIZ.

A

TTEN

3. Position the trace on the crt screen deflection factors to produce approximately tion

in

each

X1

0 positions of the HORIZ.

tion

range

panel

EXT

deflection factor over a 1-to-1 0

the

phase angle between two sine-wave sig-

be

used.

In

this mode, one of the sine-wave signals

one

of the sine-wave signals to the vertical

and

the other signal to the rear-panel

connector of the

positions.

direction. The

of the external horizontal input,

. HORIZ. GAIN control adjusts the horizontal

DISPLAY

l

~

.I

[7

kc,

of

the crt

same

switch to one

EXT.

ATTEN

DISPLAY

range

......

~

v

~

the

X-Y

mode

of

opera

beam,

while the

X1

8

and

4

and

phase

of

adjust the

em

of deflec-

EXT.

and

the

ATTEN

the rear-

be

determined from the

beam.

switch set the attenua-

.

J

-

angle

EXT.

Multi-Trace Method

Phase measurements

are

quite similar

as

described tered unless the instrument beam

and

Triggering from usually EXT.

and

In

this case, the trigger signal The input signals and

indirectly

If

a multi-trace plug-in unit with single-channel triggering

is

used, this method should triggering. Apply the reference signal trigger pickoff. Set the trigger SOURCE to PLUG-IN tion of be

applied

display only from the reference signal.

above.

multi-trace mode.

be

provided by setting the trigger

applying

to

or

LOWER

the

multi-trace unit. The triggering signol

through wiring

made

with multi -trace plug-in units

to

those

made

The beams

one

source

an

external time-related triggering signal.

are

then

the triggering signal.

BEAM

with dual-beam operation,

will

is

compared

be

PLUG-IN, depending on the loca-

in

the Type 555 to trigger the crt

not need to

being

operated

will

be

actually the reference signal.

directly to each other

used rather than external

in

required.

SOURCE

to

the channel with

UPPER

be

regis-

both dual-

This

can

switch to

BEAM

will

then

fig.

3-8. Phase-difference

Phase

angle

l«pl

= B lin

2

Sine

4. Center the display

the two vertical distances A

Distance A

points where the

tance B is

cal direction.

5. Divide A by B to obtain the sine of the

between the two signals . The

from a trigonometric table, or from the sine scale on a

slide rule.

If

the display

sine waves

left). or 180° out the display

em

q>

=

4

em

is

the vertical measurement between the two

the maximum excursion of the display

are

is

a circle, the signals

A

= 0.

trace

appears

either

of

phase

measurement

display

5;

in

crosses the vertical centerline.

as a diagonal

in

phase

(tilted

from

an

X-Y

display.

above). Example:

cf>

= 30 °.

the viewing

and B as

angle

(tilted upper right to lower

upper

area

and

indicated

can then

are

90o

be

straight line, the two

left to lower right).

out of

in

phase

calculated

phase

Sine

measure Fig. 3-B

Dis

the verti-

angle

.

of

.

-

If

3-5

NOTES

SECTION 4

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

BLOCK

Fig.

4-1

is

a simplified block

and

Oscilloscope between has two completely one two essentially identical horizontal deflection systems can tility

vertical plug-in units, ately to the two vertical inputs. The signals

fied by the corresponding Vertical Amplifiers scope are

deflection plates

delay

the crt

reaches the vertical deflection plates. This

leading

Base Trigger circuits must use triggering signals

from several sources: either

external trigger

form,

with single-channel trigger pickoff.

then

initiate the

erator

integrator. The gating circuit starts

the Time-Base

set for

generat

either

is fiers horizontal deflection plates

base

Base Unit may

using the sawtooth from

gering pulse

sweep

start

the horizontal deflection

signals to either

corresponding External Horizontal Amplifier circuit.

output waveform

tion

compensation

the various circuits

for the Upper Beam

be

cross-connected

of

the instrument.

An

input signal can

and

connected through

of

the input si

beam

edge

To

present

to

Generator.

or

a multi-

Output

The

pulses from the

applied

consists essentially

triggered

es a linear

or

both

amplified. The sawtooth outputs of

are

then

sweeps

start

of

Time Base B to occur

of

the Time Base A

External

The Amplitude Calibr

of

the vertical deflection systems

its plug-

independent

the push-pull outputs

in

the crt. Each

gnal

unblanked

of fast-rising pulses to stable

displays

the input signals, for starting

INPUT

trace

to

their corresponding Time-Base

sweep

-sawtooth waveforms. Each Time-Base

Generator

or

free running

sawtooth

of

the Horizontal Amplifier circuits

applied

of

the crt

of

the

sweep

be

delayed

in

the Delay Pickoff circuit.

sweep

signals may

of

that

of

probes.

DIAGRAM

diagram

in

units showing the interrelation of

the system. The instrument

vertical deflection

and

one

for the

or

interconnected to extend the versa-

be

applied

or

two signals

delay

so the Time-Base circuits will

and

The triggering signals may

connector; the line frequency

plug-in unit (such

twa

of a gating

operation, whether the circuit

push-pull to the corresponding sets of

beams

produced by

the

sweep

of

the Horizontal Amplifiers through the

ator

can

be

to either

of

lines to their respective vertical

delay

sweeping before the input signal

of

the input signals, the Time-

of

the Vertical Amplifiers; the

Time-Base Trigger circuits

operation

waveform

in

the crt

.

by a selected time interval by

Type

21 A to

at

a known interval after the

.

also

the crt

circuit produces a

used fo r checking the calibra-

of

the Type 555

systems-

lower

Beam-and

or

both

can

be

applied

are

then ampli -

in

the Vertical Amplifiers

line provides sufficient

be

displayed.

each

circuit

and

stops

that

the

to

the

be

used for

beam

or

the oscillo-

delay

allows the

that

are

sweep

be

selected

as

the Type 1 A

Generators

and

a Miller

each

cycle of

. The Miller circuit

is

applied

where

Horizontal Ampli-

produce the time-

Type 22A Time-

produce the trig-

This

permits the

generating

by applying the

square-wave

for adjusting the

that

of

the

separ-

have

time-

of

the

wave

are

Gen

1)

to

The

low voltages circuit. The low-voltage supplies consist

voltages lated

Operating

high-

addition the controls astigmatism

Since the Upper Beam

systems

scribed. The Upper Beam vertical deflection system· is shown in following description the description

An

the input connector

unit provides a

Vertical Amplifier circuit through the interconnecting plug and

crt

units

the interconnecting plug for triggering the time-

The Vertical Amplifier sists signal amplification to drive the

vertical deflection plates

-

vertical deflection system the use tributed amplifier

is

Vertical Amplifier through a the input end.

it

The driver tion triggering the

phase

This

follower to either

Another push-pull signal is taken tributed amplifi dicator amplifier tubes to bulbs. These bulbs indicate the relative position of the with respect to the center of the viewing

-Voltage Power Supplies provide the operating

for all circuits except certain portions of the crt

and

one

and

unregulated

voltage

to

VERTICAL

are

block

diagram

input signal

also provides positioning voltages for positioning the

beam

vertically on the screen. Some multi-trace plug-

also

provide a single-channel trigger signal through

of

three de-coupled push-pull stages, providing sufficient

of

low

balanced

of

the signal to the Trigger Pickoff circuit for use

with the signal

output

unregulated de voltage as well

ac

filament supplies.

voltages for the crt power

the high-voltage supplies, the crt circuit contai

and

supplies contained

circuitry

focus

of

that each

affect the intensity, geometry,

beam

DEFLECTION

and

identical, only

form

are

applies

to

of

balanced

and

high-frequency compensation

output

is

delay

stage

of

sweep

. The output

is

then

applied

or

er

section

lower

one

in

Fig

. 4-2. Circuit numbers in the

also those

equally

be

the vertical plug-

sent to the vertical deflection plates

the Vertical Amplifier

at

both of the Time-Base Trigger circuits.

well to the

displayed on the crt

push-pull output to the oscilloscope

in

the Type 555 Oscilloscope con-

in

the crt. The

is

de to 30 me,

stage

. The push-pull output of the

line

that

the input

through the tri

and

used

operate

of

five regulated de

are

provided

in

the crt circuit.

of the crt display .

SYSTEM

Beam vertical deflection

of

the systems will be de-

of

the Upper Beam, but

lower

in unit. The plug-in

delay

line

obtained

is

singly terminated

is

a single-

of

the vertical plug-

gger pickoff

at

the input to the dis-

by

the beam-position in-

the

beam

area

Input Stages

The push-pull input signal

amplifier tubes, the driver st trolled by GAIN ADJ control,

V1

014

age

. Amplification

degeneration

R1027,

applied

and

V1

in

the common

is

adjusted

to

the grids of the input

024,

is

amplified

in

the input amplifier

cathode

during calibration so

as

by

separate

Beam.

is

applied

base

units.

and

one pair of

passband

ended

through

and

applies

signal in

cathode

-position neon

.

and

circuit. The

regu-

In

ns

to

in

of the

a dis-

at

a por-

in

unit.

beam

sent to

is

con-

4-1

Circuit

Description-

UPPER

VERTICAL

INPUT

+GATE

I

sAWTOOTH

I

1-6.'3-VAC~--

I

BEAM_

I 1-

-

Type

555/21A/22A

PLUG-IN UNIT

----------

: TIME

I

TRIG

I

INPUT

I

•

________

UPPER

BEAM

I

EXT

. HORIZ.I

INPUT I

I

DELAYED

TRIG. OUT P

LOWER BEAM

f

EXT.

HORIZ.I

INPUT

~

10+0

k-..

r---TYPE

I

J

EXTERNAL

HORIZONTAL

AMPLIFIER

EXTERNAL

HORIZONTAL

AMPLIFIER

VERTICAL

BASE

TRIGGER

21A

TIME-BASE

I--

VERTICAL

AMPLIFIER

.f-

---

TIME

GENERATOR

UNIT---

DELAY PICKOFF CIRCUIT

BASE

-,

_

_!

~

I I I

I

1

DELAY

LINE

HORIZONTAL

AMPLIFIER

CRT

CIRCUIT

H

I--

V-._'

UPPER BEAM

---r-

CRT

~

\ri

L~'Z!R

~

v

f'--==~

,---------,

6.3

VAC----+-0

l

I

TRIG.

I

INPUT

I

-

!sAWTOOTH

+GATE

I

LOWER BEAM

VERTICAL INPUT

10+0

----TYPE

I

I~

T

~

I

L---

-

--------

TIME

BASE

TRIGGER

22A

TIME-BASE

VERTICAL

PLUG-IN UNIT

AMPLITUDE

CALIBRATOR

GENERATOR

UNIT-1--

TO

LOW-VOLTAGE

POWER

- - - -

TIME

BASE

- -

VERTICAL

AMPLIFIER

ALt

BLOCKS

SUPPLIES

'

I

L.o

I

ll--o

I I

1

1-

- -

HORIZONTAL

AMPLIFIER

DELAY

t--

LINE

4-2

Fig. 4 -

1.

Simplified

block

diagram

of

the

Type

555

Oscilloscope.

®

UPPER

BEAM

VERT

IINPUTI

. @

VERTICAL

PLUG-IN

UNIT

DC

SHIFT

I I

~

I I I I

GAIN

ADJ

I I I I

--,___;-----"L_

I I

Circuit

INDICATOR AMPLIFIERS

V1084A

V1223B

DRIVER V1033 V1043

.

TRIGGER PICKOFF

AMPLIFIER

V1054 V1064

Description-

I I

--;----;--

1 I

I I

Type

555/21A/22A

1rl

I I

.-------,ill

TRIGGER PICKOFF

C.F.

V1223A

I I

TO

TIME-BASE

CIRCUITS

I I

that

the

gain

of

the to the pa

nel

of

tion

of

and

L1024.

The

driver

V1

033

and the input drive for sation

of

L 1 036

and

Output

calibrated

the

input

V1

amplifier

the the

L 1

046

Stages

entire Vertical Amplifier will

deflection

vertical

plug-in unit. High-

amplifier

stage

consists

043,

th

at

and grid line high

of

frequency

in

the

driver

The push-pull signal from

through the grid lines to

V11

and

between

a slight

line,

and

stage

ampl through

along

200

04

along

nan

tributed amplifier, ductors for and through to th plate as line put cal deflection

justable of the line A total vided, with

ring

in the

in

the

plate

capacitance

also

provide

the circuit. Since t

at

in

the

of

the

signal

reaches

of

the

grid

each

tube

traveling

that

distributed

plates

capacitors

characteristics

of

about

approximately

in

the Vertical Amplifier

delay

line.

Fig.

4-2.

factors i

ndicated

frequency

is

provided

of

two

isolate

the

distributed

the

provide

signals stage

the

each

section

through

grid

transmission i'ines

sections

delay

he

delay

the

amplified

is

added

to

lhe

of

plate

the

distributed amplifier. The out-

ifier

is

then

the 1200-

the

delay

by inductors

pairs

of

cathode

distributed

necessary

amplifier.

is

provided

.

driver

stage

of

the

V1214. The

of

the distributed

of

the

signal

in

the

plate

signal

the signal

line

toward

connected

ohm delay

line

provide

for minimum distortion

oseconds

15

of

~

nanoseconds

and

signal

185

nanoseconds

Upper

Beam

correspond

on the front

compensa-

L1

followers,

amplifier from

low-

impedance

Compen-

by inductors

is

applied

six-section dis-

tapped

compensate

amplifier

as

it

passes

line

is

appears

equal

at

amplitude

the

delay

to

the verti-

line: Ad-

adjustment

of

the signal.

delay

of

is

delay occu

of

delay

vertical

014

in-

the

just

pro-

r-

JLS

I I

deflection

system

block

diagram.

The reverse Amplifier frequency and

R1

073,

distributed

ing a compensated C1

075,

De

shift

of

the amplifier

quencies

diagram

range

C1

077,

that

than

termination

ore

divided

by

C1

results from a

at for this difference network on of

positive circuits R1

090 termination cuits for sist R1099 R1

091, the

compensation

each

feedback

in

the input amplifier. The

and

C1

093D-

at

low frequencies . The positive

extremely

of

R1

092,

R1

and

is

094

C1093C

connected

presents a constant

of

the

termination. The termination

the

078,

tubes

mid

is

side

of

appl

R1

095,

low

and

on

between

.

Beam-Position Indicators

Current V12238, lines voltages

81227. tube

current the the direction the crt

the

through

is

of

the

across

When

is

conducting. As through

neon

bulbs to light. Thus the

center

of

the

determined

distributed amplifier. These

the

the crt

one

the

crt

screen,

beam

of

beam

network, shown

instrument. The

into

three

sections

variable

L1

071

and

capacitors

L1

difference

is

normally less

and

high frequencies.

provided

the

ied from

increase

frequency

the

by

amplifier

the

and

C1

093A on one side,

other

. The DC

the

indicator

by

beam

the

amp

the relative

indic

ator

is

beam

the

tubes

has

centered

is

been

whether

_h__f

on

impedance

two

073

.

at

a low-frequency boost

and

plate

boost

resistance

de

two

networks to

lifier tubes,

voltages

tubes

neon

positioned

increases,

neon

positioned

the

beam

the Vertical

over

res istors,

each

approximat is

frequency

and

inductors,

in

transconductance

de

and

low fre-

Compensation

by a small

lines to circuits,

amount

the

C1

of

the reverse

feedback

compensation

and

SHIFT

R1

control,

balance

V1

084A

on

the

in

turn set the bulbs, 81083 vertically, neither

up

or

causing

that

lights indicates

one

away

is

visible

or

I I

the

R1

071

plate

0938-

cir-

con-

097,

and

plate

and

down,

of

from

not.

-

4-3

Circuit

Description-

Type

555/21

A/22A

Trigger Pickoff

The

Trigger and an output cathode follower. and

V1

lines, amplify and invert the signals,

provide the output signal.

through

for

scope

it

can be used to trigger the display.

The

basic function of the Time-Base Trigger provide constant-amplitude negative spikes that related to the input signal at

the proper time to present a stable display.

The

Type Trigger circuits which operate on input signals up to 30 Each

of the circuits, as shown consists essentially of a vacuum-tube comparator, coupled transistor current amplifier, a pulse generator, a countdown circuit

Time-Base

the

manual during the following description.

Pickoff

064

, monitor the vertical signal

V1223A

application to the

circuit consists of an amplifier stage

The

to the interconnecting wiring of the oscillo-

single-ended output

Time

TIME-BASE

for

starting each horizontal sweep

21 A and

Trigger schematic diagram

the Type

in

and

an output pulse amplifier. Refer to

The

amplifier tubes,

from

and

combine them to

-Base Trigger circuits where

V1

is

coupled

054

the two grid

TRIGGER

circu1t

IS

are

time-

22A

have similar

the block diagram

in

Time

-Base me.

(Fig

. 4-

an

emitter-

the back of this

Trigger Input

The

SOURCE

vides selection of the trigger signal

switch, SW8,

at

the input to the circuit pro-

from

one of

six

possible

to

3),

sources: either of the Vertical Amplifier trigge r pickoff circuits; either of the vertical plug-in units; the line frequency, or an external signal connector.

limited to operation with mult ternal trigger pickoff circuits. The li taken

RS

by

The of the inputs from the Vertical Amplifier coupling of the internal signals. with the high-frequency triggering signals. SWl

signal, and gering to be done on either the positiv ative-going slope of the selected signal.

Use

of the plug-

from the 6.3 volt regulated filament supply and filt

and

CS

to remove some of the

TRIG

DC

TRIG

0,

provides either ac - or de-coupl i

the trigger

Comparator

The

trigger comparator circuit consis

coupled vacuum tube pair,

gering signal

to a de voltage

is

provided

and

R21. The

by about

about

of the voltage is approximately zero.

is

by

the trigger

LEVEL

±

10

+ 1 volt. When both of the controls

app

lied through the trigger

in

units

for

i-

LEVEL

controls,

LEVEL

SOURCE

and

Difference Amplifier

applied to one of the gr i

on

the other grid .

control can vary the comparison voltage

volts,

and

R3

controls provide compensation

V24A

LEVEL

the

VERNIER

triggering sources is

trace plug-in units with in-

ne-fre

quency signal is

rms

regulator distortion.

and R8, set the de levels

at

The

switch, SW22, permits trig-

and

zero volts

attenuators associated

The

COUPLING switch,

ng

of the trigger

e-

going or the neg-

ts

· of a cathod

V24B. Th

The

VERNIER

control has a range

e input trig-

ds

and

comparison voltage

controls,

are

INPUT

ered

for

de-

for

compared

R17

centered,

e-

I I

~/""""-

...........

...._...,.

I I

TRIG

.

I

INPUT

I

~

4'-:--o--TRIG

--

6.3

VA~

::r::

TRIGGER

V"

..

0

.. 0

O

SENSITIVITY

•

DC

LEVR

TRIG. LEVR

CENT.

•

.----1----,

TRIGGER

AMPI.IRER

Q24 Q34

TRIGGER

PULSE

GENERATOR

038

I

VERNIER

T D

BIAS

I I

I I _ __,_____,..__

I I I I

~--~COUNIDOWN~--~

TRIGGER

045

I

~--------~1

--r-v

TRIGGER

PULSE

AMPLIFIER

Q44

I I

TO

TIME-BASE

GENERATOR

I

4-4

Fig. 4-3.

Time-Base Trigger block

diagram

.

®

To

illustrate the

SLOPE

switch, SW22,

age

is

set slightly positive. The comparison trigger level circuit the triggering signal will

be

conducting more heavily than V24A, ducting , will the input triggering signal becomes more positive comparison voltage, current through V24A becomes than change the transistor pair, biased

the push-pull signal

the sum

circuit signals, but Iorge signals drive

causes current to increase through through Q24. The push-pull current pulse existing the collectors of the' transistor diode state

level would ner. occurred on the trigger source negative than the comparison

The

trol, circuit will trigger equally

amplitudes down to

instruments having control, that their bios currents

025

be

greater

that

through

in

the

and

of

is

able

the

circuit.

The signal

038,

as

soon

If

the

SLOPE

voltage

have

In

that

TRIG

SENS

R26,

ore

R26, balances

Pulse Generator

operation

is

then connected to the grid of

is

will

be

reverse

than

that

V24B.

plate

circuits

Q24

025

begins to conduct,

the bios voltages of

applied

causing

been sent through

case, however, the switching pulse would hove

applied

to amplify

to the

it

as

the current reaches

switch

set slightly negative, o push-pull current pulse

negative

voltage

control,

adjusted to set the bios on

the

S/N's

and

of

the circuit, assume

set to +

applied

through Q34.

The resulting current

and

ore

to

switch rapidly to

hod

slope

on the grid of

R25,

minimum specified amplitude.

7000-10999, the

the bose voltages on

are

and

the trigger level volt-

voltage

to

the

grid

of

biased

and

of

V24A

Q34.

As

the

to

Q24

and

been

in + and

equal).

024

operate

clipped so they will not over-

bose

circuits

pair

approximately

set

at -and

038

in

of

the input signal,

voltage

and

the

024

current through

When

and

V24B

024

becomes reverse-

voltage

and

Q34

and

025

on small triggering

of

the transistor

Q34

and

is

sent through tunnel

its

the triggering

exactly the some man-

V24B

become

at

the grid

TRIG

LEVEL

Q24

and

- polarity on signal

TRIG

Q24

Amplifier

V24A.

will

the level of

and

is

applied

amplitude

is

. Thus the

to

high

CENT con-

Q34

LEVEL

and

that

the

from the

V24B

and

V24B

be

con-

Q24

than

the

greater

voltage

to

of

limited to

pair

decrease

between

voltage

10 mo.

as

the

more

of

V24A.

so

the

(In

CENT

Q34 so

Circuit

Output

inverter transistor Q44, which

to conduct slightly, as

the tunnel resulting negative-going pulse transistor saturates, the

Time-Bose

Reset of

IS/N

11000-upl

When somewhat low-

voltage

going pulse

is

resets circuit. Thus, the tive step as

Q44 returns to

IS/N

7000-109991

Bios through their switching levels (see with

the

R36

sets the lower switching level

D

E

11'1-

l p

I

_

_j_

;i

Low

~

State

0

~

0

...

diode

038

the input triggering signal

below

state that

blocked

as

Q44 saturates, followed by o slow positive rise

current for tunnel

045,

R41

TO

BIAS

v.

I

~

Level

.I

~.

Switching to Low

State

Description-

is

turned on

switches to the high

is

the

output

Generator

the

by the amplifier transistors. The negativeappears by

output

Bias

\

circuit.

comparison voltage,

at

042

and

trigger pulse

its

initial bios conditions .

R38,

control,

1

s

~1tc

High

diode

Fig

•

and

\

'

',

'

Forward

Voltage

Type

555/21A/22A

is

quiescently biased

hard

by the pulse from

at

the collector of Q44,

trigger pulse to

the

anode

does

038

setting both

.

4-4)

R44,

during calibration. Resistor

1

h'

1n~

to

State

High

......

voltage

at

the

comparator 038

is

of

038

not reach the countdown

is

.

This

of

038.

Voltage

v

,.

IL

_..

as

o fast 1 0-volt nega-

supplied primarily

038

and

current

State

/

I'"

1

,.

state. The

as

be

used by

drops

reset to

the diode

045

is

adjusted

~

/.

I

045

the

its

near

IS/N

11000-upl

Bios

current for high-frequency tunnel plied primarily through Q34, near

its current for countdown tunnel of voltage

of series on the has o forward by

current pulse from the transistor pair, the fast positivegoing output pulse bioses switches, the positive-going

reverse biases this state.

@

switching level, but

R44

(TO

BIAS)

so

near

042

of

voltage

038

that

its

switching point.

040

at

042

is

switched to

applied

diode

state

Current through

diode

cathode

more than o few microomps.

When

diode

042,

switching

R34, R39

in

its

diode

this tunnel

and

R36

sets the

about +0.6 volt. With the

set

at

applied

045

about +0.5 volt, this but not

its

through C38 quickly forward

to

its

high-voltage

voltage

and

it returns

low-

045

diode

high-

on the

diode

and

R38,

voltage

is

adjusted

is

also

voltage

enough

voltage

cathode

to

its

non-conducting

038

is

setting

state. Bios

by means

in

the low-

at

the

anode

voltage

diode

to turn it on

state

by

state. As

of

sup-

038

the

045 042

Fig.

4-4.

Characteristic curve for

When

diode

038 the current pulse from the transistor pair, the resulting pulse

is of T40. The small pulse countdown tunnel

The output amplifier-inverter,

conduct slightly.

tive-going pulse

transistor to

at

Time-Bose

differentiated

the

collector

saturate

Generator

is

diode,

As

045

applied

. The resulting fast negative-going pulse

is

the

tunnel

switched to

by

C38, C40,

is

then

applied

045,

switching

Q44,

switches to its high

to the

output

circuit.

bose

trigger pulse to

diodes

038

and

045.

its

high

voltage

R40

and

the

through

it

to

is

quiescently biased to

its

state

of Q44 causes the

be

used by the

impedance 040 high

, the posi-

Trigger Countdown

IS/N

11000-upl

The input

Trigger circuit,

comparator

as

well

and

amplifier stages of the Time-Bose

as

038

and

040,

con follow changes

state

voltage

to the

state

4-5

by

.

Circuit

Description-

Type

555/21A/22A

I

___,

J

PULSE

TIME-BASE

TRIGGER

r--------------------------- --------------

TYPE

22A

·----------------·

I '

II

PUSH

H

RESET

:

: _ :

I I

-DRAY'ED_________

TRIGGER

~SWEEP

~NCTION_

r--

(S/N

P~~H

j_.

RESET

- I

'---

I

STABILITY

1

. t

FROM-------4~---IIt--t__,

AUTO

BASELINE

0104 0115

TO

I(

S/N

7000 -10999)

!"o.._

n~~H--=-::~=-1

j_

:

DELAYED

TRIGGER

AMPLIRER

V114

J

~------...

~

11000 -UP)

~Jb

~

- \ MULTIVIBRATOR

< V125

I

<,

~!

AUTO

9

I

SINGLE

LOCKOUT

V133A

+-+

__

1\

TRIG

ONCE

SWEEPS

NORMAL

ONCE

BASELINE

SWEEP

t----!--..._---~---1

UNBLANKING

--

rS-W-EEP--GLA_TI_N_G,

..,.-+iMULTIVIBRATOR....

V135 V145 1

I I I I I

..r----r-.....-

: : I

CF

V193A

+ GATE

CF

V193B

r-D-1-SC_O_N_N-EC_T_:,ll;

DIODES I

~

Vl

HOLDOFF •

V133B V183A

.-. TO

I

L

___

!TYPE

,--~~·~

I+GATEI

---o

I I I I

---.....-

52

I

I TIME/CM I

I

I I

I

I I

/

--L---L-

:

\:

UNBLANKING

CRT

_..

TO UNBLANKING MIXER

22A

ONL

"'-

~~-

MILLER RUN

!}'I

I

~~4--,----~

I

V161

r{

V173

.------t._. HORIZONTAL

1/G

SWP

LENGTH

PULSE

CIRCUITS

Yl

I I

1-.-

UP

:

I

l TO

I I

SAWTOOTH

CF

V183B

>

TO

DELAY

PICKO

21

A onlyl

AMPLIFIER

FF

!TYPE

!sAWTOOTH~

0 ~ ""

•

~------------------------------------------

TYPE

21A

SWEEP

I

FUNCTIONr-

PUSH

I

RESET

n MULTIVIBRA

j_

-=-

I

STABILITY

r-~~~-no

l

---

J

0-JAUTO

0

TO I I

'---

>

•

"'<-->

LOCKOUT

~~

I

Fig.

4-S.

Time-Base

LOCKOUT

/J"

LEVEL

¥

L.oro-1\1-

lr

NORMAL

BASELINE

SINGLE

TOR

V125 I -

V133A

SWEEP

.______

....,H=o=R=Iz

DISPLAY

I

~1'::____1

~1"

-

L~~~UT

Generator

block

diagram

showing

I (

.

~l

differences

]{

--

II

1\

between

4-6

MULTI-TRACE

--+i

LOWER BEAM

MULTI-TRACE

Jhe Type 21 A

UPPER

BEAM

SWITCHING

AMPLIFIER

V524A

SWITCHING

AMPLIFIER

V534A

and

I I I I

..,(,_-....,tr-

: : SWITCHING

the

Type

22A

1 MULTI-

TO

.

TRACE

PULSE

VERTICAL

PWG-IN

UNITS

®!

in

the input

frequency

as

30 me. The maximum repetition

Generator cannot countdown

D45

and

of

trigger

than

70

This tunnel down of

triggering

14.3 p.sec. switches is a monostable switch

decrease

by

the

cuit.

When

of

the

age

stage,

constant

circuit

(TD

BIAS)

15/N

7000-109991

The input Trigger circuit, in

the frequency can

be Time-Base "count down repetition circuit

Countdown

045,

from triggerability, about pulse from is

an

unstable begin determined ance

of

when

it

at

point Since repetition

trigger

circuit to well

of

the pulses

circuit, however,

count

down

of

the

associated

pulses to

kc.

diode

by

setting the cycle time

to

next instant

When

to

its

high-voltage

back

to

its low-

along

the tunnel

l/R

time

constant

the

current

tunnel

diode

then recovers to its bias level

of

the circuit

is

adjusted

.

comparator

as

input

trigger

of

the

as

high

as

Generator

down"

of

to

the

well from high frequencies. Therefore count-

the

trigger

rate

of

less

than

is

accomplished

the

instant

038, it

state

decrease

by

the

circuit.

reaches

the

L/ R time

total cycle time

rate

of

applied

well from high frequencies . Therefore,

trigger

pulses

components

the

Time-Base

circuit accomplishes the required

045

is

triggered

configuration,

voltage

of

has

curve,

at

that

to

be

14.3 p.sec

and

well

as

038

signal to well

constant-amplitude

30 me. The maximum repetition

circuit

pulses

trigger

kc.

of

14

switches

so

the

along

l / R time

045

valley

constant

the

countdown

pulses

triggering

p.sec.

the

switches

70

Reset

When

the

input

. The

040

triggering

the

comparison

negative

and

does

trigger

followed

pulse

and

somewhat initial

state

blocked

the

Thus as

Q44

output

is

ditions.

below

by

output

saturates,

differentiated

TIME-BASE

The Time-Base

Type 22A

Generator

are

essentially identical

above

30

me.

Thus the

through

is

about

is

of

triggerability

state,

045

state

diode

curve

l42

and

decreased

045

switches

ime. The total cycle time

(70

amplifier

and

is

about

is

provided

to

by

When to its high voltage

tunnel

constant

back

current, then recovers to its bias

of

is

about

circuit

signal

voltage

not

reach

is

a fast 1 0-volt

by

a slow positive rise

044

returns

C38

can

be

as

high

rate

of

the Time-Base

150

kc

and

that

circuit

provided

limiting the repetition

Generator

the circuit, from the instant

by

but

immediately

. The current

the resistance

kc)

040, can

above

the Time-Base

making

and

the

at

voltage, 038

by

tunnel

diode

circuit

to

count

at

approximately

a pulse from

since the circuit

at a rate

to the valley current

back

to its low volt-

at

by the setting

stages

of

follow

30 me. Thus,

pulses

applied

150 kc,

by

045

the

to

the

next instant

045

is

triggered

voltage

current immediately

diode

curve

of

L42

to

14 p.sec, the maximum

and

its low

circuit

is

about

the

comparator

pulse through T the

countdown

to

its initial

038, of

D45

attempts

and

voltage

determined

of

the

l/R

time

of

the Time-Base

changes

to

D45

rate

and

state

negative

of

it

cannot

to

limit

Generator

cycle time

by

, but this

at a rate

the

resist-

voltage

at

that

70 kc.

resets

bias

state

time.

drops

to

40

circuit.

as

step

con-

GENERATORS

circuits

in

the

Type

except

21 A and

for portions

less

to

cir-

the

R44

the

of of

a

its

is

the

Circuit

to

the

delayed Time-Base ences tion

sweep

Trigger signals received from the Time-Base Trigger cir-

cuit

through vibrator.

-

triggered

1. A 150-volt positive-going

that

it

either

to output output also

2. A positive-going 65-volt unblanking

same

HORIZ.

supplies

ing

the Time-Base Unit

3. A positive 25-volt

tion

+GATE

4. A negative-going same

the HORIZ. plug-in units. The trailing trace alternate

Each cycle from of

the operation. Triggered tions. The Time-Base that ation SWEEP FUNCTION switch NIER

The sweep vibrator multivibrator disconnect output ground. When cuit tion gating holdoff reaches a preset resets, switching the disconnect

circuit then resets, forming the the

sawtooth sample erator circuits

The de level

is

controlled

trol, the

Generator

between

applies

are

can

connected

waveform

as

the

the circuit will not

is

of

to

circuitry

applied

a differentiating circuit

Whenever or

free running,

be

coupled

or

both

is

coupled

cathode

duration

DISPLAY

in

either

unblanks

the

sawtooth

connector for

duration

DISPLAY

plug-in unit

mode

.

of

Time-Base Trigger circuit,

previous cycle

is

obtained

controls.

auto

baseline circuit provides free-run

in

the

absence

provides single

is a two-state

diodes

of

the Time-Base

allowed

multivibrator

is

from beginning the next cycle

have

to

the

sawtooth

waveform.

. The

delayed

stabilized.

at

by

auto

baseline

Description-

sweep

. Fig. 4-5

showing

the two units. The following circuit descrip-

both

generators.

is

described

to

the Time-Base circuit

of

the Horizontal Amplifiers. The

to

follower,

to

the

as

the

switches

or

both sides

during

as

switches

to

events

through the

on

the

diodes

produce a sweep

through

When

amplitude,

retrace

by

the input

the lockout multivibrator, the

later

the

auto

it

produces

through

the

+gate

the

switch

operation

Generator

of

and

waveform

the holdoff circuit, preventing

circuit

the HORIZ.

SAWTOOTH

and

Delay

Pickoff circuit.

sawtooth

to

floating

of

the

crt beam(s) being

the

sweep.

waveform with the

rise,

available

external 12-volt multi-trace sync pulse with

sawtooth

to

either

edge

channels

is

either

when

the circuit

operate

and

trigger sweep

electronic switch

off.

When

Generator

are

the

rise

the

portion

of

the

and

Type

555/21A/22A

is

a block

the

basic circuits

Operation

in

this section.

baseline

to

the

sweep

the Time Base A

rise,

the

crt circuit. The unblank-

use.

rise,

or

of

the

started

or

is

used for most

can

. The

appropriate

the trigger

pulses,

operation

is

clamped

cut off, the Miller runup cir-

sawtooth

is

fed

hold off circuit, forming the

of

sweep-gating diodes on. The Miller runup retrace

of

the

sweep-gating

the

diagram

of

multivibrator

sweep-gating

operates,

four

output

sawtooth

DISPLAY

connector

waveform,

coupled

high-voltage

at

the front-panel

coupled both

of

pulse

causes

when

operated

by a trigger

is

started

is

set

also

be

desired

the

mode setting

LEVEL

operation

and

the lockout multi-

. The

that

diodes

slightly

signal. A por-

back

to

the holdoff waveform

or

falling portion

feedback

of

operation

STABILITY

holdoff waveform.

of

and

differ-

the

delayed

and

multi-

whether

signals:

waveform

switches

sawtooth

through

sawtooth

with the

through

deflected

same

through

the

by

for free-run

disabled

sweep-gating

are

the

multivibrator

the

negative

dura-

the

vertical

a multi-

in

the

pulse

the

end

applica-

of

oper

of

the

and

VER-

of the

turns the

on, the

below

sweep

sawtooth

the

gen-

until the

con-

the

an

by

so

of

In

is

-

4-7

Circuit

normal vibrator

age

Type

FUNCTION switch and

at

the

In

the following

21

back

of

VERNIER

Description-

triggered

serves

"triggerable"

A Time-Base

this

operation,

as a cathode

manual.

is

controls

Type

555/21

one follower

level.

detailed

circuit description, refer

Generator

Unless otherwise

set

to NORMAL

are

set for

A/22A

half

of

the lockout multi-

to

hold the input volt-

schematic

stated,

and

the

triggered

diagram

the

trigger

operation

to in

SWEEP

LEVEL

.

Quiescent Conditions

In

the condition but no tions

V1 cathode

about through 5 volts more draws

circuit. The grids

V1

the output cut connect

V1

the

volts.

grid

+40 on its grid, B167

off. control sets the

its

nected than

bility control circuit,

cut off. The circuit serving

and

+ 1 8 volts (with SWEEP FUNCTION

trigger

to

quiescent

are

as

Sweep

Miller

Gating

45

is

cut off. The

follower

-50 cathode

all the current

of

V1

93B

Disconnect 52 A clamps

Holdoff Circuit-

Lockout Multivibrator-

Auto Baseline

operate

93A

is

cut off. Thus the blanking

cathode

at

the

off, its

diodes

cathode sawtooth. V1

Run

held

at

volts. V173

and

R1

Voltage

cathode

to the grid

the

-50

as a cathode

V1 1 SB

pulses

.

state

with the

sweep

being

follows:

Multivibrator- V135A

STABILITY

V1

25, sets

volts. The

follower

negative

cathode

of

plate

of

up

set

67.

at

is

voltage

and

V1

93A

cathode

voltage

turned on.

Diodes-

the

sawtooth

V1

73,

to

52B

clamps

Circuit-V1

about -2.5 volts

is

cut off with a

by

the

V1

applied

voltage

about

of

volts

on

so

is

Circuit-V1 1 SA

cut off. With the grid

applied

the

plate

V1

35B

than

the grid

available

of

93B

so

is

at

about

of

V1

93B

of

about

V1

52 A

output

provide a

the

61

plate

voltage

83A

is

to V183A

at

its grid

-85

volts. This

V1

33B,

is

the

cathode

the

tube

V1

25

essentially inoperative, though V125

follower for

through

generator

generated,

control,

grid

voltage

sets

from the common

V135B sets the

that

V1

-45

is

held

-3

and

stable

grid

is

conducting heavily with

and

its

voltage

of

conducting

through

at

about

of

is

cut off.

is

conducting

the

and

D1

08

in a triggerable

the

is

conducting

operating

voltage

of

V1

35A,

the

grid

of

V1

35A, so

93A

voltage

volts,

at

V1

at

of

plate

about

voltage,

35 volts more

stability

0104

of

at

cannot

voltage

is

conducting

to

and

ground.

volts keeps

52B

are

about

- 3.5 volts

starting

V1

61

at

voltage

of

about

V1

61

and

the SWP

- 95 volts

V133B

set

and

are

V1

15A held

NORMAL),

cause

circuit condi-

of

V1

the

conducting.

voltage

about

the

V1

which

voltage.

through

V1

35A

applied

45

about

V1

cathode

at

crt from

+ GATE

With

the

at

- 12 volts divider,

33B

LENGTH

is

negative

by

the sta-

V1

33A

conducting

at negative

the

circuit

Cycle of Operation

a.

Gating

When

the

negative-going Base Trigger circuit multivibrator switches states. The switching action begins

at

pulse

the grid

is

received from

of

V1

35A,

the

sweep-gating

the

the the

and

at

35A

the

and

V1

45

dis-

at

for

- 2.5

its

about

is

cut

and

con-

about

Time-

as

the

trigger

of

V1

45

through

of

current common quickly switches is portion has

rises sharply. ing il}g put pulse.

dropped voltage connect and

cathode

cut off

and

of

no effect on

When

V1

and

+gate

them to

With

V1

to a

step

diodes

causes

b. Runup

Current conducted the

timing negative V1 a positive-going fied bulb, the grid throughout grid nearly resistor remains essentially

Waveform

is is

Fig. tooth

61,

is

change

B1

67,

timing

side

to less

constant

Sawtooth/

Holdoff

Waveform

4-6

. Cycle

waveform.

change

amplified

pulse

at

the

plate

of

V1

35A

is

cathode

through

the

35A cuts off, the

unblank

45

the

through

by

capacitor,

is

and

capacitor,

of

the

I

--~

through

the

V1

45

trigger

the

This

cathode

now

new

lowers

to a value

tubes

V1

52B,

in

by a

voltage

coupled

cathode

the

capacitor.

sawtooth

than

1 volt. With

voltage

/

I

~--~~

V1

45

state

is

conducting

signal

sweep-gating

voltage

the

in

level

the

to cut off.

the

timing resistor, is C1

voltage

back

tending

Sweep

,/

follower

and

decreasing

V1

35A. This

of

the multivibrator so

heavily

is

eli

voltage

step

is

followers,

crt

beam

conduction, its

of

about

voltage

more

negative

now

diverted

60,

toward

at

factor

at

the

of

the

plate

through

follower

to

The

rise, limiting the total swing

the

level,

the

unchanged

I I

/ l Retrace

""'/

I I

/ :

,l

I I I

I

--------

applied

V1

35B, starting

current from the

regenerative

. The positive-

pped

by

diode

multivibrator.

at

the

cathode

coupled

V1

and

--6

on

- 150 volts. The initial

grid

about

the

V1

73

oppose

feedback

grid

voltage

•

II

I I

,/

to

93A

and

start

the

plate

volts. This

the

plates

than

R1

60,

and

begins

of

the

200

and

of

the

tube

de

voltage-dropping

to

the

any

action

of

V1

across

. Current

:

their

that

change

l/

:

I I 1 I

:

~~~~

,/

I/

--~+----+--------~

/ /

/

~=f::f::::

- -...

=="*

===~=it==~~

t

Trigger Holdoff Trigger

Pulse Time Pulse

*+----~~

-

f-

t

I I

of

events

at

grid

of

V135A,

the

conduction

action

that

V1

going

D1

32

of

V1

the

unblank

V1

93B,

caus

+gate

voltage

negative

of

the

cathodes,

had to

charge

Miller

appears

. This ampli-

output

side

at

continues

at

61

held

the

timing

through

-Ov.

Reset Level

_.,

Triggerable

Level

-,Triggering Level

to

output

grid

35A

and

35B

out

has

dis-

been

tube,

as

of

the

at

the

saw-

-

a

4-8

®!

resistor

is

therefore linearly. The resulting Vl73

is the Horizontal Amplifier. The determined

resistor TIME/CM switch, curately

tooth the form

lows through grid more positive stability circuit, Vl33B begins cathode-coupled conduct,

level input the tooth

c.

which voltage duct, diverting current from vibrator

as Vl93B to The positive-going nected fier, V524A nate-trace

bringing Vl52B into conduction . The Vl6l cathode form form . Vl52A output

the current been Rl8l. and reaches and

set

erator

recovery time lected with atic V1

a linear 150-volt

and

calibrated

An

attenuated

waveform

holdoff circuit. The

is

set

by

As

the

voltage

the

grid

Rl8l.

of

Vl338. When

and

is

coupled

to

the

cycle

of

waveform

Reset

The holdoff

is

slightly more positive

set

by

to

switch

negative-going

The

the

multivibrator switches

end

through

switching during retrace.

As

Vl45

cuts off, its

rises

rapidly

voltages

the

falling portion,

When

conducts,

voltage portion

The

hoi

doff

circuit

through

charging

The

voltage

hence

at

the

Vl33B cuts off. The

again

at

is

ready

The holdoff time

the

diagram)

35A

through

constant

by

the

RC

timing

capacitor

SW160

with

portion

is

also

the

SWP LENGTH control, Rl76.

rises

voltage,

The

cathode

than

the

to V133B, V125 cuts off

the

attenuated

through

sweep-gating

events

at

.

waveform

the

grid

back

the

+gate

voltage

the

appropriate

or

V534A,

and

on

the

cathodes

stopping

at

that

of

the

is

applied

the

tube

during

fall

its

cathode.

level

set

the

triggerable

to

repeat

at

of

the

runup circuit

TIME/CM switch (see

. The stability

cathode

and

voltage

sawtooth

rate

time

constant

combination

. The fast

variable

of

the positive-going

fed

back

amount

at

the

grid

causing

voltage

level.

by

each

the

voltage

the

grid

-50

volts

sawtooth

Vl33B

multivibrator. Figure 4-6

the

grid

of

rises until

of

Vl45.

Vl45

to

its original

step

is

coupled

pulse

and

at

the screen grid

to

the vertical plug-in unit for alter-

plate

rises

the

plate

Vl73

follow

or

retrace,

of

V1

the

voltage

sawtooth

to

the

. The holdoff

the

sweep,

is

thus

retarded

When

the

stability circuit,

voltage

level

the

cycle

sweep

voltage,

follower

Vl25

the timing

change

capacitors

of

holdoff

of

to

Vl35A

than

Vl35A

multi-

voltage

73

waveform

the grid

at

of

rate

by

capacitor

at

the

that

is

capable

of

rise

of

the

of

the

particular

selected

sweep

rates

.

to

the

attenuation

Vl83A,

is

Vl338

set

at

conduct

the

grid

it

reaches

the

and

state

at

the

blank

trace

to

about

voltage

the

of

reach

fall

grid

capacitor,

now

at

the

grid

and

the

is

the holdoff

the

Timing Switch schem-

applied

is

set

voltage

grid

of

the

capacitor

also

coupled

becomes

the

cathode

. Since

as

V133B

above

the stability

of

Vl35A

to

the

common

then begins

causing

.

cathode

through Vl93A

the

crt for

of

Vl45

switching ampli-

-3 at

drops

. The grid

plate

the

the sawtooth

of

sawtooth

about

and

clamping

coupled

of

V1

83A, reducing

discharges

the grid

voltage

V1

25 conducts

of

V1

Time-Base

set

for the

capacitor

to the

with

the

charges

cathodes

of

driving

sawtooth

timing

with

are

also ac-

saw-

Vl83A

the

wave-

cathode

to

charge

to

slightly

by

Vl25

starts to

at

relates

output

saw-

reset level,

cathode

to

con-

the

multi-

of

Vl35B

and

retrace

is

con-

volts

again

the

grid of

and

Vl6l

wave-

-3.5

volts,

back

which

had

through

of

V1

of

V1

35A

is

then

Gen-

waveform.

required

grid

STABILITY

the

fol-

the

to

the

to

33B 33B

se-

of

is

in

is

control, NORMAL, the minimum at quired incoming drive the grid vibrator

Multi-Trace Sync

to using a multi-trace vertical plug-in unit Channel

blanked

gating nected either and schematic network plate operation unit being used. plug-in unit modes. trace

applied

going going as a cathode

Rl

1 1, so

the

"triggerable"

to cut off

trigger

to

switch

Pulses from the

the

vertical plug-in units to switch

switching

during

waveform

The

multivibrotor

through the HORIZ.

or

both

V534A, shown on

diagram

at

the grid

voltages

of

When

sync pulse from the

to

the

pulse

Auto Baseline

.

,

The

auto

designed when no Generator Type 22A however, the circuit numbers not the of lowing description.

The circuit multivibrator, on V1 position to V1 1 SB Q1 voltage The grid

When

LINE Base reduced

grid

and

reverse bias the the transistor. The

to

trigger

. The

is

same

the

Type

and

off to control the stability

25.

When

except

the

grid of

cut off. Current from

04 into

saturation,

is then

STABILITY

of

V1

25

the SWEEP FUNCTION switch

and

no

Generator

to a level

of

Vl 1 SB

the

voltage

Circuit

of

are

V524A

is

in

plug-in unit, either

taken

follower.

baseline

produce

identical to

in

21

A Time-Base

is

V1

the

AUTO V1

control

at

trigger

. Thus

Description-

that

with

the

SWEEP FUNCTION switch set

voltage

level,

Vl35A

from the Time-Base Trigger circuit will then

below

and

sweep-gating

retrace

from

the

. The

of

supplied

In

general,

alternate

V524A

from the

from

pulses

operation

the

two

essentially a

lSA

SWEEP FUNCTION switch

1 SA causes

applied

about

circuit, the

at

the

base

voltage

about

and

the

switching level, causing the multi-

start

a cycle

is

accomplished while the crt

of

the

screen

of

either

DISPLAY

multi-trace switching amplifiers, V524A

the

Horizontal Display Switching

waveform

each

tube. Since both the

by

or

V534A

the

mode

{or

V534A)

sweep-gating

plate,

the

cathode

circuit

in

each

a free-running

are

being

of the

that

of

units. Refer

Generator

and

V11

SB,

BASELINE,

setting its collector

-50

pulses

about

V1 1 SB

-emitter junction

V1 1 SA

the

to

the

is

set

during

volts while

are

voltage

8 volts more

is

plate

of

at

the collector

stability circuit

conducting,

Type

555/21A/22A

at

the grid

2 volts

switch

of

multivibrators

sweep

grid

time-base

the

vertical plug-

depends

tube

and

is

as

of

applied

auto

the

many

to

cathode-coupled

which turns transistor

the positive

plate

calibration

being

on

V1

1 SA

of

V1

above

the

multivibrator.

the

sawtooth

between

.

switches to

is

is inoperative

conducting, the multi-

an or with the

trace

one

of

the schematic

voltage

to conduct

circuit of

channels

in

the

alternate

of

V1

45

in

unit

may

differentiated

on

the

conducting when the

multivibrator

amplified negative-

as

a small positive-

tube

the

time-base

on

the

to the Time-Base

baseline

circuit

Q1

applied the grid

is of

circuit

in

the Type

the

components

during

at

is

voltage

V1 1 SA

at

+ 1 00 volts. This

through

to

04

is

in

is

in

AUTO

to

negative

V1 1 SA

positive

Q1

04, cutting off

of

Q1

35A will

the

level re-

waveform.

are

applied

when

mode.

beam

the

sweep-

be

con-

the

grids of

by

cathode

in

unit, the

multi-trace

in

all

other

connected

units

crt screen

in

21

diagram

the

monostable

Q1

the

grid of

set

at

applied

and

keeps

biases

R1

place

saturation

BASE-

the

Time-

of

V1 1 SA

than

is

cut off,

enough

04

is

about

be

An

the

and

the

A;

are

fol

04

any

15. the

the

to

at

is

-

.

is

®!

4-9

Circuit

Description-

Type

555/21

A/22A

+ 80 volts with the transistor turned off,

more

negative

voltage

and

the lower limit of

drop

below

vibrator

a new free run (see Fig. 4-7).

. With the holdoff waveform

reset portion of

~

-1\

:

I

L-"

Fig.

4-7.

erator

set

AUTO

BASELINE

The

voltage

+ 12 volts

R49

and

SWEEP FUNCTION switch

BASELINE,

tend

to FUNCTION switch on

and

As

V11SA turns on,

the

plate

through

the

ing

returns immediately to

soon

as

the

grid

The return

Dl

08

is through positive than the grid of V11SA, the multivibrator reverts to its

previous off. The time constant of this signed for a reset time

When switched, the started

the

ing C10S stretches the pulse

is

held

tor pulse. The resulting positive of V12S raises the holdoff

to a triggerable

tion

base

the level

again

Time-Base

If

trigger 20 cycles base

of

than

when

Ql

04

at

the grid of V12S

the triggering level

sweep,

each

causing the Time-Base

the

cycle of the holdoff waveform triggers

is

proportionally more

holdoff

of

A / Holdoff

/j\

7

,/

,'r

,'

:

I

I /

L-'

~Sweep

Holdoff

waveform

for free-run

by

Q44

negative

hold

negative

of

11SA

C1

08

trigger

the

regenerative

of

V11SB

to

now reverse

Rl

07.

state,

the

trigger

to

charge

transistor to

in

of

Q1

drops to a free -r

Generator.

pulses

per

Ql

04

operation.

and

LEVEL

at

the

grid

current through

in

the Time-Base Trigger circuit.

trigger

V11SB

in

is

set

pulses

applied

the

is

and

coupled

drives

pulse, the

also

+ 12 volts

As

negative

saturation

04

second,

biased,

soon

with

pulse

-going

C1

OS

and

saturate.

condition.

ends, the transistor cuts off

are

received

the

is

held far

/

7

,/

,'

--_

is

at

grid

of

SWEEP

control is fully clockwise.

of

V11SB

Rl

07

is

in

any

pulses

cutoff.

to AUTO

resulting

about

action of the multivibrator

attempts

as

V11SB

of

at

applied

However

through

negative-going

back

V11SB

farther

voltage

+ 12 volts. Therefore,

is

was

for the

voltage

to return to

relatively slow, however, since

and

the grid

conducting

monostable

about

80 msec.

applied

voltage

also

forward

The momentary

the

base

voltage

from a free-running condi-

As

un

at a rate

enough

or

about

saturated.

waveform

the

sweep-gating

set

at

Generator

Reset Level

Triggering Level

Freerun

Sawtooth

triggered

V135A

with

FUNCTION switch is

is

normally

and

Dl 08,

position

through Dl 08 only

, when the SWEEP

BASELINE

D1

08 cut off

to the grid

into cutoff. Follow-

at

the

cathode

C1

08 has to

of

VllSB

multivibrator

and

the multivibrator

at

the

biased

of

Q104,

duration

condition, triggering the

level on Cl

of

applied

the stretched pulse on

faster than

negative

20 volts

The stability

negative,

is

allowed

multi-

this level, the

circuit to

Waveform

Level

Time Relation

Time-Base

set

at

about

and

through

When

except

AUTO

V11SB

is

turned

V11SB.

voltage

of

V11SB

of

has

ended,

that

voltage.

discharge

becomes

and

V11SA cut

is

plate

of

V11SA

Ql

04, caus-

charge

and

the

transis-

the

stretched

to the grid

and

the stability

to

and

keep

about

at

OS

Gen-

D1

more

the

de-

the the

to

at

08

as

on

transistor voltage waveform occurs TION switch

Lockout

the ing action and Type 22A to

description.

MAL

from V12S acts

age

SWEEP, the

supply circuit The

LOCKOUT

ducting,

the

pulses

sweep

to

15/N

PUSH

of

voltage

V133A to turn off. This

circuit. With V12S then controlling the

the

of

vibrator

is

stability level

ing the

With V133A

+ 100 volts, turning on the

that

sw

ing multivibrator

sweep

(

5/ N 7000-10999

PUSH

been charg

ground,

to

V12S

of

cutoff. With V12S then controlling the

drops

saturated.

is

held positive

is

exactly

at

held

at

the

same

NORMAL.

Thus,

the

at

this

and

the

triggerable

as

it

would

triggering

Multivibrator

The lockout multivibrator circuit

sweep

of

the

crt

beam

out

operation

permits

also

provides

as

the

Type

With

the SWEEP FUNCTION switch, SW128,

or

AUTO

the

positive supply;

is

allowed

merely

on

its grid

When

the

through

operates

voltage

the

"lockout"

cannot

is

then

drop.

11000-upl

To

produce

TO

RESET

R1

01

and

step

PUSH

TO

V13SA

is

to

then

released,

sweep-gating

the Time-Base

eep.

The next trigger pulse

waveform (see Fig. 4-8).

To

produce

TO

RESET

applying

the grid

to

turn on,

V12S,

applied

to

the

of

observation

for described 21

A schematic

BASELINE,

to

as a cathode

and

SWEEP FUNCTION switch

plate

of

R128. With

as a cathode-coupled

leve l

on

LEVEL

control,

minimum

level, far

switch

disabled

a single

button

R116

to at

the grid

RESET

held

too

be

triggere

the level

determined

cut

off,

Generator

swi

l

a single

switch,

ed

to

+ 100 volts

a fast

of

V133A. The pulse cuts off V133A,

and

through C123, forces V133A

stability level

under

the

Time-Base

of

a single

delayed

conduct.

the

V133A

the

voltage

the

sweep

ground

button

far positive for the

d.

multivibrator

its

tches it, starting a new cycle

sweep

the

operation

below

under

diagram

the

plate

therefore,

Under follower holdoff

is

connected

power

grid

of

V133A

R12S,

so

of

enough

until

is

action

by

SWl 01,

negative-going

the

positive

sweep-gating

the

cathode

of

the

pressed, connecting the junction

through

of

V12S turns

arms

is

held in, the

When

the

at

the

STABILITY

plate

voltage

READY

is

ready

that

of

the crt

is

thr

on

the

lower

with

is

certain

Generator

of

the

between

waveform

applied

that

crt

R98

the Lockout Multivibrator

PUSH

grid

in a triggerable

neon bulb which i

arrives

pressed.

ough

grid

rate,

the

limit

level. Triggering then

the

designed

conditions

sweep

of

the

Delayed

during

V133A

tube

these

conditions, V12S

the

is to

to

bistable

is

then

when

holdoff

that

incoming

multivibrator. The

voltage

beam,

. The positive-g

on

cath

ode,

voltage

sweep-gating

TO

of

V12S

adjustment,

attempts

to

produce

at

beam,

C1 02, which

R1 01,

pulse

voltage

cathode,

of

V12S, which puts

stability

of

the

holdoff

SWEEP FUNC-

to

hold

by

lock-

circuit. This

the

crt

beam,

sweep Sweep. the

is

on

set

the

both

V133A

waveform

the

V12S, causing

the

discharges through

in

Refer

following

set

at

NOR

disconnected

cut

off

and

stability volt-

its

cathode.

to SINGLE

+ 100 volt

tubes,

multivibrator.

set

with

is

con-

is

trigger

is

allowed

front-panel

oing

as

long

at

the grid

multi-

RESET

button

drops

to

plac

condition.

to

go

ndicate

a single

sweep-gat

of

front-panel

had

C123

allowing

at

the

plate

farther

the

into

voltage

the

off

-

at

as

-

to

s

-

to

4-10

®

the

sweep-gating

Vl33A

cut off, its

and

the

READY

Generator

Base

vibrator

(see Fig. 4-8).

switches it,

---,

-I--\

PUSH TO Trigger

RESET

is

pressed

4-8.

Fig.

switch

cathode Vl25 operation. plate age tooth out cuts then begins its out leve vol multivibrator ton

Single

set

at

When

the

of

cuts off

voltage

at

the

portion level, V133B off

V133A. The

l,

tage

at

is

pressed

multivibrator into a

plate

voltage

neon

bulb

is

ready

pulse

that

starting

,.-----

l

-+-7'/~---"--,.

L-'

//

Pulse

arrives

sweep

SINGLE

rising

Vl25

V133A turns on,

drops,

grid

of

V133A

the grid

is

once

holdoff

SWEEP.

portion

reaches

and

the

multivibrator resets for single

and

of

V135A

the

holdoff

takes

control

holdoff

retrace. When

begins

of V135A

thus

locked

more.

lights, i

to

arr

ives

a cycle

I I I

I

I I

,

I

waveform, with

of

the stability

the

cathode

at

waveform

to

at

out until the

Delayed Sweep

A

delayed Base Unit (Type lockout multivibrator sweep pulse, the

lockout circuit

The lockout multivibrator exactly the SWEEP FUNCTION switch BASELINE from

the

rather

When TRIGGERABLE is

conducting operation, the

sweep. Wh tain level, control, a

trigger

allows

21

A)

to

becomes and

in

the

same

and

PUSH

than

being

the

with the

set

delayed

amplifier

the

be

the

SINGLE SWEEP positions.

SWEEP FUNCTION switch, SW120,

ONCE

and

en

by the

delayed

used in one

in

triggerable

TO

connected

the

after

other

mode, the

as

soon

as a delayed

manner

as

RESET

switch

directly.

FOR

EACH

the multivibrator

cathode

the

Tim

e Base A

DELAYED

trigger

in

the

volt

pulse

triggerable

attempts

produce

______

the

READY

the lockout level.

of

the

conduct

that

circuit

:~ig

of

Type

receiving a

the

one

is

age

to

go

ndicating

a single

at

the

sweep-gating

of

the

sweep

Holdoff Reset Level

Lockout Level Triggerable Triggering Level

_

Sawtooth

'

SWEEP

holdoff

the

waveform

two

in

is

'A'

TRIGGER 1-10

waveform

voltage

neon turns off

of

V133A sets

rises

above common rises to the reset level,

reaches

again

level. The

PUSH

in

the Type 22A Time-

ger

from Time Base A

modes

22A.

In

sweep

trigger

Type

22A

in

the

Type

the

NORMAL, AUTO

However, the

applied

DLY'D

is

set

for single

on V133A locking

sweep

has

is

applied

state.

to + 1 00 volts

that

the

sweep

. The

waveform

Waveform

Level

Time Relation

FUNCTION

at

on its grid,

sweep as

the

As

the the

cathode

the

and

holds

sweep-gating

TO

RESET

to

operate

one

mode delayed is

through

trigger

triggered

arrives.

operates

21 A when

pulse

Vl14,

is

set

TRIG, V133A

sweep

run to a cer-

MULTIPLIER

to

the

With

Time-

multi-

the

voltsawlock-

and

lock-

the

but-

the the

by

in

to

out

grid

Circuit

of

V114

in

the

fied

by

V114

of

V133A. This pulse cuts off V133A,

the

cathode

will not

its Time-Base Trigger circuit (see Fig. 4-9).

Delayed

Trigger

Pulse From

Delay

Pickoff

Fig.

4-9

.

FUNCTION switch TRIG

.

After the holdoff minimum level

lockout level

until

another

condition

When ONCE switches the 22A to it

receives a conditions delayed is

set

at into a pulses

are V133A, cutting The

cathode

which

is gating gating Time-Base erative grid

of

control, setting the

turns

on,

sweep

continues,

the

sweep-gating

until

another Each time multivibrator wi trigger

from the Time-B nse T

and

voltage

sweep, however,

Trigger

Pulse

Trigger

Circuit

Delayed

sweep

waveform

of

after

delayed

of

the Time Base A multivi

again

the SWEEP FUNCTION switch

FOR

EACH

sweep-gating

produce

delayed

are

the mode, except about

--60

monostable configuration . Incoming

again

drops

now

set multivibrator. This multivibrotor,

Generator (see

aclion

of the lockout multivibrator

V133A return s to the l

raising the

delayed

another

Description-

Type

22A (Time Base B). The

applied

From

'B

'

sweep

set

at

has resets the lockout multivibrator

the

retrace

brator

.

'A'

one

same

volt

applied

that

tube

to

below

grid

then ret

mi.J~~:v

delayed

ll

trigg

as a negative

at

the

triggerable

until

it

receives a

1

I

!

I

,

___

holdoff

waveform

TRIGGERABLE

been

triggered

holdoff

. The next

trigger

in

DLY'D

TRIG, the lockout multivibrator

multivibrator,

cycle

of

its

trigger

in

this

that

the

s.

This sets the lockout multivibrator

by way of V114 to

off a nd

the

voltage set

the

triggering

voltage step

immediat

cathode back

tri

er

ely starti ng

Fig

. 4-1

eve

at

the lockout level

ra ce occurs

ibrator

gge

r is recei

t;igger

the

;.wP.er;.

rigger ci

,'

,,

___

..

Sawtooth

ONCE

waveform

sweep

pulse

is

generator

the

Type

output

pulse from Time Base

mode

voltage

allowing

0).

As

l set

by

to the lockout level. The

and

is

held

ved

pulse arrives, the lockout

, wi

rcuit.

Type

555/21A/22A

pulse

is

ampli-

pulse

to

allowing

level. The Type 22A

trigger

Holdoff Reset Level Holdoff Triggerable

Triggering Level

the

V125 to set

pulse from

Waveform

Level

,,

Time Relation

with Type

FOR

and

is

received

22A into a trigger-

sawtooth

as

on the grid

by

level of the

triggers

soon

the LOCKOUT

at

from Time Bose

thout

22A

'A'

to

rise, the

and

set

then

held

during

to

SWEEPS

the

as

soon

triggerable

of

the

grid

of

sweep

the

sweep-

the

ended,

SWEEP

DLY'D

at

Type

A.

V125

trigger

V125,

of rege

LEVEL

V133A

for a

EACH

starts

again

is

circuit, setting the

is

set

causing

in

the

delayed

V125 to conduct.

the

grid

the

sweep as

has

as

before.

the input grid the lockout level

waiting

grid

the the

off

the

as

All

of

-

the

n-

the

of

A.

4-11

Circuit Description

-Type

555/21

A/22A

Delayed Trigger from Delay Pickoff

Fig.

4-10.

Delayed

sweep

FUNCTION

switch set

at

holdoff

SWEEPS

DELAY PICKOFF

The

Delay entiated produced available

and

is

in

fier modes. Refer to the block Delay Pickoff schematic discussion.

Before the input

V568A, V564 V585A cutoff with the

Pickoff circuit

pulse

at a predetermined

by

Time Base A (Type

at

also

the front-

applied

panel

internally to the

Time Base B (Type 22A) for use

sawtooth

and

are

cut off. V568B

output

V585B

voltage

I

I ,

I

·--4~-'

waveform

ONCE

generates

21

DELAYED

diagram,

diagram

waveform

ore

conducting

is

conducting,

held

Reset level

lockout level Triggering level

Sweeps Once

,,

Holdoff Waveform

Sawtooth

with

FOR

EACH

Type 22A

Time

Relation

'A' DlY'D

level

a positive-going differtime during A).

The pulse

TRIG

delayed

in

Fig

OUT

trigger ampli-

the

delayed

. 4-11,

each

is

always

connector

and

during the following

has

near

started

and

but

ground

is

biased

its rise,

V554

level.

SWEEP

TRIG.

sweep

sweep to

the

and

near

placement time

of

comparison.

the

Time Base A crt

beam

Constant Current Tube

V568A

is

a constant-current

at

voltage about

fier. The V568A high resistance

5

ma

to

flow

ence

amplifier

With

current

divider,

-50

in

the

through

share

held

the

constant the difference amplifier, compared, be waveform

uniform

the

output

over

applied

the

at

the input grid.

entire

source

R565

volts. This

cathode

the

tube.

for

and

stable

force a

The

current from V568A.

through

regardless

signal

of

range

of

the

difference amplifier will

of

Delayed Trigger Multivibrator

The

delayed duces a gate rate

of

rise

When voltage to conduct. V585B cuts off its

second

plate

of

to the grid

As

the retruce portion difference amplifier the

delayed

the

quiescent

the

plate

of

the

of

the

bistable

V585B

of

trigger

output

the

input

voltage

delayed

is

the

trigger

state.

V585B

multivibrotor, V585A

that

has a fast

sawtooth.

at

the

plate

of

trigger

multivibrator, V585A

as

state.

applied

delayed

is

switched

the

The resulting positive

through

trigger

of

the input waveform occurs,

back

multivibrator

When

it

is

applied

switches,

to

V564

multivibrator switches

a differentiating network

output

is

the

on

the

screen

at

the

difference ampli-

R566,

set

the

grid

constant

two

tubes

the

conducting

the

voltage

the

rise

independent

reaches

voltage

150-volt

and

grid

and

current

of

the

differ-

tube

levels

being

sawtooth

V585B, pro-

of

the

cathode

the

begins

step

at

the

tube,

V568B.

the

to

its original

also

switched

the

negative

state

back

step

and

differentiating network.

of

to

to at

Difference Amplifier

A

sawtooth

input

of

V564.

level

of

termined

As

trol. age,

the

then

applied

Quiescently, the common amplifier comparison

LAYED through stant-current the level to control the tube

on. V564 causes its tooth continues positive, the ing level

Because form from Time Base of

the proportional GER

1-10

brated

waveform

the

Delay

This

circuit

the input

by

the input

is a comparator sawtooth

the

DELAYED

sawtooth

comparator

to

the

is

set

by

voltage

TRIGGER 1-10

V554

and

tube. When

of

the

comparison

voltage

As

V554 turns on, the

plate

of

the

bistable

the

input

Time Base A

to the

MULTIPLIER

so

that

its

readings

from Time Base A

Pickoff difference amplifier, V554

produces

delayed

the

voltage

is

adjusted

MULTIPLIER

V564

is

the input

on the common

voltage

delayed

sawtooth

A,

the time interval

sweep

voltage

control. This control

that

waveform

TRIGGER 1-

level

exceeds

an

output

trigger

cathode

voltage

on the grid

by

held

constant

sawtooth

voltage,

decreased

to

start

plate

quickly

trigger

waveform

and

the

applied

from the

correspond

is

applied

to

the

and

compares

against a voltage

10

the

MULTIPLIER

comparison

waveform

voltage

deconvolt-

that

multivibrotor.

of

the difference

of

R573, the

V564. This

DE-

means

control. Total current

by

V568A, the con-

voltage

reaches

the grid of V554 begins

cathodes

, turning this

current through

positive.

reaches

As

the

the saw-

switch-

multivibrotor.

is

the

linear

wave-

the

start

comparison

TRIG-

cali-

instant

between

of

DELAYED

is

accurately

to the horizontal dis-

Delayed Trigger C F

The positive-

from

the tube, 5-volt pulse impedance

is

pulse front Trigger circuit

negative driven into cutoff the

tooth delay and will meters

is

the description

multivibrator

V568B,

is

coupled

panel,

When

output

The time

and

time

the 1-10

have

indicated

The Horizontal Amplifier circuits for the

Lower Beam

going

causes

appearing

at

the

to

and

of

Time Base

the

delayed

pulse

is

waveform

delay

the

occurrence

determined

MULTIPLIER

moved

portion

the

cathode

the

through

applied

and

between

across the crt screen

by the

of

the

applied

tube

across

of

DELAYED

to

the grid

to

conduct

R598

the

TRIG

tube

differentiated

is

the oscilloscope to

B.

trigger

the

consists

by

multivibrator resets

to

the

grid

output

the

of

the

remains

of

only positive spikes.

start

of

the

delayed

Time Base A

control. The Time Base A

MULTIPLIER

dial.

HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIERS

ore

applies

essentially identical. The following

to both circuits,

but

of

cathode

more heavily. The

thus

obtained

. This

delayed

OUT

connector

the

Time-Base

of

V568B, the

at

ground

the

Time Base A

trigger

pulse

TIME

/ CM switch

the

number

Upper

Beam

the

circuit reference

waveform

follower

at

low

trigger

on

the

and

the

tube

. Thus

saw

is

the

sweep

of

centi-

and

is

-

4-12

®!

I

-j_JIJ_

~

;:,----

1

!

LV

ll!l

I I :

SAWTOOTH

FROM

TIME

BASE

A

DIFFERENCE

AMPLIFIER

V554

CONSTANT

CURRENT

V568A

\__,_

___

TUBE

--.!

DELAYED

T~~~~R

V585A

L--_..!.V:!;58"'5<-0B,_____.

Fig.

4-11.

Delay Pickoff block

l

Il

diagram

Circuit

,r-------,

I

.

Description-

DELAYED

TRIGGER

CF

V568B

/

~-

Type

~

555/21A/22A

!DELAYED

~

TO

TIME

GENERATOR

TRIG. OUTl

BASE

B

CIRCUIT

numbers refer to the Upper block diagram of the Upper

The

input signal DISPLAY tooth; Amplifier for that beam. through an input cathode follower

follower to a cathode-coupled

This deflection plates through a pair of output cathode followers.

Input

through a frequency compensated voltage divider to the grid circuit of the input tube, tion of the divider The cuit provide horizontal positioning of the display by setting the de level of the input signal. ated "backlash" coupling that operates both the coarse adjustment, Fine operating alone coupling.

Driver

positions

from

driver cathode follower of the circuit. When the switch the time-base signals lower through a compensated attenuator by CAL

switch from one of three sources:

Time

amplifier provides a push-pull output to the horizontal

Circuit

The

input horizontal deflection voltage signal

two front-panel

by the same front-panel knob

R333,

adjustment of the horizontal position

and

When the

or

the input cathode follower

a factor of

control,

is

Base B sawtooth, or the External Horizontal

is

HORIZ. POS

and

the fine adjustment,

in

a 60° arc permitted

Output

HORIZ.

in

one of the

5.

The

R351

.

Beam

amplifier.

Beam

Horizontal Amplifier.

selected with the appropriate

The

input waveform

and

paraphase

V343A

. Frequency compensa-

adjusted with C330 during calibration.

IT:ON

The

two controls

and

Fig

. 4-12

Time

Base

is

a driver cathode

output amplifier.

is

controls

are coupled by a

R336,

is

in

are

simultaneously.

provided by

by

the · backlash

is

HORIZ.

A saw-

applied

the cir-

oper-

R336

Stages

DISPLAY

are

attenuation

switch

1s

EXT

. A

in

the left-hand deflection portion

is

applied to the driver cathode

1n either of the X.2

TTEN

positions, the signal

is

applied directly to the

in

one of the

is

adjusted with the

and

Xl

are

attenuated

positions,

fol-

SWP

a

Gain of the Horizontal Amplifier fixed feedback from the output of the amplifier through and

C355 the setting of the MAG GAIN control, is

sweep rates.

The

adjusted with the SWP

feedback loop to provide the same output signal whether the Xl display a magnified display.

The output cathode followers, the necessary low-impedance output to drive the capacitance of the horizontal deflect

C364

Capacitance

V398

through the left-hand ca thode follower, and

provide additional curre output waveform can remain linear while charging the capacitance of the circuit. by applying a positive-going flat-topped pulse to the grid

of

entiating the positive-going sawtooth portion of the circuit. portional to the slope of the sawtooth rate. A current boost rent increase occurs during retrace when linearity critical.

External

The

Horizontal Display Switchin g diagram consists of a cathod

to the input of the driver cathode follower,

adjusted to maintain proper gain of the circuit

de level

or the

will

and

at

the grid of the driver cathode follower

MAG

X.2

position.

not shift when switching

C384, are

HORIZ. DISPLAY

This

insures that the center of the

ion

adjusted for linearity of the fast rates.

plates. "Bootstrap" capacitors

Driver

in

the cathode circ

V398

during the sweep.

Horizontal

External Horizontal Amplifi

uit

nt

boost at fast sweep rates, so the

The

Th

e amplitude of the pulse

is

not p·ovided for

Amplifier

is

determined

R372.

REGIS

control,

average

from

an unmagnified to

V364B

and

of

V364B

controls the current

additional current

pulse

is

obtained by differ-

from

and

thus to the sweep

V384B

e;

circuit shown

by

the

R355

Capacitor

de level of the

switch

V384B,

and

C372

at

fast

R35B,

in

the

is

in

the

provide

is

designed

is

provided

the right-hand

since

is

pro-

its

cur-

not so

on

by

is

to

the

e-

@!

4-13

Circuit

FROM

GENERATOR

FROM

GENERATOR

EXT

[

Description-Type

I I

~

I I I I

TYPE

BASE

. HORIZ.i

INPUT

22A

21

I

A

--l

TIME-BASE

TIME-

555/21A/22A

;-------~

I I I I I I I I I I

I I

l

HORIZ.

! INPUT 0 CAL. i

I

..

--0

~

EXTERNAL

HORIZONTAL t--'VlOJ..'Ar

AMPLIFIER

V314A

V314B v

I A

Fig.

DISPLAY

CF

V343A

I HORIZ. I

POSITION

,J

I ·I

EXT

4-12.

~ -

-------

0

SWP

l

(IV-<>ot-1

Xl

- 0

X.2

~

I

1

o--~

_.._,..

T I

. HORIZ. GAIN

Upper Beam Horizontal Amplifier block

SWP.

0

MAG. REGIS

DRIVER

AMPLIFIER

V343B V39B

V364A

V3B4AI------i

AND

MAG

GAIN

.

diagram

.

I I

1A

OUTPUT

STAGE

V364B

V384B

UPPER

HORIZONTAL

DEFLECTION

f-------'

~

BEAM

PLATES

I I

coupled

amplifier, V314A

and

V314B, providing horizontal deflection factors from 0.2 to 20 volts/em. Input signals applied the input EXT attenuator amount tube, V314B,

GAIN control, current through V314B DC With R315 has HORIZ. GAIN control wi trace

through the HORIZ.

cathode

. A

TTEN

of signal

BAL

control, R326, to match the current through V314A.

R326

with no signal

no de

follower, V314A.

X1

0, the signal passes through a

where

it

is

coupled

is

adjusted

R315,

which has a 1 0-to-1

properly

adjusted, there

applied.

component

DISPLAY

attenuated

to the

with the

switch to the grid

When

the switch

by

a factor

cathode

rear

of the amplifier

-panel range

is

adjusted

of

ll

with the

If

the external

its

own, adjustment of

EXT

is

no

de

not move the position of the

horizontally.

The amplified external horizontal signal may

DISPLAY

switch

to

drive the Horizontal

compensated

of

1 0. The

EXT

. HORIZ.

. Quiescent

HORIZ

current flow m

sweep

the

be

connected

Amplifier circuit.

CRT

CIRCUIT

The

cathode-ray vertical deflection tion plates, circuit consists of similar control circuits for the and

the Lower Beam, plus a common high-

eration

circuit transformer. crt requires Appro

an

ximately 1350 volts of this

tive supply circuits

by the post

acceleration

High-Voltage

The

negative

of

an

sists

oscillator, a step-up transformer, a rectifier, a volt-

plates

operated

Fig

. 4-13

accelerating

and

Negative

voltage

tube

in

the Type 555 has two sets of

and

independently of

two sets of horizontal deflec-

each

voltage

from the Lower Beam high -

is

a block

diagram

potential of

is

supplied by the c

about

the remaining 8650 volts is

circuit.

Supplies

supply circuit fo r

other. The crt

Upper

post accel-

voltage

of the circuit. The

10,000 volts.

rt

provided

each

beam

are

is

AMP

signal

EXT

Beam

nega-

con-

age

of

regulator description refers but

appl

ies

as

and

well

to

an

the

to

intensification circuit. The following

Upper

Beam

the Lower Beam .

at

The which by

the primary winding inductance of tance thus the by

changing voltage regulator

.

Transformer required to

produce

is

filtered by C844

and

to a high-resistance FOCUS control, R856, the

HV

high

voltage

control for with the - 150 volts

of

the rectifi stance, grid

of

high-voltage operates

in

the circuit. Amplitude

amplitude

is

controlled by the

circuit.

voltage, and

the - 1350 volts. The

ADJ control

is

fed

amplitude

ed

would

V814A

oscillator

at

a frequency

of the rectified

the

voltage

T801

steps up

and

is

test point

back

to

at

voltage

decrease

to

become

is

a mod ified Hartley circuit

of

on

the

screen grid

HV

ADJ control, through the

the

V862 provides half-wave rectification

negative

R844

, then

applied

voltage

and

the

HV

properly

is

ADJ control,

adjusted,

- 1350 volts. A portion

the oscillator through the

regulation.

the

to

By

cathode

become

current through V814B, causing the

more positive. This increase current through V814A, lowering the screen on

VBOO, and

tude

to bring

thus would the

rectifier

decrease

output

the oscillator

back

Post Acceleration Supply

A half-

wave

voltage

output

fies the former to provi

from

de

+ 8650 volts. Regulation of this

the transformer by regulation

doubler

one

circuit, V932

secondary

of

the crt post-deflection

voltage

of

the oscillator

negative

about

TB01

supply circuit,

60

kc,

determined

and

the

capaci

the oscillator signal,

de

voltage,

of

is

adjusted

VBOO

oscillator signal

de

high

voltage

the

crt

cathode

includes the

divider

to

that

R852. When

the

voltage

of

HV

comparing

of

V814B,

more

this

any

negative

in

turn would

voltage

tendency

, for in-

voltage

output

to

the

and

the high-

anode

is

provided

correct

ampli-

value

V942, recti-

voltage trans

potential

through

output.

and

. This

to

the

at

the

this

ADJ

.

-

of

4-14

®i

Circuit Description--Type

555/21

A/22A

SWEEP

UNBI.ANKING

FROM

TIME

SWEEP

UNBI.ANKING

FROM

TIME

BRIGHTENING

~FROM

I

0 :

I

0 I

I

TYPE

!swEEP

I

2_2A_.::..I

__

t=iJNcnoNl

BASE

A

BASE

B

T~BASE

UNBLANKING

___,

LOWER BEAM

OSCILLATOR

B

MIXER

V513

V900

~

I I

\

UPPER

'i HORIZ DISPLAy I

0

LOWER

,'1

HORIZ DISPLAY I

0

f'

LOWER

BEAM

INTENSITY

CONTROL

V922

POST

ACCELERATOR

and

LOWER BEAM

HV

SUPPLIES

V932

V942

V962

~

BEAM

'INTENSITY I

FROM

LOWER

HORIZ.

and

VERT

AMP

I INTENSITY I

~

UPPER

BEAM

INTENSITY

CRT

V859

.

CONTROL

V822

UPPER

HV

SUPPLY

V862

BEAM

UPPER

BEAM

OSCILLATOR

vaoo

LOW~

:EAM

REGULATOR

V914A

V914B

FROM

BEAM____

LOWER

VERTICAL

PLUG-IN

GEOM:~

HV

ADJ?

ADJ 1

~

<>-o,..........--1

1+---+---<.~ . ~ f ~

LOWER

"-----1

~>ASTIG·~·

~~

I

CRT

CATHODE I

I

LOWER BEAM

CHOPPED

- BLANKING V534B

0 :

:

,lhhlohldddddddddthhh

Fig. 4-13. Block

diagram

of

Crt

Circuit

and intensification

~R863

1----~~~~

u~~

~-;>

-l-

l

<UPPER

~?

I

CRT

CATHODE I

I

: 0

I

)>HV

ADJ

>-.,_,..........-+---l

W

ASTIG

~~FOCUS

UPPER

CHOPPED

BLANKING

V524B PLUG-IN

cirnits

.

BEAM

u~:EAM

REGULATOR

V814A

V814B

FROM

UPPER

!+---

BEAM

VERTICAL

4-15

Circuit

Description-

Type

555/21

A/22A

Unblanking and Intensification

V822 rectifies the high

winding of

beam

crt adjusts the the crt,

range

-1400 decreased,

blonking signal from circuit cuit, modifying the

INTENSITY

the phosphor

tion of the signal one

from Time Bose B

unblonking mixer

ploy Switching schematic

then

DISPLAY

Time-Base unblonking signal, the positive brightening signal

intensifies the

of

the Time Bose B

T801

to

intensity. The front-panel

negative

and

thus the

of

the

INTENSITY

volts

to

-1320

the

beam

is

applied

is

added

of the

is

coupled

switch. Since the

through

control

of

the crt screen

sweep

to

delayed

tube,

to

beam

sweep

voltage

provide a bios supply for controlling the

voltage

magnitude

control varies the grid from

volts.

intensity

the

appropriate

R827,

voltage

is

set

so the electron

unblonking

the

intensity control circuit when using

sweep

+gate

V513, shown

diagram.

either or both

beam

driven by Time Bose A for the

.

from

another

INTENSITY

applied

on the crt grid. Normally the

except

modes. The signal

circuit

to

the control grid of

of

the

beam

As

the

is

negative

increased. The

Time-Bose

C827

and

beam

during the positive por-

waveform. An

to

the

on

the Horizontal Dis-

The brightening signal

beams

is

through the HORIZ.

already

secondary

control, R828,

current. The

about

voltage

sweep

un-

Generator

C828

in

this cir-

does

not light

intensifying

is

cathode

unblonked by the

applied

follower

duration

Deflection Control Circuits

The FOCUS control,

ing

anode

to

The

UPPER astigmatism with respect control, it

emerges

ploy linearity . voltage adjustment

adjust

ASTIG control,

anode

to

R861,

controls the field

from the deflection system to control vertical dis-

applied

of

the crt deflection sensitivity.

R856,

varies the

the

focus of the

to

the horizontal focus. The GEOM ADJ 2

R863

to

the

R863,

vary

the vertical focus of the

(SHIELD

VOLTAGE

isolation shield,

voltage

beam

adjusts the

that

the

on

at

the crt screen.

voltage

beam

encounters

ADJ)

and

controls the

provides limited

the

focus-

on the

beam

as

Blanking and Modulation

Ac-coupled blanking signals

switch SW848

CRT

panel ing amplifier tube, V524B, shown on the Horizontal Display Switching schematic intensity-modulated as

time markers, or

ploy.

Negative-going

going pulses

ore

nals to eliminate random modulation of the

To

ovoid displaying the vertical using a multi-trace vertical plug-in the

beam

unit. The

oscilloscope through pin 16 of the vertical interconnecting socket,

amplifier tube, V524B, shown on the Horizontal Display Switching Beam). The signal through the shown on the Crt Circuit schematic

to

the crt

CATHODE connector

diagram

to

pulses intensify the

tend

applied,

is

and

to blank the

the

blanked

chopped

applied

diagram

CRT

CATHODE switch

CRT

by a signal blanking pulses

to the grid

(V534B

is

amplified

cathode

display delete

may

be

circuit either from

or

. The waveform

additional

unwonted

beam.

CATHODE connector

generated

of

is

the amplifier for

and

applied

from the

un

diagram

chopped

information, such

portions

beam

When

no external sig-

beam

.

chopping

it

in

chopped

in

ore

connected

the

chopped

inverted, then

to

the crt

.

through

the

blank-

may

thus

of

the dis-

and

positive-

is

grounded

signal when

the multi-

mode,

to

blanking

the

lower

applied

cathode

trace

rear

be

the

as

Beam Rotation

A

trace-alignment

end

of

the entire display. The diagram). the coil to

is

in display aligned control.

is

align

When

the

direction of the

alignment. If

General

The lowvoltages except voltage

output

supply

rms filament supply.

larly. A sensing circuit voltage between an regulator error a block

from a for the the - 150-volt de volt supply. The outputs not

- 150-volt

-

Power Transformers

and full-wove former outputs for use provides Power Supply Unit.

operates with a saturable ac

ings

tion , or schematic to from 117-volt wil! remain

105 to 125 volts (or 210 to 250 volts) line frequency.

for the high

+ 100, + 225, + 350

of

. A

All

of the

error signal which

and

Reference

gas

other

regulated

separately

Power for the

T602

Transformer· T750

filament current for most of

The primaries of

that

the

saturable

tube

is

parallel

adjusted

the traces with the the instrument

by a slight readjustment of the

coil surrounds the crt

to provide a few

plane

of

the coil,

to the face of

with

the

BEAM

graticule

is

moved

to

earth's

magnetic

this occurs, the display

degrees

the

ROTATION control,

a new location, a

LOW-VOLTAGE POWER

voltage

for the Type 555 Oscilloscope

supplies

+ 330 volts,

separate

against

the

tubes, causing the return

diagram

-filled

output

in

bridge

unregulated

may

in

series for 234-volt

diagram

in

power

supplies

voltages

produce

and

circuit provides a

de

power-supply

a fixed reference

output

voltage

is

the

output

of

the

-150

voltage

de

the Power Supply Unit of the Type 555. Four

for the

voltage-regulator

regulated

output

. Thus, the

power

supplies

adjustable

is

adjusted

de

supplies

rectifiers

in

ac

in

the Indicator Unit of the oscilloscop e

each

be

connected

of the Decoupling Network. Connections

reactor

to

234-volt

regulat

ion

in

the crt circuit. The low

regulated

+ 500 volts, on

a 6.3-volt

regulator

compares a sample

and

amplified

to the

power

of

all the

. They

.

is

ore the filament current for tubes

reactor,

of

the transformers

must also

operation. All over the line

voltage

the reference then produces

and

regulators

proper

-volt

regulator

-150-volt tube

supplies

operation

depends

regulated

ore

provided

employed

de

supplies.

L790,

the

tubes

in

parallel for 117-volt

operation,

near

of rotation

L973

(on the Crt Circuit

crt.

De

current through

lines.

field

may

BEAM

SUPPLIES

produce

de

unregulated

on

all

be

all

and

its

plug-in units,

voltages

unregulated

regulated

circuits

operate

of the

. Any difference

applied

. Reference

by transformers

to provide

changed

rms, at

tc the series

to correct for the

value.

circuit.

supply

are

obtained

of all the positive

that

of

de supplies

changed

to rectify the trans-

In

addition,

in

the instrument.

have

as

indicated on the

regulat

voltage

50 to 60 cps

the

screen

of

the

R973,

change

affect the

can

be

re-

ROTATION

operating

of

- 150,

oc filament

6.3-volt

Fig

is

the

to convert

ed supp lies

range

de

oc

simi-

output

. 4-14

obtained

voltages

from

-150 are

when the

T601

T602

in

the

regulated

two wind-

opera-

from

is

-

4-16

®I

Circuit

Description-

Type

555/21A/22A

DC

VOL

TAG

FROM

RECTIFIE

E

R

RIPPLE ERROR

SIGNAL

CORRECTION

-vv

>

-150-Volt

Reference

by a

gas

which

has

about

tial of V624. The from a divider consisting ADJ

control, appears voltage the

output

If

the

or

load grid of signal

at

be

will series

tube,

the de

voltage

in

voltage on its grid will correct for the put

and

the

ac

~ponse

of

A small the screen age

at

tu

be

to

Supply

voltage

diode

a constant

-87

voltage

R616,

at

the

across the divider. This control

voltage

output

fluctuations , the

the

difference amplifier, V624, producing

the

output

amplified by V634, then

V647. Since the

across this

keep this

gain

of

the circuit to

amount

of

the

plate

cancel ripple on the - 150-volt

for the - 150-volt supply

voltage-reference

voltage

volts

for

determines the

second

is

voltage

of the tube. Any

level of the

voltage

the

regulator

of

V634 through

of V634

drop,

at

one

the

other

of

R615, R616

grid of V624

exactly

begins to

change will

voltage

bridge

tube

caused

constant.

sudden

ripple from the rectifier

R637

is

applied

grid of difference amplifier

grid

percentage

-150 change

applied

rectifier,

change

to increase the

changes

. The amplified ripple volt-

+ 1 00-Volt Supply

Reference for the + 1 00-volt supply

su

pply. The volts volt output error signal to the grid of the series

voltage

and

the - 150 volts. Any

produce

is

amplified

div1der

small

and

regulator

R650-R651

voltage

changes

inverted

SIGNAL

REGULATOR

ERROR

AMPLIFIER

V634

VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE

REFERENCE

Fig.

4-14. Regulation

is

furnished

tube,

establishes a fixed poten-

at

tube,

V609. This

of

V624

and

R617

of

and

thus sets the total

is

adjusted

volts.

due

to line-voltage

appear

error

across V647 establishes

by

(618

to

changes the grid of V664. The by

at

signal

to the grids of the

0642,

the

correction signal

in

the - 150-volt out-

and

C628 improve

speed

in

output

is

the

series

output

lead

is

the - 150-volt

compares

at

V664, then

V677,

where

tube,

is

obtained . The - 150 voltage

any

that

so

that

the

second

an

error

that

exists

change

of

voltage.

applied

regulator

.

the + 1 00

the + 1

applied

it

cor-

re-

DO-

I

SERIES

V647

V609

circuit

to

D C

and

SMALL

SIGNAL

RIPPLE

ERROR

I

-

of

rects the

creases

mize ripple

A small portion

rectifier circuit

R667. that the ripple

+ 225-Volt Supply

The

rectified by

supplying the + 1 00-volt

for the supply

ing on the at potential on the signal nal grid

voltage

brings the value.

The by the crt oscillator circuit cuit. two circui

+ 350-Volt Supply

The by

the regulator volt

AMPLIFIER

V624A

V6248

J

~

-150-volt

is

one

is

of

diodes

+ 1 00-volt supply to furnish

supply

supply.

output

voltage

the

ac

gain

at

the

regulated

of

is

This produces a ripple

in

phase

at

voltage

+ 225

is

the -150-volt supply. Any

grid of V684. This

at

the

amplified

the series

change

unregulated

It

is

ts

voltage

. Reference for the + 350

connected

with the ripple

the

cathode

from terminals 11, 12-13

diodes

D702A

-v

olt

regulator

+ 225

-v

olt

othe

second

and

regulator

at

output

voltage

output

unnecessary to

have

their own regulators.

from terminals

D732A

and B and

. Any

change

-:!:-

~

<

>

on the

cathode.

of the circuit for fast response to mini-

output

.

the

ripp le on the supply lead from the

to the screen of V664 through

component

at

its

and

hence on the + 1 00-volt

and B and

regulator

output

voltage

r grid

of

plate

of the

inverted by V694, then

the grids of the series

at

of

and

regulate

on the

circuit,

. Reference for the + 225-volt

lead

produces

the

tube, prod

tube

tubes, V707

the

cathode

about

the

regulated

this voltage, since these

11

and

added

to

power

-v

output

-

-150 ADJ

REGULA

-150

OUTPU

Capacitor

at

the grid

pla

te, tend ing to cancel

and

add

ed

voltage

is

compared

(pin 1 ). The

and

back

+ 330 volts

14 of T

the

voltage

for the + 350-volt

olt supply

is

applied

of

14

of

to the

to

furnish power

change

a small

to ground

ucing

error

coupled

V737 A. The

regulator

to the correct

is

used only

ac

supply cir-

601

is

supplying

is

the -150-

to

TED

v

T

C650 in-

V677 A

output

T601

voltage

appear

change

on

error

sig-

to the

thus

rectified

the grid

.

is

-

®I

4-17

Circuit

of

regulator the

Description-

V724 through the divider, R710-R711.

circuit

Type

is

essentially the

555/21A/22A

same

+ 100-volt supply.

Operation

as

that

described

+ 500-Volt Supply

Voltage from terminals 20

the

full-wave

to the

+ 500

circuit

+ 500 volt

voltage essentially the

bridge

regulated

-v

olt output. Reference for the + 500

is

the

output

divider

rectifier, D762A,

+ 350-volt output to supply the

-150-volt is

applied

R7

40-

same

as

Time Delay

The time-delay relay,

relay

K601

to

delay

the to the oscilloscope tubes for allows the potentials

tube

are

cathodes

applied.

Heater Supplies

Two

ac

heater

supplies provide ments. The 6.3-volt and

11 for Transformer T750 provides for all the Power Supply Unit.

variation causes the

voltage

and

the

filaments

other

The regulator circuit for T750, shown on the Decoupling Network schematic Unit

and transformer ulating the transformer. Any variation put from T750 tween terminals to the

depending

voltage current through V799 will increase slightly, causing the voltage

negative-going V794, decreasing current through this tube winding connected able ing increases the creasing the amplitude of the primary to the correct value. During calibration, the control,

6.3 volts

connected through the interconnecting

heater

on the direction of the

change

To illustrate

is

slightly

to

reactor, l790. A

of

T750. Thus the transformer output

R799,

rms

unregulated

from terminals 12

of

several tubes

tube filaments, including those

diagram,

in

the Indicator Unit. The circuit

voltage

go

.

applied

appears

11

and

of

the special

diode

in

the

operation

above

in

a negative direction . A portion of the

voltage

between

reactance

is

adjusted

AMPLITUDE

The Amplitude calibrated front-panel square

wave

square-w

CAL.

is

about 1 kc

Calibrator

ave

OUT connector. The frequency

and

21

of

T601

is

B, C and

supply. Any

to the grid

R7

41.

Operation

that

of the + 1 00

K600, operates

application of power supply

to warm up before

power

to the primary winding of the

in

across the

12 of the transformer

diode

to conduct more

plate

of

the

change

terminals 5

decrease

of

so the

output

and

voltage

about

45 seconds. This

power

ac

voltage

and

13

in

the

at a regulated

is

located

the

amplitude

secondary

tube, V799. The

change, and

circuit

of

the circuit, assume proper

value

is

applied

in

current through the wind-

l790

to the line voltage, de-

oc

voltage

output

CALl

BRA

circuit provides on

available in

the duty factor

-v change

of

V754 through the

of the

-v

olt supply.

in

conjunction with

for the

from terminals 10

of

T602 provide

Power Supply Unit.

of

in

the Power Supply

operat

of

and

or

V799.

of

to the grid of

and

and 6 of

applied is

REG

voltage

TOR

18 steps

rectified

D,

and

regulated

olt

regulator

voltages

operating

tube

6.3 volts

some tubes

cable

es by reg-

the

ac

winding be-

is

applied

amplitude

less current,

produces a

the

6.3 volts. The

through the

the

brought back

HTR

is

ampl

is

about

of

the

for

by

added

on

the

is

delay

fila-

power

in

to the

out-

output

plate

satur

to the

ADJ

exactly

itude-

at

the

of

the

0.5.

......-------,

CALIBRATOR

MULTI

vaa~A

V87S

1 1

Jl_f

: :

Fig. 4-1 S.

vibrator, V885A V885B, of and

multivibrator switches the

tween conduction

wave

is

panel

the multivibrator section of

the

plate

the grid

cathode

age

ADJ) tion with the the

+ 100 volts.

R897 Square-wave .2 millivolts the divider with the R899, ground,

osci~loscope

Amplitude

The circuit consists

and

the output

to the Amplitude

at

the

selected from the

AMPLITUDE

The screen grid of V875 acts

the multivibrator action

cathode

voltage

of

to rest

When

V875

at

its

and

RBBO

output

The

output

, divides

a 0.25-ohm resistor

is

-.

CAL

W

~

ADJ

~

' '

.

~/-41~:---f

..------,

CALIBRATOR

..__v_ara_s_a_

1

h

~

I I

Calibrator

of

and

a precision

tube

cathode

current

at

V885B, cutting

at

is

plate

. The plate

CAL

voltage

down

amplitudes

to 100 volts

provided

chassis.

V875,

voltage

. Refer to

and

of

V885B.

voltage

CALIBRATOR

goes

about

-35

zero

volts.

cut off by the multivibrator

is

set by the

ADJ

at

divider,

the + 100 volts

AMPLITUDE

to minimize stray pickup through the

~-..__-o.-Jlt..o-lc_AL_

~

block

an

astable

an

the

Calibrator

cathode

cutoff, producing a 1 00-volt

divider by means of the front-

of

the circuit. During that

to

the

volts. This

the

voltage

control so

the

cathode

R885

at

the

in

1, 2, 5

between

OUTPUT

C.F

.

.....

'IAM-PL-IT_u_o_E

diagram.

plate-coupled

output

divider

The desired

switch.

as

V875

pentode

tube off

voltage

CAL.

sequence, are

CALIBRATOR

cathode

in

the

block

diagram,

Schematic

follower

output

the

plate

is

conducting,

plate

voltage

and

divider,

is

adjusted

that

when V875 of

V885B

through R893,

at

the

cathode

OUT connector, from

the

output

-c:-:-A-:-:u=BRA::-:-:T-=o::"IRI

.

~-:<ou'

T.I

1

;/

multi-

follower,

cathode

diagram

alternately

of

the

action

during calibra-

switch, SW870 .

circuit

Fig

. 4-15,

. The

be-

square

amplitude

a triode

half cycle

and

is

applied

allowing

, the volt-

R879

is

selected from

divider

part

sets the

is

cut off, exactly

R896

of

V885B.

in

of

to its

(CAL

and

4-18

SECTION 5

MAINTENANCE

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

The Type 555 Oscilloscope system

and

as amount should

the Type 555 in

of

such requires

of

core. The instrument should

be

serviced

the following subsections, accurate

is

and

reasonable

and

recolibroted

given the minimum

dependable

it should provide you with years

service.

is

a precision instrument

treatment

at

amo

and

be

kept

regular intervals.

unt of core suggested

clean

a certain

and

Periodic Inspection and Recalibration

The lengt h erably on the nature and

recolibrotion after or more frequently adverse corrosive atmosphere . occasionally,

once every six months. Servicing suggestions

this section of the manual; the calibration procedure in

the Calibration section. Procedures for calibrating the vertical plug accompanying the units.

Whenever

v

is

ual check should Certain types tion.

look

alignment,

nections, improperly minal strips be completely corrected by obvious means, except in

the damage to prevent further the overheating also ate

the instrument.

We tron tubes tube

or

istics,

any

or

exchanged transistors they should they will

number

Removal

The side and bottom panels

Oscilloscope may

nal circuitry. The panels

head screwdriver turns counterclockwise to free the

For bottom panels on the units to keep out dust and to provide adequate place, all

of

on the

conditions such

case

is

strongly advise

transistor has its own individual

is

fasteners that

normal operation,

time between servicing will

amount

it

-i

n units

the instrument

of

for such obvious defects

damaged

and

of the

the result

or

transistors during periodic servicing. Since

circuit

ore

be

returned

marked on the chassis next

of

or

circulation of

the ventilating air must

of

should

trouble con

scorched ports. Most of these troubles con

will hove to be recol ibr

to

~ogged

use the instrument receives,

its environment.

each

if

the instrument

as

a high temperature

Even

be

serviced

ore

given

be

mode

connectors, loose

seated

heat-damaged

of

other less

damage, it

be

corrected before attempting to

agains

that

has

one

be

removed temporarily during servicing,

with their circuit numbers to

to

their original sockets. Each circuit

We

500-hour period

is

usually

if

the instrument

and

in

the

is

repaired

of

the controls

be

detected

as

tubes

t routine replacement

of

or

transistors, broken ter-

ports.

apparent

is

essential that the

these components

to

Panels

of

is

advisab

held

each

in

each

pan

le to le

1=:;s

place

be

easily removed for access to the inter-

ore

can

a small coin. Turn

be released with a

it

of

air from the fan. With the panels

depend

recommend servicing

operated

recolibroted

ins

truction manuals

or

recolibroted, a

by a visual inspec-

control knobs out

b~oken

Quite

trouble.

operating

oted. If

the socket.

unit

of

by small screw-

fastener

el.

ave

s through the filters.

consid-

and

also

of

operation,

under

or

a dusty

is

used only

at

ore

and

the Type 555

least

given

is

given

circuitry.

solder con-

perhaps

often

heat

In

order

cause

oper

of

eleceach

character-

replaced tubes

be

sure

brood-blad

about

two

the side

and

or

in

of

or

in

Cleaning the Exterior

Kelite

of

If

dry point brush or

soft lint-free cloth or

also

not been

A soft cloth

or

the Type 555. Abrasive clea nser s should not be used. A

around

Do

not chemical denatured age

The plastic f

detergent

be

dampened

Wisk con

is

the front-panel controls.

clean

solvents

alcohol.

the

plastics.

acep

The faceplate

cleaned with alcohols

dena

tured.

with

be

used to remo ve dirt from the exte rior

useful for dislodging dust

CAUTION

any

plastic

such

These

late of the crt may be cleaned wi

dampened

water

and

a sma

materials

as

benzene, ace solvents

in a water

and

other plastic mate rials may

(e.

g. isopropanol) tha t have

solution of soa p

Cleaning the Interior

Although the dust may moved during periodic servicing a

heavy

be

disturbed by the cleaning,

be

cleaned before recalibrotion.

Probably the best ment

is compressed air. Avoid the use which might

be removed with a ton-tipped for cleaning

-

air

penetrate

accumulation. Since some internal adjustments migh t

to blow off the dust with a low-velocity stream of

applicator dampened

entering the oscilloscope

into the interior.

way

to

damage

in

small components. Persistent dirt con

damp

cloth

narrow spaces

This

of the instrument to prevent

it

is

suggested that the interior

clean

of

or

a small point brush. A col-

with alcohol con be used

and

for cleaning ceramic strips.

dust should

the interior

a high-velocity air stream

Cleaning the Air Filter

The two units

air

drown through

aluminum wool.

it

might restrict the flow of heat; therefore the two filters should weeks

and

air

filters should servicing, be

dusty. High temperatures ventilating air con cause a tubes

and

If

the temperature

relay

in

temperature has dr

e

and

restore power to the instrument.) Any time either ther -

mal relay cuts out, check the air filter for excessive dirt or

other restr

Th

e following procedure

1. Flush loose dirt fro m the filter with o stream of hot water

of

the Type 555

washable

If

a filter should become excessively dirty,

cleaned

and

other components.

the unit will turn off the oscilloscope. (After the

ic

tion of

.

when they

be

done

more frequently

in

either unit reaches 133"F, o thermal

opped,

air

.

Osc

filters mode

air

at

general decrease

the relay

is

illoscope

of

and

cause the unit to over-

be

appear

least

if

the surrounding

caused

suggested for cleaning filters:

checked ·every few

dirty. Cleaning of the

as

often as the periodic

by the restriction of

will

automatically reset

ll

amount of

that

moy be on

with

orga

nic

tone

might

is

filtered, some

of

ore

adhesive-coated

in

or

dam

-

th

be

the instru-

cooled by

air

lends to

the life of

a

re-

5-1

Maintenance-

2. Place the filter in a hot-water solution detergent. Let the

filter

adhesive coating.

3.

Rinse thoroughly in the air.

4.

Coat sive, Products plier

. To prevent the adhesive from

instrument, let the filter

putting

Fan

Motor

The

fan motor bushings in the 555 should be lubricated during strument the bushings may overheating

in each over-lubricate the other parts scope.

faces

(at least once every six months). Failure

or

Two

of

Oil

will

Type

555/21A/22A

it

soak

for

in the solution to wash

the

filter

in clear hot water, then

the

filter

available

it

with Filter Coat

from the local representative

Corporation,

back into the unit.

a few minutes, then

or

from an

dry

for

Lubrication

Indicator

periodic

impair

the

operation

of

the unit

three drops

the luorication holes shown in Fig.

of

the

on the outside

tend to accumulate dust.

or

cause the

of

light

machine oil should be

bushings-any motor

and

will

of

the motor

motor

excess oil

leak out into the oscillo-

of

mild

soap

out

the

or

Handi-Koater

air

-conditioning supdraining

several hours before

Unit

servicing

of

the fan and cause

to become noisy.

or

other exposed sur-

dirt

allow

of

to

5-1. Do

will

agitate

and

it to

adhe-

Research

into

the Type

of

the in-

lubricate

placed

flow

or

old

dry

the

not

into

the

Operating with the applied,

getting

Then, tions are correct instrument still does not trouble calibration before

calibration

plete of

this manual; troubleshooting procedures

are given later in this section.

Ordering

If

you have determined through

shooting checks

replacement,

ordering

Replacements

combination can

current net prices.

also be

certain critical electrical parts are selected be ordered ment parts are not Before the Parts characteristics.

When

Office,

1.

The Parts

The

2. 22A);

3. The Serial

Some parts ponents since the production the new

Instructions

operation

check the

to

the vertical

if

all

in

the circuitry

. Check the

attempting

of

the part.

obtained

order

List

ordering a

be sure

complete description

Lists

type

part

of

the instrument.

input

front

-panel control settings

for

the desired

or

to

troubleshoot the · instrument. A com-

procedure

Replacement Parts

that

an electrical

use

the

following

for

all parts used in the Type 555/21

be

purchased

Many

from local electronics suppliers ; however,

or

manufactured

only

from Tektronix since satisfactory replace-

ordinarily

ing

or

purchasing

in

this manual

part

to

include the

;

of

instrument (Type 555, Type

Number

may

have been superseded

may be shipped instead

if

you

are

cabling

calibration

through

of

to

.

mode

operate

some

part

is

given in the

or

paragraphs

directly

of

the electrical components can

and

by

or

available

any

to

your

following

of

the

your

instrument.

of

your

not

completely

If

a signal

make sure the signal

and

of

operation,

properly,

of

the system

of

any

suspected circuit

Calibration

and

operational

mechanical

through Tektronix

most mechanical parts

for

Tektronix

from

parts, be sure to consult

determine the required

local Tektronix Field

information

part

as

by

instrument.

of

the

part

familiar

is

being

input

connec-

but the

either there

is

out

section

suggestions

or

trouble

part

requires

as

a guide

A/22A

and

should

other

sources.

:

given in the

21A

or

improved

In

such

cases,

ordered.

Type

com-

is

of

-

for

at

Fig. S-1 . Top left lubrication

The

fan motor bushings in the Power Supply Unit

tory

sealed and

the instrument.

The

Type 555 Oscilloscope operates with the Type and Type 22A Timeto

produce the crt

the system, first check the settings

that

sure

view

points.

of

will

not require lubrication for the life

CORRECTIVE

Base

display. If

some control

fan

in

Indicator

MAINTENANCE

Units

and

the vertical plug -in units

apparent

is

not

of

disabling

Unit

all

5-2

showing

trouble develops in

controls

the system. Review

fan-motor

are

fac-

21

to

make

of

Replacement Procedures

In

general the replacement

Oscilloscope

forward. Just placement part. The

supplementary

special care hints to keep in mind while on the instrument.

and

remove the defective

during

Soldering Considerations

In

the production

is

A

ing solder nal strips. This too

much heat lead permissible.

used to establish a

solder. However, occasional

For

its

plug-in

information

or

following

replacement,

of

bond

may be broken

by

the repeat

general

Tektronix instruments, a silver-bear-

repair

of

most parts in the Type 555

units

is

simple

part

and

subsections contain some

about

certain parts

as

well

performing

bond

ed

work

as

corrective maintenance

with

the ceramic termi-

by

the

use

of

ordinary 40-60 tin-

use

of

ordinar

on Tektronix instruments,

and

straight-

install the re-

that

require

some practical

applicati

on

of

y solder is

®

solder

containing bearing tors, Tektronix Field 251-514.

strips,

soldering iron when

shaped solder in the terminals quired. It

watt the soldering iron in the terminal notch, break the ceramic strip.

1.

solder

or

may

Because

To solder

Use the soldering

of

it

is

tip

iron

is

needle-nosed pliers

about

3%

is

available

be purchased in 1

Office.

the shape

advisable

permits the

is

important

adequate.

or

unsolder

point

Order

of

to

use

removing

application

and

to

Do

any

and

silver should be used. Silver-

locally

from electronics distribu -

pound

by

Tektronix

the terminal notches ·in-the ceramic

a wedge-shaped

or

installing parts . A wedge-

reduces the

avoid

not

small

to

the component;

of

excessive

use

force

or

act

as

a heat shunt between

rolls through

part

heat

directly

amount

heating-a

or

twist the

as

this

may

short-lead component:

tip

of

your

number

on

your

to the

heat

tip

chip

re-

50-

of

or

Maintenance-

Type

555/21A/22A

Ceramic Strip Replacement

To replace a

all

connections, then

out

strip, the studs verse side ceramic strip of

each stud. The remainder

out

after

If

the

may

be spacers, strip assembly . Replacement strips are supplied ing

studs

studs.

damaged

of

the chassis.

by

tapping

of

the chassis. Still

is

to

the strip has been removed.

nylon

spacers

left

in the chassis

if

not

damaged,

attached,

ceramic terminal strip, first unsolder

pry

the mounting studs,

If

prying

on the ends

use

diagonal

do

so

it

is

another

cutters

of

the studs can then be pulled

not come

or

pulled

can be used

not

necessary to salvage the

is

not

protruding

out

attached

satisfactory, remove

way

and

cut

with

out

separately. The

with

the

the studs, they

to the

from the re-

to

remove a

off

one side

new

ceramic

with

mount-

old

Use a moderately

2.

3.

Manipulate small components;

4.

Use

only

enough solder to make a

Due

to within the instrument, the locations the Type 555 tion in the exact positions occupied

of dropped cal shorting.

the presence

of

After

the soldered leads.

and

the system.

soldering

into the instrument

your

its

any

hot

tools

of

plug-in

Be

sure

connection,

iron

for

with

care

normal

stray fields

units

are

to

install replacement components

by

Be

sure

where

a short

of

the

clip that

they

period

to

avoid

good

bond.

and

some components

important

original

off

the excess length

these ends

could

of

time;

damage

capacitance

to

the

opera-

parts.

are

cause electri-

not

to

in

Fig.

5-3.

The

assembled

When

the moved, place the spacers chassis bly

into apply seat to the terminal strip apply mounting studs. Fig. 5-3 shows the assembled terminal strip.

off

Cut beyond wires in place soldering considerations given above).

damaged

and

press the mounting studs

the spacers. It

some pressure to the ceramic strip to make the studs

all

the

way

force

only

the excess length

the ends

ceramic

strip.

strip

and

into

may

be necessary to

down

into

use a soft-tipped

to the parts

of

the spacers. Resolder

as

they were previously

the spacers. To

of

the mounting studs extending

stud assembly have been re-

the mounting holes

of

the

new

avoid

tool

for

the strip

directly

all

components

arranged

in

strip assem-

tap

lightly

damage

tapping,

above

(note the

the

and

the

and

or

Fig.

5-2. Soldering

Fig. 5-2 illustrates a

place

while

of

wooden

as

a wedge.

When

soldering to a

flow

solder nal. The spring tension

stroyed

replaced .

by

aid

for

soldering. It ccn be

dowel

or

thermoset plastic,

around

and

excess solder

®

use

with

bare

handy

tool

wafer

-type

beyond

the rivet on the switch termi-

of

the switch contacl

and

the switch

wires

.

for

holding

made

from a short length

with

one end s

switch,

will

bare

wires

do

not

may

need to be

haped

let the

be de-

Power Transformer Replacement

If

a complete check

the

power

c!osest Tektronix Field

in

a Tektronix Field Engineer a

warranty

ranty note in the

Be

transformer.

former being removed , it with transformer a complete be required.

transformers requires replacement,

replacement

sure to

the terminal numbers.

use

As

of

Office.

front

of

only

the correct

the leads

recalibration

the instrument shows

It

may

verify

of

the transformer

this manual).

are

may

be

After

be necessary to have

the transformer failure

replac

unsoldered from the trans-

the

ement for a

advisable

replac

ement

of

the oscilloscope wit!

that

notif

(see

the War-

to tag the

of a power

one

y the

for

power

lead

5-3

of

s

Maintenance-

Type

555/21A/22A

Replacement

Only a normal amount of a defective switch. should

be new switch rotary switch

placed. Sections Some switches may out the Ports list for the

associated

of

Rotary Switches

of

core

is

required for the removal

When

labeled

as

will

be

connected properly. If

is

defective, the entire switch should

ore

be

a switch

they

ore

detached

not normally

ordered

from Tektronix with

components wired

appropriate

port numbers.

is

removed the

to assure

one

replaced

in

place

leads

that

be

the

of

re-

section

separately

or

with-

. Check the

Crt Replacement

To

remove the

and

panels connect the socket from from the deflection ful

not

to voltage the top

bend

anode

of Remove the groticule cover, the

"eyebrow" spring. Loosen the clomp fully push the tube forward until

cathode-roy

the time-bose units from

the

plate

tube, first remove the side

the

Indicator Unit.

bose of the crt,

pins

at

the neck of the crt.

and

the

the neck pins. (Do not disconnect the high-

connector

the crt shield

light

or

the beam-rotation coil

near

the front

the

pipe

scratch shield (or light filter),

and

the light-pipe hold-down

at

the neck of the crt

it

con

of

be

the instrument).

removed from

lead

Be

leads

and

Dis-

clips

care

core-

the front of the instrument.*

Insert the new crt with the highpointing directly upward so inside the crt shield. Temporarily

and

groticule cover, then screw down the knurled retaining nuts. Position the crt so the groticule lines the sides of the oscilloscope

voltage

it

will touch the brush contact

replace

and

crt

anode

the scratch shield

ore

parallel to

faceplate

is

contact

touching

the scratch shield. Tighten the neck clomp.

is

After the crt

and

neck clips. The colorindicates the

securely

order connected. Remove the graticule cover install the

"eyebrow"

the scratch shield

After replacement

brate

the crt circuit

the instrument. Adjust the

in

place, connect the

code

in

which the neck-pin leads

information on the crt shield

and

its

hold-

down

spring, then

and

graticule cover.

of

the crt,

and

it

will

be

necessary

check the calibration of the rest

BEAM

ROTATION control before

bose

socket

are

to

be

scratch shield,

replace

to

cali-

beginning the calibration procedure.

Recalibration

After the replacement of

be

necessary to check the calibration

If

other circuits

diagrams, their calibration should

After

Repair

ore

closely related,

any

electrical component,

of

the circuit involved.

as

seen on the schematic

also

be

checked. Since the

it

will

low-voltage supplies affect all circuits, the entire instrument will

need voltage been

replaced

recalibrotion

supplies

.

or

if

one

if

work has

of

the

been

done

power

transformers hns

in

the

low-

TROUBLESHOOTING

This portion of the Maintenance section contains information intended to troubles that may occur

•for

an

SIN's

7000-8999), described, except etc.

When

brush

contact

the

face

of

aid

in

locating

in

instrument with on

the

procedure

for

the

the is

touching

references

crt

shield

installing a new

inside

the

crt

and

correcting

any

the system. Suggestions

external

crt

the

graticule

is

essentially

Ia

the "eyebrow" light

af

this

external

type,

the

touches

the

position

crt

anode

graticule

crt

same

.

apparent

are

given

(instrument

as

pipe,

it

so

contact,

that

the

and

at

of

for isolating the trouble ponent tion

its

a

significant instrument which incorporates two completely

.

vertical of and that tion

checking

of

the trouble is known.

The Type 555

design

that

of

and

the

low-

voltage

the

vertical input circuits

con

be

and be be

troubleshooting.

switched

operated

Osc

will simplify

these features

horizontal deflection systems (with the exception

quickly

by

front-

by

either time-bose

The system con usually

of

trouble to a particular circuit.

tion

-

ting properly, it

to

a particular circuit,

and

circuit tracing

illoscope incorporates several features

the

is

and

crt circuits). The time-base circuits

con

replaced

panel

be

or

In

addition

controls so

be

used

used for

defective circuit.

Several

scope

ore

essentially

the circuits

in

the Indicator Unit

independent

of

These circuits ore:

1.

Amplitude

2.

Upper

Calibrator

Beam External Horizontal Amplifier

3. Lower Beam External Horizontal Amplifier

4. Delay Pickoff

5.

Unblonking Mixer Upper

Beam

6.

7. Lower Beam B.

Beam-Rotation Circuit

If

the oscilloscope

mode

a

is

example, cept

GERABLE

assumed

Pickoff layed

utilizing

probably

SWEEPS

located

if

the system

ONCE

that

the trouble

or

Unblonking Mixer

Trigger Amplifier

Chopped

one

FOR

Blanking Amplifier

operates

of

these

independent

in

the particular circuit involved. For

operates

FOR

EACH

is

associated

in

or

Lockout Multivibrotor

22A. (See the Block Diagram

Schematic Diagram section for ous circuits.)

Familiarity with the normal

of

great

be

gained

actual

through the use

use

of

particular circuit

assistance

in

the instrument. After isolating

by

operational

operation

locating trouble. This familiarity con

of

this manual,

find it helpful to refer to the Circuit Description matic

diagrams

while checking

Troubleshooting Procedure

In

general,

troubleshooting

1. Isolate the trouble to a poriculor unit then to a particular circuit.

2. Check

3. Check the calibration

sible) according to the

tion section.

the following steps will provide

the

procedure

tubes

for this instrument:

and

transistors in the suspected circuit.

of

the

procedure

and

after

the

general

isolation

of

trouble. The most

the built-in versatility

independent

ore

mounted

extended

in

plug-in units

to

facilitate isola-

, the time-bose units con

that

either

generator.

to

check itself for the isola-

If

one

detailed

except

beam

checking

of

the

of

the

when set for

the

from the rest

normally

circuits, the trouble

properly

'A'

DL

Dl

Y'D

in

all modes ex-

Y'D

TRIG

TRIG,

it

with either the Delay

the Indicator Unit,

or

in

at

the

beginning

interrelation

of

of the instrument

as

well

as

the

trouble to a

checks, you will

out

the circuit

in

on

of

the system,

circuits (as much

given

in

the Calibra-

for com-

loca-

of

beam

is

opera-

of

oscillo-

system.

or

TRIG-

con

the De-

the

Type

of

the vari-

through

probably

and

sche-

detail.

efficient

as

pos-

in

the

con

a

be

the

is

5-4

4.

Troubleshoot the circuit

or

transistor,

5. Repair Sometimes the

the symptoms noticed. operational circuit. The isolation

trouble the

made

or trouble outlined

indicate troubles example, if

may

ever, voltage clear trouble.

operation

here

group

not

Do

appear

these

up

when

is

above

or

could not

and

readjust

source

present

At

other

times

checks

to

procedure included

the

source

of

the instrument. However, no

to

trace

the

other

be

the

or

located

can

as

malfunction to a

than

of

components. When

known, the circuit

.

overlook

the timing

to

problems

crt circuits. Further

any

doubts

the defective circuit.

of a trouble

at

it isolate

possibility

sensitivity

also

to

Circuit Isolation

If

trouble to isolate the source quickly panel improper

calibration

First check the settings

are

correct

each

toms. The normal

help

locate

Check

If

the

be

located

trouble

the or

the high utilized rectly to

Check for the POINT locations in

the

be

checked

voltages

Do H V ADJ of trol will strument. Adjustment will associated

If

the

in

mind

calibration

controls.

setting

for the

control

the

appears

of

to

Many

of

some

desired

see

or

source

in

apparent one portion

what

abnormal

of

Voltage Supplies

nature

of

the

be

caused

and

by

the

proper

correct

and

at

procedure

the

-150 unless

Any

adjustment

complete

that

is

found to

trouble

and

by

operating

may

voltage

in

common

present

calibration

for ripple

.

not

adjust

controls

tolerance.

necessitate

require

trouble

that

replacement

of

the instrument .

with

the

or

trouble.

the front-panel controls individually,

crt circuit. These circuits, which

both

voltages

the

CAUTION

recalibration

of

control.

if

the trouble

be

corrected

the time the difficulty

will

be

necessary to perform some

the

is

not immediately

the

can

be

checked

that

those

that

are

in

one

of

result from

operational

the

true location

operation

through

troubles

more controls,

of

the

of

all controls to

mode

of

effect,

by

. The low-

regulation

one recalibration

of

operation. Next

if

any,

operation

is

such

either

the

beams, display

at

low-voltage

ADJ

control

the

voltage

of

the

be

in

one

any

parts

was

by

will

be

trouble

instrument.

must

on

the -150

to a

here

apparent

part

icular

general

the

of

the

voltage

location

by

some symptoms

are

most

incorrect, t

plug-in units. How-

trouble

checks wi

of

the

system, operation are

caused

or

make

it

has on

of

the controls

that

its source

low-voltage supplies

be

operating

the

crt screen.

the

two - 1350

test points

supplies

as

well

or

either

is

actually

of

the

H V ADJ

of

the

of

these circuits,

will necessitate re-

not a

recalibration.

obvious from

is

the

obvious

the

by impr

as

ADJ

entire

controls

tube

was

first

particular

for

locating

from

attempt

component

of

procedure

may

. For

he

trouble

in

the

low-

ll

usu

ally

source

attempt

of

front-

by

the

oper

sure

they

operate

the

symp-

may

cannot

are

cor-

TEST

indicated

should

for

output

of

the

out

con

-

in-

beam

keep

the

of

Maintenance-

If

the lowoutput rect

loading

If

the

voltage

high-voltage proper

gram.

is

Check Horizontal

If

the check the ditions.

With

as

indicated

HORIZ. FOCUS INTENSITY

TIME

SWEEP FUNCTION

VERNIER

LEVEL

SLOPE

COUPLING Time Base A SOURCE Time Base B SOURCE

Deflection Factor

Input Coupling

Using

tempt HORIZ. POSITION

ly

turn

display a trace

spot

back to the counterclockwise position).

With the controls

f

ree

running positioning neons to light trace cator

vertically.

voltage

voltages, the condition

due

low-voltage at

each

operation.

supplies

to

failure

supplies

-1350

oscillators (V800-V814

Refer to

and

voltage

no input signal

/ CM

the

to

the

appears

is

appro

neons should

supplies

operation

:

DISPLAY

Time Base A

beam

center

the

INTENSITY

or

on

at a rate

xim

ately

of

Upper

Lower Beam

Vertical

-position indicator neons two

and

spot

the

screen, turn

set

that

centered

be

Type

555/21A/22A

are

out

of regulation with high

may

be

the

result

of

incor-

of

other

are

TEST

POINT

the

Vertical

appear

the system

applied,

Beam

and

Time Base B

circuits

operating

Crt Circuit

to

under

set

TIME Centered Counterclockwise

50

AUTO Centered Clockwise

in

the

system.

correctly

is

correct, check

and

V900-V914) for

schemat

and

ic

dia

Systems

be

operating

the following con-

the front-panel controls

BASE A X1

BASE B X1

mSEC

BASELINE

correctly,

+

AC

UPPER

BEAM

LOWER

Input

Units

1 AC

beams

on Vertical Position controls . Cautiouscontrol

of

normal intensity.

as

indicated, both

causes

and

unlit

the

of

each

the

go

out

. Both vertical-position indi-

when

BEAM

v/cm

(cal.)

as a guide, at-

crt screen with the

beam

clockwise to

(If

no

INTENSITY

beams

two horizontal

alternately

the

trace

should

when

is

centered

control

beam

the

the the

-

or

be

-

5-5

Maint

enance-

Type

555/21A/22A

If the

cf

B

both the at

probe

an of which direction the wh

traces can

..•

L the crt circuit

~;;(..m

crt circuit supplies

beams.

high-voltage portions of

ing

volta

ges

and

oscilloscope input.

If

either

of

unbalanced

that beam

et

her the trouble

If neither

that

there

is crt circuit. b

oth cuit fail ure.) Since oscillator hove the crt circu

If

of

the horizonta l though the beam-position indicator neons may the a mplifiers

(It

vertical systems

it

no tro uble

be

centered

voltages

Do not

the

. The

beam

trouble

is

in

to

connect a standard

on the crt far

traces

cannot

condition

beam-indicator

beam

is

in

is operating normally, the indication

in

one

improbable

would

the

already

detail.

is

been

found

and

vertical amplifiers

be

balanced

but

have

in

detail.

the

post-accelerating potential for

the

crt circuit, since the

exceed

be

in

the horizontal

supply

in

centered,

the horizontal

is

neons will usually

off the screen,

of

the vol t

that

both horizontal systems

fail

without a power

voltages and

checked, pr

the crt circuit, check the

.

incorrect intensity,

Note

the

or

age

oceed

as

probe

capability

there

or

and

vertical circuitry .

supplies

given

Check Time-Base Plug-Ins

If

the

erator

is beam direction,

base

Indicator Unit.

of

beam-indicator

is

not running

probably

is

indicated

the

plug-in unit

Check

the

both HORIZ.

in

the time-base plug-in unit. However,

trouble

time-base plug-

(beam

to

be

or

the

D!SPLA

neons show

lights not alternating), the

off

the

may

be

horizontal deflection system

in

Y switches

that

the time-

screen horizontally

caused

units

by either

by

reversing the settings

or

by

substituting

that

the Lower

to

any

of

acceler-

of

the

is

probably

vertical system

indicate

thus will tell

or

in

the

or

crt cirhigh-voltage to check

below, even

have

balance

shown

base

trouble

in

the

out

gen

if

the

either

time-

in

the

other

time-bose

and

compatibility

If tion stitution), not, check for below

22

the

of

units for

ore

substituted for the Types

trouble

the

HORIZ.

the

.

Check Vertical Plug-Ins

If

the

is

-

vertically, is

plug-in unit

cator

units

ments

in

the unit. the However, other the the

beam

unbalanced

To check

operating If

the

or

Unit.

the

in

the

Upper

or

substitute

condition.

interchanging

opposite

If

this

procedure

oscilloscope. Check for the

following

is

if

the

plug-in unit,

Check Unbalance

If

the balance ance Use a shorting

isolation checks

in

the

by

shorting

those

presently

note

in

the

Operating

was

switched

DISPLAY

time-bose unit

unbalance

indicators show

indication

. This

to

vertical plug-in units, either

beam,

the

given

trouble

paragraphs

Indicator Unit,

across

strop

in

is

that

could

be

the

vertical amplifier

Beam

and

other

vertical plug-in units known to

the

plug-in

the

source

case,

check

in

the

was

the

unbalance

.

indicate

between

such

as

being

to

the

switches (or

was

causing

the

Indicator Unit

the

beam

the

vertical deflection system

due

to

Lower Beam plug-in comport-

units switched the

of

trouble

the

plug-in unit

manual

not

affected

is

unbalance

vertical

locate

the

one

accompanying

in

the source

used.

(If

21 A and

Instructions section.)

se~

other

eliminated

to

either

the

or

by

the

or

two

sides

illustrated

Types

22A,

see

t,

').

b

beam

by

opera

the

be

crt

interchange

is

Indicator Unit

as

by

difficulty.

as

described

off the screen

vertical input

in

the

trouble

in

the

plug-in

according

the unit.

substituting on-

described

horizontal un-

of

the unbal-

of

the circuit.

in

Fig

. S-4 .

21

the

-

sub-

If

Indi-

the

be

to

of

in

5-6

!Wrap

with

insulating

~Insulating

•

~Am,m.,,,.,~

Fig.

5-4

. Shorting

strap

for

checking

sleeve

vertical

lapel

...............

or

horizontal

unbalance.

Maintenance-

Type

555/21A/22A

Begin the

izontal circuit by shorting

unbalance

check

between

of

the

particular

the

two

vertical

leads

or

hor-

connected to the deflection-plate neck pins on the crt. (When checking the horizontal to

center

balance,

the spot.)

adjust

the Vertical Position control

CAUTION

While TENSITY increase

If the crt

screen

defective

connecting

control the

beam

when

the intensity

or

the beam-control circuits

the

turned

intensity

did

shorting

fully

to

normal.

not

produce a spot

was

increased, either the crt

strap,

have

the IN-

counterclockwise,

or

trace

are

not functioning

then

on

the

properly.

If the

spot

or

trace

appeared

INTENSITY

ing fier. Short the amplifier.

does

condition

control set for normal brightness

back

toward

the input of the vertical

two

input grids

When

you

reach

not

appear

is

as

the

the short

stage

immediately following the short.

in

Visually inspect the components

the

Check necessary

tubes by substitution. Replace defective

and

recalibrate

on the crt screen,

together

the point

is

connected,

in

the circuit.

and

or

at

begin work-

horizontal ampli-

each

stage

where a spot

the

unbalanced

the

unbalanced

If

the

trouble

leave

of

or

stage

tubes

is

in

the

trace

the

distributed amplifier section replacement

tubes should

of

the vertical amplifier, the

be a balanced

pair

Circuit Troubleshooting

When

the

trouble

perform a

complete the circuitry the oscilloscope be

extended

can

through 5-7 for the locations of the various circuits. (For troubleshooting the vertical input plug-in units, refer to the instruction manuals of the

is

If

a visual check

the trouble, check the tubes

below,

and

check the calibration possible under the circumstances. Most circuit failures caused mal use

by electron

and sulting from careless careful when checking inside the instrument with meter or

probe

voltages

struction of semiconductors

.

if

ductor,

tips. Careless shorting of

of transients

If the trouble

and

the source

has

been

visual check

side

and

be

removed,

isolated

bottom

to a particular

of

the circuit. For checking

panels

of both units of the

and

the time-

with the extensions provided. See Figs. 5-5

aging.

was

particular

of

the circuit fails

tube

or semiconductor failure Another operationai

to

the components

and

not found

of

trouble

instruments.)

to

detect

and

transistors

of

the circuit

cause

is

component

or servicing procedures.

leads

can

and

other

small components.

to

be a tube

was

not

located

.

base

as

apply

cause

units can

the

cause

described

as

much

due

failure re-

abnormal

the de-

or

semicon-

by a coli-

circuit,

of

as

are

to nor-

Be

leads

Fig.

S-5. left

side

view

of

Indicator

Unit

with

Time-Base

Units

extended

.

5-7

Maintenance-

Type

555/21

A/22A

Fig.

5-6

. Right

side

view

brotion check of the circuit, use a test oscilloscope high-impedance voltmeter to check the circuit out

(see the section on troubleshooting

of

the

Type 555

is

operating

correctly,

below).

it

con

If one b

be

used

aids

test oscilloscope.

When may help to ate

for the particular circuit,

apply

circuit. For a circuit

checking a circuit

other beam,

the

to

it

may

two circuits

a known external signal

that

also

that

utilizes on input signal,

and

trace

the signal through the

has on identical counterpart

be

helpful

to

appl

y identic

and

compare

the results thr

that

is

appropr

al

ough

circuitry.

Troubleshooting Aids

Schematic

scope

tained component, ore

shown on the diagrams.

under which the voltages

The range

is

given on that

In

sistor, electrol

and

in

the

diagrams

the Types

rear

as

of the circuits of the Type 555 Oscillo-

21 A and

of

this manual. The circuit number

well

as

22A Time-Bose Units

important voltages

Be

sure to note the conditions

and

waveforms

of circuit numbers used on a particular

diagram

.

the instrument, the circuit number of

ytic capac

itor

and

internal control

and

were

each

wav

obtained

tube, tran-

is

of

Indicator

and

in detail

eam

as

the

in the

signals

the

ore

con-

of

each

eforms,

diagram

marked

Unit

with

Time-Base Units

on

a

the chassis

extended

.

near

the component. These numbe convenient reference to the components indicated on the schematic

Rotary switches shown on the schematics

cate

tions

it

rear

i-

the front particular switching function. For

3R

All of colored stripes. Each or more stripes

ried by the pow

diagrams.

the physical positions

of

a switch

of

the assembly . The letters F

or

the

ore

rear

of

the

numbered from the front-panel to the

of

the section

example,

means the

wiring

rea

r side of the third section.

in

the

instrument

is

color-coded. For the purpose

circuit tracing, nearly every signal

voltage

indicate

standard

-supply the

approximate EIA

that

lead

er

leads, with the stripes being

. The

ore

switch contacts . The sec -

and

R indicate whether

is

used to perform the

lead

carries

lead

is

code

read

creasing width.

Checking Tubes and Transistors

.

Commercial testers

and

icate a t

in the circ

transistors used

ca

te defects

ube

tubes foil to indi ind factorily

ore

not recommended for checking the

in

that

to

be

defective when

uit. The some

the Type 555. Tube testers often

affect circuit performance, or

it

is

applies

rs

coded

the

designation

one

coded

with two

voltage

is

used on the

in

order

operating

to

similar tests

provide

to indi-

or

two

car

of de-

satis-

-

5-8

Maintenance-

Type

5SS/21A/22A

made on transistors. The best criterion whether a component the circuit. If a tube

is

good

or

transistor

or

bad

is

for

is

its

operation

operating

should not be replaced. Unnecessary replacement

of

components

ing lessly

recalibrated

Direct substitution

or

tube such

transistor. A characteristic curve

as

a Tektronix in checking a tube defective. original

Often

or

shorted

Be

sockets

a transistor

condition between terminals. Use a resistance scale internal source terminals other,

and

of

not

may

require

that

the instrument

.

is

usually the best means

of

display

Type

570

or

transistor

sure to return

if

they

are

or

diode

merely

Type 575,

that

all

tubes

found

to

can be checked

by

making

may

is

and

be

also be useful

suspected

transistors

good.

an ohmmeter check

with

and

measure the de resistance

between

the semiconductor, first in one direction then the

e the

effect

of

polarity

reversal.

CAUTION

The use exceed will semiconductor

Before installing a replacement

that

of a high

the

give

an

the circuit

source breakdown erroneous

being

voltages

voltage

reading,

checked

are

approximately

of

and

. tube

for

the

meter

the

junction.

may

destroy

or

transistor , be sure

normal. If re-

determining

within

properly

or

switch-

be

need-

checking a

instrument,

of

being

to

their

for

an open

1

a 1

-volt

/

2

two

may

This

the

it

placement ponent

For

placement

is

made

may

be

replacing

procedure

witho

damaged

the c

athode-ray

given

tenance.

Component Checking

Components checked junction ing

the resistance through meter scale using an internal source ance should measure l

ow

in the othe

A

capacitor

tion by

sistance should charged. An open

capacitance

side

of

An

open

by

an ohmmeter

sh

orted frequency signals pas reduces the frequency response (rolloff).

tha

quickly

diode

t are soldered in place can usually be

afte

r unsoldering one end. For example, a

can be checked with an ohmmeter

very

r. can be checked

checking its resistance

read

infinite

capacitor

meter

or

the component

condition

in a resistor

continuity

inductors can

usu

si

ng through the circuit. Partial shorting

ut checking the circuit, the

by

some defect in the circ

tube refer

to

previously under Corrective

it

in

each

directio

n.

1

/

of

1

volts, the resist-

2

high in one direction

for a leaky on

as

may

by

checking the

with

the circuit in ope

a megohm scale. The re-

soon

best be detected

or

as

the

waveform .on each

inductor can be detected

check. Shorted

ally

be f

ound

by

analys

new

wm-

uit

.

the

CRT

Re-

Main-

by

measur-

Wit

h an ohm-

and

very

shorte d condi-

capacitor

with

ratio

n.

or

partially

is of high-

is

a

Fig.

S-7

.

Bottom

view

of

Power

Supply

Unit.

5-9

NOTES

SECTION 6

CAI.IBRATION

GENERAL INFORMATION

The Type 555 not require should

be operating section interval.) be have section for checking its necessary.

convenient

complete

be

adjustments. action

the schematic

calibration

bration particular,

will

that

the should remain instructions of four steps setting in

been

If

range

are

Oscilloscope

Tektronix

be

in tor a

1-1}

an volt operation}

mark

of

recalibrated

been

time-base

In

the

performed

of

If

adjustments

of

be

affected

Control settings

are

not mentioned

procedure

the

procedure,

of

the

"Preliminary" step.

not

Do

repaired

repairs

in

the

The following items

required

1. Two

a Tektronix Type K Plug-In Unit. The

unit

may

range

bandpass

.

2.

Variable

output

3. Time-Mark and

Oscilloscope

frequent

checked

properly

this manual for

In

made

instructions

sequence

recalibration

the adjustments.

of

the entire instrument will

the

state

to

controls.

preset

have

affected

. The six-digit numbers

part

calibrated

be

from .05 to 20 v

range

trigger

at

and

addition,

after

. A

complete

plug-in units,

that

to

separately

It

is

important

diagrams,

all closely

are

made

sweep

.

are

. Test

connected

otherwise. If

it

may

determine

Be

internal controls unlej e instrument has

or

is

known

been

circuits. / ·

for a

complete

numbers.

vertical plug-in units.

any

letter-series plug-in with 6 deflection fac-

to

at

least 20 me with

autotransformer

to 125 volts (or 250 volts for nominal 230-

and a power

Generator,

outputs

is a stable

recalibration;

regular

accurately

the

certain

portions

tubes

have

the

calibration

and

for making

follow,

avoid

is

not necessary, individual

if

those

for you

In

general,

but

if

associated

on

the

rates

and

given

every

are

not critical

equipment

at

the

you

be

necessary

the

test

sure

also

to

made,

be

preset

of

equipment

calibration

/em,

(e.g. Powerstat

rating

Tektronix Type 180A, with time-

. Accuracy must

intervals

procedure

unnecessary repetition.

you

to

20 pf inp

instrument

however,

to

. (See

recommended

of

the

been

changed

is

of

the Type 555

adjustments

the

steps

do

not

to

be

aware

this

are

in

circuits.

power

supplies,

have

vertical deflection factors

used

end

equipment

read

seriously

to

few

steps. Any controls

during

in a particular

of

the

are

performing

to

check

the

information given

out

internal controls

(or their equivalents)

of

in

One

a

1Ft~

'f"

the

Tk>.EI555 (see

of

at

be

and

its

calibration

insure

the

doubt,

parentheses

that

Maintenance

recalibration

instrument must

or

provided

are

affect

is

be

that

step

connections

r

apacitance

or

least 1.3 kva.

within 1 %.

repairs

in

arranged

steps

any

of

the

apparent

check the

the

checked. In

portion

unless the

only

back

three

of

adjustment.

to

the

Type

plug-in must

vertical plug-

Variac}, with

does

it

this

and

when

in

If

may

other

inter-

on

cali-

of

step

part

or

and

mid-

555

are

and

Table

4. Constant-Amplitude Signal

190B. Frequency

5. Plug-In Test Unit, Tektronix Type P

TU

is

a

-7 (for high Square-Wave

6. than

less

5000 f2/ 150, 225, 350

at

larly

noted

i

mately

rms for nominal 230-volt operation).

type, rms.

extension

and

Unit (011-049 for BNC, 011-045 for

(012-057).

connectors,

ment (012-057 for BNC, 012-001 for

UHF)

connectors (012-029).

quired

units with different connector

some

3 nsec.

Accurale

7.

v,

1350 volts.

against

where

8. Accurate

150 volts rms (or

9. Accurate with a

10

. 1

OX

11

. Two Time-Base Plug-In Extensions (013-013). A single

12. Gain

13. Clip-lead

1

/

a

-watt

2

14

. 50-ohm Termination,

15. 42-inch 50-

16

. Two-inch 50-ohm

17. Coaxial .

18

. BNC to binding-post

19. Two 18-inch insulated jumper

20. One

21

. Shorting

22.

Low-capacitance

One or

23.

for connecting to lest instruments

UHF

Male

BNC

Male

BNC

Male

24. The Type 555

of

the adjustments by using single

range

frequency

Generator,

DC voltmeter, with sensitivity

and

checked

and

500 volts,

Portable

accurate

necessary,

AC

voltmeter, with

AC

voltmeter, of iron

range

Attenuator

may

be

used

Adjust

Adapter

1 k composition resistor .

ohm

depending

tee

connector

6-inch insulated jumper

strap

illustrated

more

of

to BNC Female

to

UHF

Female

to Binding-Post

is

Generator,

from 500

for

multimeters should

standards, and

at

from

Probe, Tektronix P6006.

by

(013-076 for BNC, 013-003 for

coaxial

on

connector

calibration

the following

used

kc

to

adjustments only).

Tektronix Type 107. Risetime

an

accurac

and

for

an

the

voltages listed

range

zero

to

app

zero

to

approximate

adjusting

(013-005).

compatible

adapter

(1

(1 (1

one

UHF)

cable

cables

types

UHF)

(1

03-030 for BNC, 103 -026 for

(1

03-033).

leads

lead

in

Fig

. 5-4 .

tools. See

types

:

03-015)

03-032) 03-033)

as

a test oscilloscope to make

Tektroni x Type

at

least 30

or

Tektronix Type

y within l %

accuracy

be

corrective r

from

zero

roximately 300 volts

vane

or

timing unit

with Type K Plug-In

.

with BNC connectors

with

on auxil

.

with

adapters

or

vertical plug-in

-be

am

me.

of

at

within

checked

eadin

above

.

to

approx-

dynamome

ly

10 volts

at

a time.

UHF

or

iary

equ

banana

Fig. 6-

1.

may

be

operation.

lea

100,

3%

regu-

gs

ter

UHF)

BNC

ip-

plug

re-

st

®

6-1

Calibration-

Type

555/21A/22A

Fig.

6-1.

indicated.

low-capacitance

calibration

tools, Tektronix

PROCEDURE

NOTE

The

following

SSS

Oscilloscope with a Type Base A plug-in Time-Base

procedure

21A

Unit in

!Serial

Number

Time-Base

compartment

the

Time

Base B plug-in

is for a

Tektronix

7000 Unit in and a Type

partment.

Preliminary

Remove the side

and

Indi

cat

Plug-In

or

Unit vertical plug-in unit complete calibration

plug

-in

units by installing the plug-in extensions between the connectors on the plug

Unit

.

Set front-panel controls as follows:

INTENSITY HORIZ.

DISPLAY

INTENSITY HORIZ.

DISPLAY

LEVEL VERNIER

SL

OPE COUPLING TIME/CM VARIABLE SWEEP Time Time

FUNCTION Base A Base B

Input Coupling Deflection Factor

Units

in

the

Time

SOURCE

Vertical

and

bottom panels of the Power Supply

to be calibrated. Install the Type K

Lower

Beam compartment

in

the Upper Beam compartment.

is

to be done, extend the time-base

-in

units and those

Upper

Beam

Counterclockwise TIME

BASE A X1

Lower

Beam

Counterclockwise TIME

BASE B X1

Base A and

Time

Base

Clockwise Centered

+

AC .5

mSEC CALIBRATED NORMAL UPPER LOWER

Plug-In

Units

AC

.

OS

(cal.)

part

and

the

and

in

the Indicator

B

BEAM

numbers

Type

up)

Time

22A

com-

the other

If

Set the

AMPLITUDE

CALIBRATOR

switch to OFF. Check

the rear panel of the instrument to be sure the metal strops

are

in

place be tween the nectors for both beams, and that both ING-

CRT

CATHODE

CRT

switches

CATHODE

are

in

and

CHOPPED

the

position.

Connect the Indicator

Supply Unit with the multi-lea d power

Unit

of the Type 555 to the Power

cable

, and connect the Power Supply unit to the output of the autotransformer . Connect the 0-150-volt

(or

0-300-volt)

ac

meter across the auto-

transformer output to monitor the output voltage.

all equipment center voltage for which your instrument

and

adjust the autotransformer for the design-

is

234 volts). Disconnect the meter.

Allow

at

least 1 0 minutes warm-up before making any

adjustments.

POWER

SUPPLY

AND

CRT

ADJUSTMENTS

1. Adjust Low-Voltage Power Supplies

With the de voltmeter, measure the output voltage of the

-150,

and - 153 volts,

a

+1

points indicated in the Power Supply

00, + 225, + 350

put voltage of the - 150

and

with

in

2% of their rated values. The

(Fig. 6-3},

can be set so that all of these voltages

and +500-volt supplies

Unit

-v

olt supply

(Fig. 6-2}.

must

be between - 147

the other regulated supplies

-150

ADJ

the specified tolerance. Remember, however, that the calibration of the entire instrument

is

affected by changes the power supply voltages. Don't adjust the -150 trol unless one or more of the supplies

is

tolerance.

Fig.

6-2.

Bottom

view

of

Power

Supply

Unit points. of

each

Color-coded

test

point

power-supply

(see

Maintenance

leads

section

showing

are

for

connected

color

GROUND con-

BLANK

CRT

CATHODE

Turn

wired

(117

at

the

The

out-

must

control,

are

ADJ

R616

within

con-

actually out of

low-voltage

code).

test

at

left

side

-

on

or

be

in

6-2

Calibration-

Type

555/21A/22A

Fig.

6-3. Top

ments

Connect the 0the 6.3 ag

e reading of 6.3 volts

ADJ

The ac the an

view

.

VAC

control,

voltage

heater

voltage

rms-reading

of

1_0

test point shown

if

necessary.

waveform

supply

must

dynamometer ing

voltmeter movement) the

waveform

will

reading.

Power

Supply

Unit

-volt rms

ac

ac met

in

Fig

. 6-16. Check for o volt-

and

odjust

IMPORTANT NOTE

of

is

be

voltmeter

type). An

( d'

Arsonval

average

voltage, thus

the

not a sine

checked

(eithe

ordinary

rather

giving

showing

er

and

calibration

between

R799,

regulated

wave,

adjusted

r iron-

ground

the

REG

6.3-volt

therefore

vane

average-read-

permanent-magnet

than

integrate

an

incorrect

adjust-

using

or

and

HTR

Set the Time Base B SOURCE switch to SWEEP end

end

the center conductor (red lead) to test points power

connect the 1 k resistor

set

FUNCTION switch to AUTO

of

the coaxial

K (Lower Beam)

of

the

play

a free-running

cable

to the INPUT connector of the Type

and

coax

attach

. Increase the Lower Beam intensity to dis-

trace

(black lead) of the clip-lead

the clip-lead

. Connect the outer conductor

adopter

BASELINE

to chassis ground. Touch

each

(Fig. 6-2)

and

observe the ripple on

supply leads. Trigger with the Time Bose B

VERNIER

controls.

Disconnect the clip-

(If

oscillations occur on the waveform,

in

series with the center conductor).

lead

adopter

and

the autotransformer output to the design-center voltage.

LINE . Connect

adopter

to the other

of the low-voltage

each

LEVEL

the coax cable. Re-

3. Adjust Amplitude Calibrator Voltage

Connect the de voltmeter ground switch exactly + 100 volts. control. The 3%

(see Fig. 6-

set

to OFF position, check the meter for a reading of

4).

If necessary adjust

output

of

the

front-

peak-to-peak

panel

resistors.

between

With the

markings,

the

AMPLITUDE

voltage

as

set by a -series

CAL

R879,

the

will then

TEST

CALIBRATOR

of

and

one

of the

and

PT

and

CAL

ADJ

be

within

precision

the

2.

Check

Check the monitoring output if

the instrument

the

regulated

slant

. The

Low-Voltage Regulation and Ripple

each

voltage

regulated

voltage

from 105 to 125 volts

de

supplies for

while varying the a utotransformer

is

wired for 234-volt

voltages

ac

heater

±8%.

Typical ripple present on the

in

Table 6-1. The ripple

is

while the Upper Beam time-

not

sweep

. The

AMPLITUDE

to OFF position.

TABLE

on

Ripple

low-Voltage

Supply

Voltage

- 150 5 + 100 +225 +350 +500

117v(234v)

mv mv

10

5

mv

20

mv

20

mv

proper

regulation by

{or

210 to 250 volts

operat

ion

).

All

should remain essentially con ·

supply should remain within

regulated

measured

bose

CALIBRATOR

de

supp

lies

with the Lower Beam

generator

is

set

switch must

so

is

given

it

will

be

set

6-1

Supplies

Typical Ripple

105

or

125

mv

250

v v)

l

(210

or

-----

7.

5mv

15

5mv

30mv

of

Fig.

6-4.

Calibrator

Turn the

output

voltage

etween +45

b reading

in calibrator t

ha

t the multivibrotor tubes, V875

an

ced,

or

some

4.

Adjust High-Voltage Supplies

The high -

the total

accelerating

circuit in

AMPLITUDE

settings. Check

and

CALIBRATOR

+55

volts

Indicator

the

at

this range indicates suitable symmetry of the

waveform. A reading outside this

other

components

voltage

adjustments

of

potential

thus affect the deflection sensitivity.

Unit

.

switch to

one

meter for a reading be-

the

CAL

TEST PT. A voltage

range

and

V885A, ore not bal-

in

the circuit

the two

applied

are

beams

determine

to the beams,

of the

indicates

defeclive.

and

6-3

Calibration-

a.

Upper

Connect

TEST

POINT

reading

Beam H V ADJ control, maximum tive

meter

Beam

the

and

of

exactly

reading

lead

Type

de

voltmeter

ground

of

to the

-1350

555/21A/22A

between

(see Fig. 6-5),

volts. Adjust R852, the

if

necessary. If your

1200 volts, you

-150-volt

Beam H V ADJ control for a meter

DANG

fiR

HIGH VOlT

AGE

the

and

can

supply

reading

Upper

check for a

connect

and

set

of

Beam - 1350

meter

Upper

meter

has

a

the posi -

the

Upper

- 1200 volts .

clockwise the FOCUS controls on the lower

Check graticule respective control. The shown

6.

Leave the controls set Upper ward midway point zontal graticule

Loosen the the a small the

to

the

upper

horizontal

the

lines. If

centerlines,

in

Fig. 6-5.

display

alignment

the

if

horizontal

centerline.

the

traces

location

two

necessary

centerline,

of

the

adjust

of

the

Adjust External Graticule

Beam

until the

between

does

centerline,

position

lower

pointed

crt

trace, then

trace

not coincide

screw

left

corner

as

upward

again

the

two

approximately

remove

as

the

follows: that

holds

of

the

tool to position

hold

the

Check the Lower Beam viewing tered

on

the

cam

two

beam

Replace the

lower horizontal centerline.

to

obtain a compromise

s.

graticule

cover.

free-running

. Position

traces

are

not

R973,

BEAM

in

the

previous step. Position the

until

the becomes excursion limits.

traces,

the

to

BEAM

upper lower

parallel

and

relative

aligned

the

ROTATION control

(SIN's

trace

7000-8999)

dims,

dim. Position the

If

with the

graticule

the

graticule.

cam

nylon

the

graticule

and

tighten

area

graticule

cover

and

cam

Rotate the

to

see

If

not, reposition

position for

and

crt beam

the

horizontal

to their

ROT A TION

then

the

midway

upper

adjust

in

position

cam

centerline

the

screw

that

it

is

adjust

beam

on

down

beam

hori -

the

with

on

. cen-

the

is

-

at

Fig.

6-5

. Top

view

of

adjustments.

b.

Lower

Connect

TEST

POINT

exactly

-1350

ADJ control,

Indicator

Beam

the

de

voltmeter

and

ground,

volts. Adjust R952, the Lower Beam

if

necessary.

Unit

between

and

check for a

showing

the

5. Adjust Trace Alignment

Controls should

HORIZ.

SOURCE LOWER SWEEP FUNCTION TIME

/ CM LEVEL VERNIER

be

DISPLAY

Time Base A

set

Upper

Lower

as

follows:

Beam

and

Time Base B

TIME

AUTO .5 Clockwise Centered

lest

Lower Beam

meter

BASE A X1

BASE B X1

BEAM

BASELINE

mSEC

points

reading

and

-1350

H V

crt

of

7. Adjust Crt Vertical Sensitivity

Connect

Lower Beam vertical deflection shown trace reading em

ing. There should two the sensitivity AGE ADJ control, until a between of

R863.

Disc

in

on

the

. Reposition

below

readings

the

onnect

the

two

leads

of

the

de

voltmeter

plate

Fig

. 6-6. Position the free-running Lower Beam

lower

the

centerline)

to

is

horizontal

the

be

give

a vertical sensitivity

not

correct,

centerline

trace

to

and

again

a difference

adjust

difference

two

readings. See

the

meter

leads.

leads

and

the

bottom

note

of

14.0 volts

R863

of 14.0 volts

Fig. 6-5 for the location

at

note

graticule

the

voltage

of

7.0 volts/ em.

, the

SHIELD

to

the

voltage

line

between

VOLT-

is

obtained

two

points

(2

read

the

-

If

With

no

vertical input signals

applied,

center

the

traces the crt with the Vertical Position controls using the indicator neons

as a guide

. Turn the INTENSITY controls

6-4

on

beam

Fig.

6-6

. Lower

Beam

vertical

deflection

plate

connections.

Calibration-

Type

555/21A/22A

8. Adjust Astigmatism

Set

the

units

wise,

A TIEN positi TENSITY

UPPER to

make

6-5 for

FOCUS controls to

slightly

trols

9.

Set controls to

HORIZ.

INTENSITY HORIZ.

SWEEP FUNCTION AUTO LEVEL VERNIER TIME Time Base A SOURCE Time Base B SOURCE

Input Deflection Factor

a.

Upper

Set connect INPUT Upper Base A sist calibrator ing

Check

in

or

to position the lines. If ADJ 1 control, to the

Turn clockwise.

b.

Move the !Lower Beam} unit

justment. Increase the Lower Beam intensity

display

lines

SWEEP FUNCTION switches

to

NORMAL. Rotate

then

place

both

HORIZ.

Xl

0 position. With

on

both spots

controls

ASTIG

the

readjust

to

produce

defocused

location

onto

so

the

and

LOWER ASTIG controls,

spots

of

these

bring

the

UPPER

the

sharpest

Adjust Geometry

the

following positions:

Upper

DISPLAY

Lower

DISPLAY

Time Base A

/ CM

Vertical

Coupling

Beam

the

AMPLITUDE

the

coax

of

the

Beam intensity,

LEVEL

of

a series

waveform

area

.

to

see

out

(see

the

vertical lines

vertical

Lower

are

the

Beam

with

not

graticule

Upper

calibrator

the

control. The

straight,

CALIBRATOR

cable

Upper

Beam vertical plug-in.

then

of

vertical lines .

is

that

the

displayed

Fig

. 6-7}. Use the HORIZ. POSITION control

waveform

display

lines.

Beam INTENSITY control fully counter-

and

Time Base B

adjust

both

FOCUS controls fully clock-

DISPLAY

the

HORIZ. POSITION controls,

the

crt

screen

spots

are

not

as

circular

controls}. Adjust the

the

spots

ASTIG

and

focus possible.

Beam

TIME

Beam

Counterclockwise

TIME

and

Time Base B

Clockwise Centered 1 UPPER LOWER

Plug-In

from the

trigger

Upper

visible, position

lines

are

straight

signal check

R861,

CAL.

the

Beam

If

the

vertical lines

on

each

bowed,

to

the INPUT

the

Lower Beam

LEVEL

the

Units

AC 1

switch

vertical lines

control. If the

switches

and

too

as

into

LOWER ASTIG con-

mSEC

v/cm

OUT

display

top

it

of

adjust

GEOM

of

both

time-

base

at

the

EXT.

adjust

the IN-

bright. Adjust the

R864

and

R964,

possible. (See Fig.

front-panel

sharp

focus, then

BASE A X1

BASE B X1

BASELINE

BEAM

(cal.}

to

10

VOLTS

and

connector

with

or

bottom

out

are

the

graticule

R961, the

of

and

ADJ 2 control.

to the

Increase

the

Time

should

con-

of

the

view-

not

bowed

edge

GEOM

parallel

the

Type

geometry ad-

trigger

displayed

the

to

the

Turn the Lower Beam INTENSITY control fully counter-

clockwise.

500

microsecond

erator

may

form

for

making

the

baseline

viewing

area

'--

1

I

:

I

6-7

Fig.

1 0. Check Compression

Modulation

Reset

both

vertical input plug-in units for a deflection fac -

tor

of

10

OUT

CATHODE

Upper

Connect

of

the

2 em

area

expansion

not

v/ cm,

connector

adapter

both

Beam Compression

the

gain

of

exceed 1 mm

CAL.

ing-post Disconnect CRT

a.

connector. Trigger baseline Adjust

K

exactly trol, position the viewing or should

NOTE

be

used

of

markers

the

from

instead

geometry

marker

beam.

the

of

the

calibrator

adjustments.

waveform

time-mark

Position

below

gen-

wave

I

Adjusted

. Crt

display

calibrated.

and

on

the

rear-panel

and

GND

coax

cable

the

waveform

of

the

deflection. With the Vertical Position con-

display

and

observe

at

the

top

Adjusted

for

adjusting

Connect the second

grounding

connectors

to the

calibrator

on

the

Upper

to the

the

or

.

incorrectly

correctly

and

coax

cable,

arm

Upper

display

upper

Beam

top

trace

bottom

geometry

controls.

Intensity

a BNC

tee

between

and

of the

.

plug-in

and

install a bind-

tee

between

and

unit

bottom

connector.

position the

centerline.

to

straps

Beam vertical INPUT

horizontal

to the closely. Compression of

the viewing

produce

I

the

of

-

i

:

I

the

area

®!

6-5

Calibration-

b. Upper Beam Intensity Modulation

Set the Upper display. Connect two 18 apply the calibrator signal to the Upper ODE

connector. There should be appreciable difference

intensity between the top

AMPLITUDE

the adjust the waveform calibrator signal should now be completely blanked. move the jumper leads.

c.

Lower Beam Compression

Move the coax with the calibrator signal to the

Lower

the TOR

switch to 10

(Lower

Beam) unit line. Check the as described for the Upper Beam.

d. Lower Beam Intensity Modulation

Set the Connect the calibrator signal to the ODE

connector

Lower

Beam

Remove

between the rear-panel connectors.

The

time-base triggering adjustments that follow should be

mode

in

must

be extended

viously (see Preliminary step).

Type

555/21A/22A

Beam

INTENSITY

-i

nch jumper leads together

and

CALIBRATOR

INTENSITY

is

at

Beam

Lower

by the procedure described for the Upper Beam.

the jumper leads

TRIGGER

the indicated sequence.

control so the brightest portion of the

normal intensity. The top portion of the

plug-

in

unit. Set the

VOLTS

. Adjust the gain of the Type K

for 1

em

Lower

Beam

and

of deflection

Beam for compression or expansion

INTENSITY

check the

ADJUSTMENTS

'

(5/N

at

this

time

control to present a dim

Beam

CRT

bottom of the waveform. Set switch to

int

and

11000-upl

if

bios has not been done pre-

20

VOLTS,

INPUT

AMPLITUDE CALIBRA-

at

the lower center-

control for a

Lower

ensity modulation

replace the ground straps

The

time-bose plug

Beam

dim

CRT

CA

and

display.

CATH-

-in

of

and

TH-

re-

Re-

of

the

units

in

')

K t , -

J4-

\ b - c L" '

a.

nme

Base

A (Type

In

the

Time

from

ground to the junction of

With the

nector of the Type K plug-in waveform on the lower horizontal centerline. should be triggered. Set the

MILLIVOLTS

to 5 (TRIGGER Fig. 6-1

Oo),

the display amplitude ning when the display amplitude

Set the play with the MILLIVOLTS

MILLIVOLTS. If

to 5

- slope, adjust

LEVEL

CENT

Set the Set

R25

Fig.

6-Bo) clockwise just at

either + or - position. With the

readjust mittently the

SLOPE triggering of the display setting of the control. intermittent triggering should be very narrow).

Recheck the adjustment of

millimeter of calibrator signal as described above

just R25

Disconnect the calibrator signal from the Type K plug-in

unit.

Reset the following controls:

Bose

10-mv

calibrator signal applied to the

. The waveform should free

SENSITIVITY)

if

necessary,

SLOPE

switch to - and check for a

AMPLITUDE

and

a free--running display with the switch set R25

in

the

AMPLITUDE

to the

fully

for a triggered display. Adjust

until

the display free runs with the

R26

to the point that the display is riggered inter-

and

note the setting of the potentiometer

switch to

if

necessary.

21Al

A plug-in

is

triggering

TRIGGER

Time

CALIBRATOR

clockwise position, then adjust

-. (The

unit,

R18

unit,

AMPLITUDE

in

the

Time

so

that the display

2 millimeters

CALIBRATOR

Bose

A plug-in unit as follows:

Adjust

is

again intermittent and note the

range between the two points of

R25

,..~-_,N{I

connect a shorting

and

R19

(see

center the

CALIBRATOR

Bose

is

1 millimeter

is

not correct

SENSITIVITY

switch to 5

R26

with 2 millimeters

run.

A plug-

is

triggered when

(10

mv)

and

switch set to

and

R25

.clowly counter-

SLOPE

switch set

slowly clockwise

Fig

. 6-1

INPUT

Lower

The

waveform

Adjust

in

unit (see

is

free run-

(5

mv).

tri

ggered dis-

in + and/or

R26

MILLIVOLTS

R26

SLOPE

(R26).

and

~trap

Oo).

con-

Beam

switch

R25

10

TRIG

.

(see

switch

at

+,

Set

until

1

read-

11

A. Adjust Trigger Sensitivity, Centering and

DC

Level

Set the front-panel controls as follows:

Lower

Beam

HORIZ

SOURCE TIME/CM SWEEP LEVEL VERNIER

A C-

DC VOLTS/CM VARIABLE

Set the

DISPLAY

Time

Base

FUNCT

ION

Type K (Lower

AMPLITUDE

A and

CALIBRATOR

TIME

BASE

Time

Base

LOWER

.5

AUTO Centered Centered

Beam

AC .

05

CALIBRATED

switch to

BEAM

mSEC

BASELINE

l

10

A X 1

B

MILLIVOLTS.

6-6

Time

Base

SOURCE COUPLING SWEEP TIME/CM

VOLTS/CM Input Coupling

Install a Beam to the junction of (see

Fig. Set the screen. Center the Upper tal centerline.

Adjust Time starts positive just in

the + position a

line with the

FUNCTION

Vertical Plug-In

lO

X probe on the

vertical plug-in unit

R25

6-lOo).

INTENSITY

RB,

the

Bose

A plug

SLOPE

and

Be

sure the probe

controls to display the two traces on the

UPPER

-in

unit (see

above

nd

switch

A and

Beam

BEAM

the centerline with the

starts negative

Time

Base

UPPER

BEAM

DC

NORMAL

SmSEC

Units

.5

(cal.)

DC

INPUT

and

CS

in

connector of the Upper

connect the tip of the probe

in the

Time

Base A plug-in

is

properly compensated.

display on the upper horizon-

TRIG

DC

Fig.

the - position. The distance

LEVEL

6-l

Oo)

so the waveform

just

below the center-

B

control SLOPE

unit

in

the

switch

®

Calibration-

Type

555/21A/22A

between the centerline and the start of the trace should be approximately equal

Remove vertical plugK (lower LOWER

the probe

in

Beam)

BEAM

horizontal centerline. Adjust

LEVEL

control

starts

just

above the centerline

+ position and

in

+ and - slopes.

from

the

unit and connect

. Set the

Time

. Center the lower

R3,

in

the

Time

Base

A plug-in unit so the waveform

just

below the centerline

INPUT

of the Upper

it

to the

INPUT

Base A SOURCE

Beam

display on the lower

the

with

LOWER the

BEAM

SLOPE

with

Beam

of the Type

switch to

TRIG

switch

in

the switch

DC the

the - position.

in

At

the end of this step, remove the shorting strop and

from

connect the probe tip

Fig.

6-9a.

Right

side

timing

adjustments.

view

the time-base

of

Type

22A

with

Time Base B

unit.

12A. Adjust Tunnel Diode Bias

Reset

the following controls:

Lower Beam

HORIZ

DISPLAY

TIME

BASE

trigger

A X 1

dis

and

-

Fig.

6-Sa.

left

side

view

of

timing

adjustments

b.

Time Base B (Type 22Al

Remove

.

the probe tip and disconnect the probe Move

the shorting strap

to the junction of

Type 21 A with Time Base A

from

R18

and

unit.

Set the following controls:

HORIZ

Upper

DISPLAY

Beam

Time Base B

SOURCE TIME/CM SWEEP

FUNCTION

SLOPE

COUPLING

Vertical Plug-In Units

VOLTS/CM

Time

Adjust the

TRIG

the controls

(R8 responding tions

of

LEVEL

R26, R8

Base B TRIGGER

CENT

and

R3)

Time

Bose

and

control

in the manner j

A controls. See

R3. adjustments, leave the Upper DISPLAY

switches set

to

TIME

the

Time

Base

the vertical

the

R19

in

and

Lower Beam

Time

TIME

LOWER .5 AUTO

the

mSEC

INPUT

Base

Time

BASE

BEAM

BASELINE

+

AC

.05

SENSITIVITY

(R26)

and the

ust

described

Fig

. 6-9o

Throughout these

Beam

and

Lower

BASE

B X

1.

A plugA plug-

Base

B X 1

control

TRIG

for

Time

Beam

trigger

in

connector.

in

B plug-

(R25)

DC

LEVEL

for

the cor-

the loca-

Bose

HORIZ

and

unit unit

in

,

B

Time

SOURCE TIME/CM SLOPE

COUPLING

Time

SOURCE TIME/CM SLOPE COUPLING

Upper

Beam

Deflection Factor

Input Coupling

Type K (Lower Beam l

VOLTS/CM

Input Coupling

Install the lOX probe on the

Beam

Upper

Type 1

90B

Type K

(Lower

frequency of

mately

100

a.

Time

Base

vertical plug-

Signal Generator

Beam).

30

me

millivolts.

A

in

Set the signal generator

and on output amplitude of approxi-

Connect the tip of the probe

R132

in the

Time

Bose

A plug-in unit (see

Base

A

LOWER

.1

BEAM

p.SEC

+

AC

Base B

UPPER

BEAM

2

p.SEC

+

AC

Vertical Plug-In

1 volt/em

AC

.05 AC

INPUT

unit.

Connect the output of the

to

the

INPUT

to

the junction of

(cal.)

connector of the

Fig

. 6-

for

on output

C131

lOo)

. Trigger

and

®

6-7

Calibration-

Type

555/21A/22A

the 30-mc sine-wave controL Adjust tor

to

produce 2 em

on

and

Upper

observe

period

Trigger

control

BIAS

(Fig. 6-8a) mum time trigger waveform slowly turned through its triggering

display

the

Output

of

deflection

Beam

display with

the

in

of

trigger

the Time Base A

14.3 p.sec (7.15 em)

as

the

Time Base A

with the Time Base A

amplitude

of

the signal

on

the

crt screen.

the

Time Base B

waveform. Adjust

plug

-in unit for a maxi -

between

VERNIER

range

.

b. Time Base B

Reset the following controls:

Upper Beam

HORIZ

DISPLAY

TIME

BASE

A X 1

Lower Beam

HORIZ

DISPLAY

Time

SOURCE

TIME/CM

TIME

Base A

UPPER

2

p.SEC

BASE

BEAM

B X 1

Time Base B

SOURCE

TIME/CM

Move the tip

unit to the junction

-i

n unit (see Fig. 6-lOa). Trigger the 30-mc sine-wave

plug display

VERNIER

for a maximum

VERNIER

connect

with the' Time Base B

Trigger the

R44

TD

BIAS

Remove the

the 30-mc signal from

of

Upper

control

and

(see Fig. 6-9a)

control

probe

the

probe

of

Cl31

Beam

observe

period

is

of

turned through its triggering range.

tip from

LOWER .1

from

the

and

Rl32

VERNIER

display

the

triggering waveform. Adjust

in

the

Time Base B plug-in unit

14.3 p.sec

the

vertical plug-in unit.

BEAM

p.SEC

Time Base A

in

the Time Base B

contro

l.

with the Time Base A

as

the Time Base B

time-base unit

VERNIER

cycles

control ·

and

genera

LEVEL

R44

of

plug

dis-

TD

the

-in

Connect

-

INPUT CALIBRATOR

a.

Time Base A

With the to

is

the plug controls. Adjust

running

With

control fully counterclockwise, then turn it slowly clockwise

until the traces With Upper turning the display Upper the

line

run.

b.

Time

Move the STABILITY

B TIME trol

After completing this step, disconnect

the connector.

14A. Adjust Lockout

Reset the following controls:

the

coax

from the

of

the

Type K (lower

switch to 50

the lO X

Upper

center

--in un

trace of

an

the

Upper

Beam

begins to free run.

Beam

Upper

and

the point

probe

Beam vertical plug-i-n unit,

terminal

it. Trigger the

the

Upper

normal intensity.

adjusting tool, turn

of

the

Beam Verti

trace

on

STABILITY

trace.

Adjust the

Beam

trace

where

Base B (Type

probe

tip

controL Set

BASE

B X 1, then

by

the

procedure

STABILITY

control

CAL

OUT

Beam).

MILLIVOLT

installed

of

Rlll

(STABILITY)

display

Beam intensity

two

beam

cal

the

control clockwise until

midway

Position control, position the

topmost

Not

STABILITY

between

the

lower

Set

S.

on

the

INPUT

connect

with

the

LEVEL

the

Time Base A

s just

appear

graticule line. Continue

e the vertical position

the

Beam

22Al

to

the

center

terminal

HORIZ

the Time Base B

DISPLAY

for Time Base

the

probe

adjust

just

and

both

described

remove

Level

connector

in

to

control to position

topmost

trace

Upper Beam

INTENSITY

Counterclockwise

Lower Beam

HORIZ

DISPLAY

TIME

BASE

the

AMPLITUDE

connector

the

Time Base A

and

present

STABILITY

on

the

lower

began

of

the

Time Base

switches

STABILITY

probe

from t

B X 1

to the

probe

VERN

a free -

screen.

Beam

of

graticule

to

free

con-

A.

tip from

he

INPUT

of

tip

IER

the

to

13A. Adjust Stability

Reset the following controls:

Lower Beam

HORIZ

DISPLAY

Time Base A

SOURCE TIME/CM LEVEL

Upper Beam

Deflection Factor Input Coupling

6-8

TIME

BASE

and

Time Base B

LOWER

.5

nSEC

Centered

Vertical Plug-In

5 V

/em.

(cal.l

DC

A X 1

BEAM

Fig. sweep

6-1

Oa. Top view

adjustMents.

of

Tillie

Base

Unit

showing

test

points

and

®

a.

Time

Base

A

With the

INPUT connector

and

then disconnect the K plug-in.

Set

SWEEP

of

2

Press

lamp inside the button should light voltage signal a single

below

Base A LOCKOUT

2 will

meter

Press lamp should light gered

b.

Time

coax

cable

of

the Type

VERNIER

the

. Connect the

V125

to

the

be

leads

sweep

controls to trigger the

coax

Time Base A

in

the Time Base A plug-in unit (see Fig.

and

release

on the meter. Now,

the INPUT connector on

sweep

.

and

release the

should occur

Base

de

the

of

the trace, the meter should

reading. If

LEVEL

below

each

B

connected from the CAL OUT to the

K,

adjust

cable

from

SWEEP

FUNCTION switch to SINGLE

voltmeter

PUSH

TO

again

it

control,

the first

PUSH

TO

time

the

button

each

time

the

square-wave

the

between

RESET

and

connect the

the

does

R125,

so the

reading

RESET

is

the

Time Base A

INPUT

of

ground

button. The

remain on.

Type

K. read

not,

adjust

voltage

. Disconnect the

button. The

pressed

button

is

released.

LEVEL

display

the

T

and

6-1

READY

Note

calibrator

Following

10 volts

the

Time

on

READY

and

a trig-

yp~

Oa)

.

the

Calibration-

Type K

A C-DC VOLTS/CM VARIABLE

Set

the the Type K plug-in unit, lower horizontal centerline.

a.

Turn the Time Base A clockwise (see slowly clockwise until a position

trol clockwise until position of between

AMPLITUDE

calibrator

Time

Base

of

the

signal

the

two positions just determined.

CALIBRATOR

applied

center

A fType 21Al

Fig

TD

control. Set

TD

. 6-8b for location

BIAS

the

display free runs. Again note the

Type

555/21A/22A

CLower

the Lower Beam waveform on the

stable

control. Continue turning the con-

to

BIAS

the

display

Beam)

DC

CALIBRATED

switch to 1

INPUT connector

control

(R44)

of

control), then turn it

appears.

TO

BIAS

control midway

VOLT.

With

of

the

fully counter-

Note

the

I

Set

the

Lower Beam HORIZ

B

Xl.

for a triggered display connect the

SWEEP 2

Base B LOCKOUT tion the

Adjust the Time Base B

coax

cable

Set

the

Time Base B SWEEP FUNCTION switch to SINGLE

. Connect the

of

V125

in

by

the procedure just described for Time Base

coax

from the input

de

the Time Base B plug-in

LEVEL

TRIGGER

IS/N

The time-base triggering adjustments

made

in

the indicated sequence. The time-base units must

be

extended

(see "Preliminary" step).

at

this time

DISPLAY

of

from the INPUT CONNECTOR.

of

LEVEL

the

calibrator

voltmeter

adjustment

the

Type K.

between

and

ADJUSTMENTS

7000-109991

if

this

has

not

118. Adiust Tunnel Diode Bias

Set front-panel controls

HORIZ.

DISPLAY

Time

SOURCE TIME/CM SWEEP MODE

LEVEL VERNIER

as

follows:

Lower

Base A and

Beam

TIME

Time

LOWER

.5

NORMAL Centered Centered

switch to

and

waveform, then dis -

and

single

that

been

Base

mSEC

TIME

VERNIER

ground

check

sweep

A.

follow must

done

BASE

A

B

BEAM

controls

and

the

opera-

Remove

previously

Xl

BASE

Time

be

Fig.

6-Sb.

left

side

view

of

Type

timing

adjustments.

b.

Time

Base

B !Type 22Al

Set

the

B

Xl

manner just described for Time Base location

Remove the

this step.

Fig. timing

Lower Beam HORIZ.

. Adjust the Time Base B

of

the

TD

BIAS

coax

cable

6-9b.

Right

side

adjustment•.

view

21A

DISPLAY

TD

control in Time Base

and

connectors

of

Type

22A

with Time

switch to

BIAS

A.

See

with

Time

Base A trigger

control

(R44)

Fig

. 6-9b for the

B.

after

Ba•e B trigger

and

TIME

BASE

in

the

completing

and

6-9

Calibrution-

Type

555/21A/22A

128.

Reset

Check

the

H F

Triggering

following controls:

Lower Beam

HORIZ.

TIME/CM Time Base A SOURCE Time Base B SOURCE

Set

of

a.

Connect the sine-wave signal the with

amplitude

tion on the crt screen. A

DISPLAY

Time Base A

the

Type 190B Signal

30

me

and

an

Time Base A

Type K

(lower

the

Time Base A

of

the

output

Beam).

signal

and

Generator

amplitude

If

necessary, VERNIER generator

stable

TIME

Time Base B

.1

p.SEC LOWER UPPER

for

of

about

to

the

control. Adjust the

to

produce

waveform

played.

Set

the

display should not

Time Base A SOURCE switch

NIER

control.

b.

Time Base B

Set

the

lower

Beam HORIZ.

trigger

well

DISPLAY

at

to

any

switch B X.2. Set the Time Base B SOURCE switch A

stable

the

display with the Time Base B

Set

the

Time Base B SOURCE switch display should not NIER

control.

waveform

should

trigger

be

displayed.

well

VERNIER

at

any

to

position

Remove the input signal.

138. Adjust Stability

Reset

the

following controls:

Upper

Beam

and

Lower Beam

HORIZ.

SOURCE TIME/CM

Deflection Factor 5 v Input Coupling DC

Install

Beam vertical plug-in unit. Connect

OUT connector

Set

the 1 OX

the

AMPLITUDE

DISPLAY

Time Base A

Upper

probe

to

the

and

Time Base B

Beam Vertical

on

the

INPUT

of

the Type K

CALIBRATOR

TIME

LOWER .5

mSEC

Plug-In

/em

connector

the

switch

BASE A X.2

BEAM

an

output

2.5 volts.

INPUT

connector

trigger

1 em should

UPPER

position

to

LOWER

If

necessary, control.

UPPER

BASE A Xl

BEAM

(cal.)

of the

coax

from

(lower

to 1 VOLT.

frequency

the

display

output

of

deflec-

be

BEAM.

of

the

TIME

BEAM

trigger

BEAM.

of

the

Upper

the

Beam).

of

dis-

The

VER-

BASE

The

VER-

CAL

tical Position control, position the topmost graticule line. clockwise. The traces will STABILITY with position control Upper line

control clockwise until the traces

the

lower

Beam display free running .

of

the

Upper

adjust

trace

point

and

Beam

and

free run.

b. Time Base B (Type

Move

the

probe

Base B

STABILITY

to

TIME

BASE B X1,

cont

rol by the

Disconnect

completing this

control. Set both HORIZ.

procedure

the

probe

step

148. Adjust Lockout

Reset the following controls:

INTENSI

.

HORIZ.

VOLTS/CM

a.

With INPUT LEVEL display. Then disconnect of

Set SWEEP.

of

2

TY

DISPLAY

Type K (Lower Beam)

Time Base A

the

coax cable

co

nnector

and

the

Type K Plug-ln.

on

VERNIER

the Time Base A SWEEP FUNCTION switch

Conne

ct

the

V125

in

the Time

Now

disappear

Beam

the

mid

where

trace. Now

STABILITY

way

between

the

22A)

tip

to

the

then

adjust just

described

tip from

.

Level

Upper

Beam

Lower Beam

connected

the

Type

controls

the

de

voltmeter

Bas

e A plug-in unit (see

Upper

Beam

turn the

LEVEL

. Continue turning the

again

Note

center the

control

to

the topmost graticule

lower

Beam

trace

center

terminal

DISPLAY

the

Time Base B

for Time Base

the

STABILITY

Counterclockwise

TIME

BASE A Xl

1

from the

K,

to

coax

adjust

trigger

between

CAL.

the Time Base

the

cable

from

ground

trace

on the

control full y

appear,

the

vertical

LEVEL

position the

began

of

the

Time

switches

STABILITY

A.

control

after

OUT

to

square-wave

the

INPUT

to

SINGLE and

Fig. 6-1

Ob)

to

the

A

.

a. Time Base A

the

probe

tip

to

the

center

Connect

BILITY)

in the Time Base A plug-

LEVEL

the intensity

Turn

and

to

present a free-running

the

Time Base A

VERNIER

in

controls. Increase the

STABILITY

terminal

unit. Trigger the

trace

control fully counterclockwise, then turn it slowly clockwise until the beams

just

appear

on

the

screen.

With

the

6-10

of

R111

(ST

A-

display

Upper

with

Beam

of normal intensity.

traces

of

the

Upper

two

Beam Ver-

Fig.

sweep

6-lOb

adjustments

. Top

view

.

of

Time

Base

Unit

showing

test

points

and

Press

the

PUSH

TO

RESET

button.

the button should light and remain on. Note the voltage

on

the meter. Now, again connect the calibrator signal

the

INPUT

sweep of the trace, the meter should read

the previous reading. lOCKOUT will meter leads.

Press

should now occur each time the button

b. Time Base B

Set the lower B X1. Adjust the for

a triggered display of the calibrator waveform, then

connect the coax cable

Set the SWEEP. 2 of Ti

me

operation

Remove

connector on the Type K. Following a single

If

it

lEVEl

be

just

the

Time

Connect the de voltmeter between ground and V125 Base B

by

the coax

control,

10 volts below the

PUSH

TO

Beam

Time

Base B SWEEP

in

the

Time

LOCKOUT

the procedure

does not, adjust the

R125,

RESET

HORIZ. DISPLAY

Base B lEVEL

from

Base

LEVEL

just

from

the input of the Type

The

READY

lamp inside

10

volts below

Time

to

Time

K.

TIME

controls

SINGLE

Base

BASE

dis-

A.

so

the voltage on

first

reading. Disconnect the

button. One triggered sweep

the

FUNCTION

B plug-

adjustment and single sweep

described

and

INPUT

in

is

pressed.

switch

VERNIER

connector.

switch to

unit

and check the

for

to

A

Remove vertical plug-in unit and connect Type K (lower

to

lower horizontal centerline.

adjust

2

waveform starts

either the +

b. Time Base B

Move

of

R18 INPUT Upper

connected

junction of

both

Center the Upper

Now

adjust LEVEL} Base B plug-in unit.

At

probe.

the probe

Beam).

LOWER

BEAM

. Center the

R3,

the

LOWER

at

or-

the shorting strap

and

R19

of the Type K and install

Beam

HORIZ.

use

R26

and

the end of

in

vertical plug-in

to

the

Time

RS

and

DISPlAY

the procedure

(TRIG

R3

(LOWER

this

Calibration-

from

the

Set the

In

BEAM

TRIG

the centerline

position.

Time

LEVEL

from

Base

B.

unit. The

Base

C5

step remove the shorting strap and the

A plug-in

in

the

switches to

Beam

display

just CENT}, BEAM

described

Type

INPUT

it

to the

Time

Base A SOURCE

Lower

the

Time

DC

with

Time

Base A to

Remove

it

on

Time

Base

TIME

on

R8

(UPPER

TRIG

DC

555/21A/22A

of the Upper

INPUT

Beam

display

Base

A plug-in

LEVEL

control

the SlOPE switch

the junction

the probe

the probe tip can be left unit

or moved to the

B plug-in

BASE B X1.

the upper centerline.

for

LEVEL)

INPUT

Time BEAM

in

from

unit.

Base A to

TRIG

the Ti

Beam

of the

switch

on

the

unit,

so

the

of the

Set

DC

me

in

1

58

Adjust Trigger Centering and

Reset

the followi

SOURCE COUPLING SWEEP TIME/CM

HORIZ. DISPLAY

Deflection Factor .5 v / Input Coupling

a. Time

In

from

With the 1 Upper to

TENSITY

Center the Upper centerline.

In LEVEL level while the

the

Adjust Time with at

FUNCTION

Base

the

Time

ground

OX

Beam

the junction of

controls to display the two traces

the

Time Base

CENT

SLOPE

switch

R8,

Base A

the

SLOPE

the centerline

ng

controls:

Time Base A and Time Base B

Upper Beam and Lower Beam

Vertical Plug-In Units

A

Base

A plug-in

to

the junction of

probe installed

vertical plug-

R5

and

Beam

control, so the waveform starts

the

so

A plug-in

SLOPE

switch

in

the + position.

UPPER the waveform starts positive switch

in

with

the

unit,

R18

on

the

in

unit,

connect the tip of the probe

C5

in

display

is

moved

BEAM

TRIG

the + position and starts negative

SLOPE

switch

Level

UPPER

BEAM DC NORMAL 5

mSEC

TIME

BASE A X1

em

(cal.)

DC

connect a shorting strap

and

R19

(see

Fig.

INPUT

connector of the

Time

Base

A. Set the IN-

on the upper horizontal

unit

on

adjust

R26,

at

from

+ to

DC

LEVEL

at

in

the - position.

6-1

the screen.

the

the same

-.

Leave

control

the centerline

Ob).

TRIG

de

in

TIMING AND HORIZONTAL

For

steps

16

through

tended

from

the Indicator

Install a coaxial tee connector

Beam

vertical plug-

end of the tee to the

unit. These connections adjustments.

Set front-panel controls as follows:

Upper Beam and Lower Beam

HORIZ. DISPLAY

Time Base A and Time Base B

SWEEP SOURCE TIME/CM SLOPE COUPLING LEVEL VERNIER

Deflection Factor Input Coupling

FUNCTION

20

leave both

Unit.

on

in

unit. Connect a coax cable

INPUT

will

the

of the Type K

remain throughout the

TIME

NORMAL UPPER 1

mSEC

+

AC Clockwise Centered

Vertical

Plug-In Units

5 v/

AC

16. Adjust Magnifier Gain

Set

the

Type

180A

1

00

microsecond markers and connect the output connector Base A LEVEL

on

the Upper

Time-Mark Generator

Beam

plug-

control to trigger the display.

in

ADJUSTMENTS

Time

Base

units

INPUT

of the Upper

from

(Lower

Beam)

timing

BASE

A X.2

BEAM

cm

(cal.)

for

an output

to

unit. Adjust the

the tee

Time

ex-

one

of

6-11

1"-l:a......&:..-_T·--

CCCI~1A/~'JA

Calibration-

Type

555/21A/22A

;ER

LTAGE

Check per R372, obtain the proper display. shown

per R472, obtain the proper display. of

the Upper

em

between the 1

the Upper

in

Fig. 6-11.

Check the Lower

em

between the 1

the Lower

R472.

Beam

em

MAG

em

MAG

Fig.

6·11.

Upper Beam Horizontal

display for exactly 2 time marks

and 9

em

graticule lines. Adjust

GAIN

The

display for exactly 2 time marks

and 9

See

control if necessary to

location

em

GAIN

Fig.

of

groticule lines. Adjust

control

6-12 for the location

this control

if

necessary to

Amplifier

X.2 to the SWP

MAG

is

With the leading edge display Beam edge

of terline. If not, adjust REGIS

circuit.

X1

position. If not, adjust

REGIS

control.

the Lower

on

HORIZ.

the middle marker should remain

control.

Beam

HORIZ. POSITION control, position

of

the middle marker

the vertical centerline.

DISPLAY

to TI

R458,

ME

the Lower

BASE A X1.

R358,

the Upper

in

the Lower

Now

switch the Lower

on

the vertical

Beam

The

SWP

Beam

leading

cen-

MAG

17. Adjust Sweep Calibration

Set

the time-mark generator for

markers.

to

Check the Upper

per

just

em R451,

Set

the HORIZ.

TIME

BASE A X1

em

between the 1

R351,

the Upper

Check the Lower

between the 1

the Lower

Beam

.

DISPLAY

Beam

em

Beam

display for exactly 1 time mark per

em

and 9

SWP

on

output

of

switches of both beams

display for exactly 1 time mark

and 9

em

SWP

CAL

groticult

CAL control,

em

groticule lines, and adjust

control,

1 millisecond

lines, and ad-

if

necessary.

if

necessary.

18. Adjust Sweep Magnifier Registration

Set

the time-mark generator for 5 millisecond markers.

the HORIZ.

A X.

2,

With the leading edge display the

Upper

X1. The

exactly

DISPLAY

and

focus

both displays.

the Upper on

leading edge

on

Beam

of the vertical centerline Beam

HORIZ.

the centerline

switches of both beams to

HORIZ. POSITION control, position

the middle marker

DISPLAY

of

the middle marker should remain as

the switch

in

of

the groticule.

switch to

is

TIME

the Upper

TIME

moved from the

6-12

Beam

Now

BASE

Set

BASE

set

A

19. Adjust Sweep

With nectors, BASE B X1 display

a.

In LENGTH control, to display 10.5 (22

the time-mark signal still applied to the INPUT con-

set

the Lower

. Adjust the Time

of

the Lower

Time Base A

Set

the time-mark generator for 500 microsecond markers.

the Time

markers)

Bose

of

Length

Beam

HORIZ.

Bose B LEVEL

Beam

waveform.

A plug-in unit, adjust

the Upper

em

Beam

DISPLAY

of

display.

switch to

control for a stable

R176,

horizontal deflection

the

TIME

SWP

b. Time Base B

In

Time

Bose

8,

adjust

R176,

the

SWP display 10.5 Lower

20.

The

range to provide continuously variable sweep rates (uncoli-

brated) between the

em

Beam

display.

Check

VARIABLE

of

horizontal deflection

Variable Control

control

steps

(R160Y)

of

the TIME/ CM switch.

LENGTH control, to

(22

markers)

requires at least a 2.5-

of

the

to-1

®I

L

l

I_

I

__./

L

Fig.

6-12.

Lower Beam Horizontal Amplifier circuit.

Calibration-

Type

555/21A/22A

a.

Time

Base

A

With the input signal connected as mark generator be

1 marker displayed every 5

VARIABLE Upper

Beam

Check to see that the when the BRATED.

b.

Time

Turn

the

wise.

The

less

than 2

be

Check when the BRATED.

For

the

21

through

stalled

the

Indicator Unit must

power

few

minutes for

During quired, remove porarily to make control setting with

for

5 millisecond markers. There should now

control fully counterclockwise.

display should now be

VARIABLE

Base

B

Time

Base B

markers

em

apart

to

see that the

VARIABLE

remainder

27)

in

the

Indicator Unit

while removing

the

timing

UNCALIBRATED

control

in

control

the

is

VARIABLE

the lower

.

UNCALIBRATED

is

IMPORTANT

of

the

time-base

be

the

warm

up

procedure,

appropriate

the

adjustment, then recheck

the

side

in

step 19, set the time-

em.

Turn

less

in

any position except

control fully counterclock-

Beam

display should now

in

any position except

timing

extensions, then

and

inplace

after

if

an

panel

procedure

units must

the

applying

adjustment

side

21. Check Sweep Rates

Front-panel controls should be set as follows:

Upper

HORIZ. DISPLAY

Beam

and

Lower

TIME

the

Time

The

markers

than 2

em

neon lamp

side

panels

. Turn

in

Beam

off

allow

panel

place.

BASE A X1

Base A

apart

(steps

be

the

power

is

re-

tem-

the

in

the .

is

on

CALI-

is

on

CALI-

in-

of

a

.

Time

Base A and

SOURCE SLOPE

COUPLING LEVEL VERNIER SWEEP TIME/CM VARIABLE

Deflection Factor Input Coupling

a . Time

With the time-mark signal applied

connectors as

microsecond markers. Check the by for

cule

vide sweep rates within 3% accuracy ter 8 member that the time-mark generator may introduce

error.)

b.

Set the

BASE B X1. Table sweep rates within 3% accuracy between the 1

graticule

FUNCTION

Vertical

Base

A

in

the previous steps, set the generator

applying the time

the indicated displays between the 1

lines. All

em

of the screen. Typical accuracy

Time Base B

HORIZ. DISPLAY

Check the

6-2.

All

lines

. Typical accuracy

marks

positions of the

Time

positions of the

Time

Base

B

LOWER

BEAM

+

AC Centered Centered NORMAL

.1

mSEC

CALIBRATED

Plug-In

listed

switches of both beams to

Base

Units

5 v/

cm

(cal.)

AC

to

both vertical

Time

Base

(0.24

switch

6-2

em

switch

em)

is

A sweep rates

and checking

and 9

over the cen-

within 1 %.

must

em

%.

in

Table

TIME/CM

B sweep rates according

TIME/CM

is

within 1

em

must

and 9

INPUT

for

100

grati-

pro-

(Re-

±1%

TIME

to

provide

em

6-13

Calibration-

Type

555/21A/22A

TABLE

6-2

Sweep Rate Check

TIME/CM

Switch .1

msec

.2

msec

.5

1

msec msec

2

5 msec 5

10

msec

20

msec

50

msec .1 sec .2 sec .5

sec

Time-Mark

Generator

100

JLSeC

100

JLSeC

500

JLSec

1

msec

1

msec msec

10

msec

10

msec

50

msec

100

msec

100

msec

500

msec

I

Observe

1 mark/

2 marks/em 1 mark/ 1 mark/em

2 marks/em 1 mark/ 1 mark/

2 marks/em 1 mark/

1 mark/em

2 marks/em

1 mark/em

1 sec 1 sec 1 mark/ 2 sec 1 sec 2 marks/em 5 sec 5 sec 1 mark/

22. Adjust Sweep Range Registration

Reset

the following controls:

HORIZ.

Upper

DISPLAY

Beam

and

Lower

TIME

Beam

BASE

B X.2

em

em em

em

23. Adjust

Reset

HORIZ.

SOURCE TIME/CM

a.

Time

Connect a cable generator plug-in unit. to

the two vertical input connectors.) Set the time-mark gen-

erator

for a 10 ond marker output. Trigger the sweep LEVEL

control and check between the 1

C160A

adjust

b.

Horizontal

Set the

the time-mark generator for a

put. Check the display

em

cycle/ the capacitors indicated below,

HF

Sweep Rates

the following controls:

Upper

DISPLAY

Beam

Time

and

Base B

Lower

TIME

Beam

BASE B X1

EXT.

.5

JLSEC

Base B HF

to

the external trigger (The

Range

from

the trigger output of the time-mark

INPUT

time-mark signal should

on

still

microsecond trigger output and a 1 microsec-

with

for

em

and 9

in

the

Time

Amplifiers

Time

Base B TIME/CM

between the 1

a display of 1 mark every 2

em

graticule

Base

B unit (see

10

for

linearity of the sweep

em

and 9

if

lines.

switch

to

me

sine-wave marker out-

em

graticule lines. Adjust

necessary.

the

Time

be connected

the

Time

If

not correct,

Fig.

6-9).

.1

JLSEC

and

Base

em

and set

for 1

B

Time

Base B

TIME/CM

Vertical

Plug-In

Deflection Factor 2 v /

Set the time-mark generator

With the two

time

marker of each display near the center

a.

Upper

Switch

back to

first

of the so

the leading edge of the

HORIZ. POSITION

Beam

the

Time

.1

mSEC.

Base B TIME/CM

There should be

marker. Adjust

for

C330

first display remains stationary as the between the adjustment tool

.1

mSEC

and

50

from

the capacitor while checking the reg-

JLSEC

istration.

b.

Lower

Adjust

the

switch

Remove

Beam

C430

Lower

(Fig. 6-12)

Beam

is

moved between the .1

display remains stationary as the

if

necessary, so the

mSEC

the adjustment tool while checking the registration.

.1

mSEC

Units

em

(cal.)

1 microsecond

time

controls, position the

of

the graticule.

switch

to

50

no

horizontal movement

(see

Fig

marker

. 6in

TIME/CM

positions.

JLSEC,

11)

if

necessary,

the Upper

switch

Remove

first

marker

TIME/CM

and

50 JLSEC

marks.

first

then

Beam

is

moved

the

in

positions.

Observe

Linearity

1 cycle/

em

Linearity

1 cycle/

Set both

em

HORIZ. DISPLAY

Reset the marker signal for

Adjust

C372 C350

C472 C450

Location

Upper

Beam

(Fig.

Lower

Beam

(Fig.

switches

50

me

to

TIME

sine-waves and adjust the

Horiz.

6-11)

Horiz.

6-12)

BASE B X.2

Amp

deflection factor of the vertical input plug-ins for about 2 of deflection. Check the displays for 1 cycle/ 1

em

and 9

em

indicated below

Observe

1 cycle/ 1 cycle/

c.

Time

Reset both Set the external trigger rate Time

Base B TIME/CM

indicated

em

the 1

ti

ming

capacitors if necessary.

for

the optimum accuracy of the three sweep rates affected

by

the adjustment.

graticule lines. Adjust the timing capacitors

if

the sweep rates

are

Adjust

em

C364

and

em

Base B

HORIZ.

C384

C464

and

C484

Intermediate

DISPLAY

Upper

Lower

Ranges

switches

to

1 00 microseconds. With the

switch and the marker signal set as

in

the table below, check the sweep rates between

and 9 em grat icule lines. Adjust the

Each

em

between the

not correct.

Location

Beam

Horiz.

Amp

Beam

Horiz.

Amp

to

TIME

BASE B X1

Time

Base

capacitor should be set

.

em

.

B

6-14

®I

Calibration-

Type

555/21A/22A

Time Base B Time-Mark

TIME/CM

1

p.SEC

2

p.SEC

5

p.SEC

10

p.SEC

20

p.SEC

50

p.SEC

If

adjustments were required,

check

this

entire step because of the interaction of the con-

trols.

Remove

connector

the external trigger signal

at

the end of this step.

24. Adjust Delay Start

Reset the following controls:

Generator

1

p.sec

markers 1 mark/ 1 p.sec markers 5

,...sec

markers 1 mark/

1 0

p.sec

10

50

markers

p.sec

markers

p.sec

markers 1 mark/

and

Upper Beam

HORIZ. DISPLAY

Time

Base

SOURCE

LEVEL

TIME/CM

Time

Base

SOURCE SWEEP

LEV TIME/

FUNCTION

EL

CM

Vertical Plug-In Units

Deflection Factor 5 v /

Observe

2 marks /

1 mark/ 2 marks/

it

will

be necessary to re-

from

the trigger

Stop

TIME

BASE A X1

A

UPPER

BEAM Centered 1

mSEC

B

UPPER

BEAM SWEEPS

EACH

'A'

Clockwise

10

p.SEC

em

(cal.)

em

em em

em

ONCE

DLY'D

Adjust

C160C

C160E

INPUT

FOR

TRIG

........

--

Fig.

6-13.

Crt

display

with

the

DELAY

START

justed.

The

brightened portion of the display should move smooth-

ly

across the screen as the 1-10

MULTIPLIER

control correctly

dial

is

ad-

turned.

25. Check Delayed Trigger

Leave connections and controls as they were the preceding step . Set the time-mark generator for 1 second and 100 microsecond mar

B

SWEEP EACH 'A' the tall markers with the trigger the the

dial slowly and observe the motion of the brightened por-

tion of the trace.

rather than

Return

FOR

FUNCTION switch to DLY'D

TRIG.

Lower

Time

Base B LEVEL

moving

the

EACH

SWEEP

'A'

DL

Trigger the Upper

Beam

display

It

should

s.moothly along the display.

FUNCTION switch to

Y'D

TRIG

Time

contro

.

kers

. Now set the

TRIGGERABLE

Base A LEVEL

on

the shorter markers

l.

Turn

the

jump

from

at

the end

milli-

Time

Base

ONCE

Beam

control, and

1-10

marker to marker,

SWEEPS

FOR

display

MULTIPLIER

on

with

ONCE

of

Set the time-mark generator for 1 millisecond markers and trigger the displays with Adjust both beams for normal inten tion visible

Position both beams the

ened portion of the Upper second time marker edge of the magnifi should be the display

control.

Now

The

em fied marker the graticule as

DELAY

The with check the settings of both controls required adjustme

on

the Upper Beam trace.

DELA

YEO

TRIGGER

at the left

is

not correct, adjust

turn

the

brightened portion should be

from

STOP

DELAY

each other, therefore

DELAYED

the right edge), and the leading edge of the magni-

in

the lo•

in

control

START

nt

the Time

on

the

ir

1-10

MULTIPLIER

Beam

(1

em

from

ed

marker

edge

of the graticule (see Fig.

TRIGGER

Ner dis

play should be at the left

the previous display. Adjust

if the display and

DELAY STOP

readjustme

.

Base A

sit

y with a brightened por-

respective centerlines

the left edge) and the leading

in

to 1.00.

display should be

the

Lower

R576,

the

1-10

MULTIPLIER

on

the tenth time marker

is

not correct.

adjustments interact

nt may be required. R

if

the

DELAY

LEVEL

The

Beam

DELAY

R572

STOP

control.

and

bright-

on

display

6-13).

to 9.00.

edge

control

set the

If

START

(1

of

, the

e-

26. Adjust 'A' Intermediate Sweep Rates

Because the

used

in operation, these sweep rates are adjusted with respect Time

Base

Reset

the Time Base A

Time

Base B TIME/CM signal connected to bot n

time-mark gener

displays with the

Set the ened porti marker again Lower Beam

the setting of the 1-

ing

, and reset the dial to the nu

tion. The brightened porti

be

on the te

in

the lowe

cule.

If

not, adjust

Time

conjunction

B.

DELA

on

display

nth

r display should be

Base A in

witf> Time

TIME/Ot. swi

at

or for

Time

Base A LE

YEO

TRIGGER 1-10

of the Up.,er B

and the leadinc edge of the marker

is

at the lef!

10 MlJLTir_:Ef;.

mar

ker

:-.,d tl,

C160E

termed i

ate

Base B

switcf>

verti

10

microsecond markers. Trigger the

on

in

the T

tch

to .S

,.,.

SEC.

cal

inp

uts as before, set the

VEL

control.

MULTIPLIER

t::u'T1

display

ed~

e

of the graticule. Note

dial,

rnb

er determined by this

rl,e upper display should now

t :eadi

ng

at

the left edge of ihe grot

ime

Base

sweep rates are

fo

~

Delayed Sweep

to

10

p.SEC

With the marker

so the bright-

is

on

the second

add 8.00

edge

to the read-

of the marker

A plug-in

and the

in

add

unit

6-15

to

the

i-

.

Calibration-

Type

555/21A/22A

With the set as indicated below, note the ings at

the 1 time) (i

.e. 7.76 to

TIME/CM

with

the brightened portion of the trace

em

and 9

switches and the time-mark generator

1-10

em

graticule lines.

MULTIPLIER

The

dial read-

on

the markers

difference (delay

between the two readings should be within 3% of 8.00

8.24).

It

may be advisable to readjust

C160E

slightly for optimum delay time accuracy of the three sweep

rates affected.

Time

Time-Mark

Generator

1 0

p.sec

markers

50

p.sec

markers

Set the

Time

generator

TIPLIER

Time

Base

Base B TIME/CM

for

1 microsecond markers and turn the 1-10

dial

to

position the brightened porti

A TIME/CM switch

marker as before. Read the 1-10

Base A

TIME/CM

20

p.SEC

50

p.SEC

switch to .1

p.SEC.

MULTIPLIER

and reset the dial to the resultant number.

portion of the Upper tenth marker. is

not

at

Time

Base A plug-in

With the

If the leading edge of the magnified marker

the left edge of the graticule, adjust

TIME/CM

Beam

display should

unit.

switches and the set as indicated below, note the 1-10 the markers

delay time

on

the 1

em

and 9

for

accuracy within 3%.

em

graticule

readjusted to provide optimum delay accuracy

Time

TIME/CM

.5 .5

to 1 p.SEC

Set the time-mark

on

on dial,

The

now

C160C

time-mark

MULTIPLIER

lines

. Check the

C160C

may be slightly

for

Base B

p.SEC

and the

MUL

the second

add

8.00

brightened

be on the

in

generator

readings

the three

sweep rates.

Time

Time-Mark

Generator

1

p.sec

markers

5

p.sec

markers

· 27. Adjust 'A'

Reset

the following controls:

HORIZ.

DISPLAY

Time

TIME/CM

2 5

HF

Sweep

Lower Beam

Time Base A

SOURCE

Time Base B

SWEEP Connect a coax

FUNCTION

from

the trigger output of the time-mark

generator to the external trigger

plug-in

unit

pulses. With the

and set the generator

Time

Base A TIME/CM

Base A

p.SEC p.SEC

Rates

INPUT

TIME

BASE A X1

EXT.

NORMAL

on

for

1 0-microsecond trigger

Base B

TIME/CM

. 1

p.SEC

.1

p.SEC

the

Time

Base

switch and the marker signal set as indicated below, check the sweep rates between the 1 the

Time capacitor should be set rates affected

Time

TIME/CM

. 1 .2 p.SEC .5

em

and 9

em

graticule lines. Adjust

Base A unit

by

if

the sweep rates are not correct.

for

optimum accuracy of the three

the adjustment.

Base A Time-Mark

Generator

p.SEC

1 0

me

sine waves 1 cycle/

5

me

sine

1

p.sec

markers

waves

C160A

Observe

em

1 cycle/

em

1 marker / 2

em

the

at

A

in

The

Remove

completion of

28. Adjust

all input cables, connectors and adapters after

this

step.

Ext.

Controls should be set as follows:

Upper Beam

INTENSITY HORIZ.

SWEEP

DISPLAY

Time Base A

FUNCTION LEVEL TIME/CM SLOPE

-

COUPLING SOURCE

Vertical Plug-In Units

Deflection Factor Input Coupling

Center the two beams

POSITION controls and adjust the

produce spots of normal brightness.

a.

Upper Beam

Rotate the rear -panel Upper trol and observe the Upper spot moves horizontally, adjust

HORIZ

AMP

DC

BAL

zontal movement as the control

•••••••••ooooooooooo

Fig. 6-

14.

Upper

Beam

b. Lower Beam

Rotate the rear-panel

trol.

If the spot moves horizontally on the crt screen, adjust

R436,

the

Lower

6-15)

for

Leave both

wise

(as

no

viewed

Beam

horizontal movement .

EXT. HORIZ

from

Horiz.

DC

Balance

and

Lower Beam

Counterclockwise

EXT

. A

TIEN

and

Time Base B

NORMAL Clockwise .5

mSEC

+

AC EXT.

20 v /em AC

on

the crt screen

Beam

EXT. HORIZ

spot

R326,

control

External

Lower

EXT

(Fig

is

turned .

Horizontal

Beam

HORIZ

. 6-

EXT. HORIZ

AMP

. GAIN controls turned fully clock-

the rear of the

(cal.)

with

INTENSITY

on

the screen.

the Upper

14)

so there

Amplifier

DC

Circuit.

BAL

instrument).

X1

the

HORIZ.

controls to

. GAIN con-

If

the

Beam

EXT

is

no

hori- .

L>

. GAIN con-

control

(Fig.

6-16

Calibration-

Type

555/21A/22A

29. Check

Ext.

Horiz. Gain

and

Adjust

Compensation

Install a

a binding-post adopter to one arm of the tee. Connect a

coax cable external trigger

a.

Upper

Set the

Connect two 18-inch jumper leads together and apply the Amplitude Calibrator signal to

the Upper panel. Connect a short jumper lead SAWTOOTH connector to the

Beam

UHF connector.) Position the With front-panel controls set as square-wove display with the NIER displayed

Switch the baseline on the left edge of the groticule and adjust the Upper 10

em HORIZ. DISPLAY ploy. Check

Return ATTEN VOLTS Switch Upper

C306C observed

Turn clockwise.

b.

Lower

Center the jumper lead rear-panel jumper INPUT CALIBRATOR square-wove display. There zontal deflection fully

Switch the the lower adjust the external horizontal input compensation

cedure

(Fig. the

At control and connectors.

BNC

tee connector on the

from

the other arm of the tee to the

INPUT

connector.

Beam

AMPLITUDE

Beam

vertical plug-in.

adopter

controls.

. Note the woveshope of the square-wove display.

clockwise.

6-15)

EXT. AATEN

the end of this step, turn the lower

will

At

with

the

AMPLITUDE

Beam

EXT. HORIZ.

of horizontal deflection. Now set the Upper

for 1 em

the Upper

X1

and set the

the

AMPLITUDE

Beam

HORIZ.

(Fig. 6-14)

at

the

the Upper

Beam

Lower

with

EXT.

with

the

of the Type K (lower

switch to .2

AMPLITUDE

Beam

just

de~-

with

fully

counterclockwise and remove all jumpers, cables

CALIBRATOR

from

EXT. HORIZ.

(A

be required

least 1

EXT. HORIZ.

switch to

so the woveshope

X1

the calibrator signal to the

HORIZ.

Time

with

external horizontal ottenuotor accuracy and

-:hP.

the

Xl

0 position.

binding-post adopter or BNC-to-

Lower

em

of horizontal deflection must be

CALIBRATOR

GAIN control to display exactly EXT. A TTEN

of horizontal deflection (± 3%).

Beam

HORIZ

AMPLITUDE

CALIBRATOR

DISPLAY

position.

Beam

INTENSITY

Beam

spot

INPUT

Bose

A sawtooth waveform

Beam)

VOLTS

must

the

EXT. HORIZ.

CALIBRATOR

d

for the Upper

Lower

Beam

CAL

OUT

and connect

Time

switch to .2

the binding-post adopter

INPUT

connector

from

INPUT

connector of the Upper

if

the input has a

Beam

spot off the crt screen.

in

step

28,

Time

GAIN control

..

to

on

connector, and move the

HORIZ. DISPlAY

trigger the vertical

Base A

to 2

X1

DISPLAY

CALIBRATOR

to 5 VOLTS

EXT. A TTEN

is

the some as that

control

the crt screen. Move the

unit.

Set the

and trigger the vertical

be

at

least 1

GAIN control turned

to 2 VOLTS

Beam.

VOLTS.

on

the

Time

BNC

LEVEL

and

fully

clockwise.

VOLTS. Positio01

0. Center the dis-

switch to

switch

X1

0. Adjust

fully

Lower

AMPLITUDE em

. Check

by

Adjust

switch

Beam

INTENSITY

the rear

Bose

and the

counter-

of

the pro-

Base

type

VER

Beam

EXT

to

Beam

to

the

hori-

C406C

.5

0

00~~·~·············~

A

Fig.

6-15.

circuit.

-

Adjustments

30. Check

Reset

the following controls:

HORIZ. DISPlAY EXT. HORIZ

Set the Type

for a

.

ottenuotor head of the signal generator .

a.

Upper

Connect the terminated sine-wove signal Upper Upper

of

tude deflection generator the deflettion

kc

350

b.

Lower

Move the terminated signal INPUT

signal. Check the passband of

izontal Amplifier Beam

.

Remove

. GAIN Clockwise

50

kc

output. Connect a 50-

Beam

intensity

the signal generator

on

to

350

.

Beam

connector. Set the signa! generator

the signal

in Lower Beam External Horizontal Amplifier

Ext.

Horiz. Passband

Upper

and

190B

Constant Amplitude Signal Generator

EXT.

HORIZ. INPUT

to

normal and adjust the output ampli-

the crt screen. Set the frequency of the signal

kc,

then increase the output frequency

is

2.8

em.

in

the manner described

from

VERTICAL AMP

in

The

adjustments

and ore done

be used Bose A is Bose B is

for

the adjustments. In the following procedure,

used

for

in

the

some ma

to

produ

for

the Lower Bea

both verl·icol

:::

Lower

Beam

EXT. A TTEN

ohm

connector. Increase the

to

produce 4

The

frequency should be

to

the lower

th

e lower

the

EXT.

HORIZ.

LIFIER

e t

ADJUSTMENTS

nne

he .!pper

amplifiers ore identical

r.

Either

Beam

m.

X1

termination

to

the rear-panel

em

of horizontal

Beam

EXT. HORIZ

for a 50

Beam Exte

for

the

INPUT

.

Time

Bose

sweep and

-,

at

kc

rnal

unit

~

to

the

until

least

output

Hor

Upp

er

may Time Time

.

-

6-17

Calibration-

31.

Set

Front-panel controls should be

Type

555/21A/22A

Vertical Amplifier Gain

Upper Beam

HORIZ.

DISPLAY

Lower Beam

HORIZ.

DISPLAY

Time Base A and Time Base B

TIME/CM SWEEP LEVEL

FUNCTION

set

as

TIME

.5

mSEC AUTO Clockwise

follows:

BASE A X1

BASE B X1

BASELINE

Time

Base A SOURCE

Time

Base

B SOURCE

Vertical Plug-In Units

Deflection Factor Input Coupling

Lay the Indicator Unit

a. Upper Beam

Turn

off

the instrument power Adapter vertical plugTurn

between the interconnecting plug in the

in

and the jack

on

the power

and

UPPER

BEAM

LOWER BEAM

20

v /

em

(cal.)

DC

of

the oscilloscope on one side.

and

install the

in

the plug-in compartment.

allow

a few minutes for warm -up.

Gain

Upper

Adjust

Beam

6-18

Fig. 6-16

. Vertical Amplifier

adlustments

on

bottom

of

Indicator Unit.

Calibration-

Type

555/21A/22A

Install a binding-post

and

connect the with two jumper TUDE

CALIBRATOR control for normal brightness LEVEL

control for a flection adjust 6-16).

the plug -

of

exactly 2 em.

R1

027, the

Remove the jumper

in

unit.

adapter

calibrator

leads

connected

switch to .2

stable

Upper

and

on

the

signal to

and

display. Check for a vertical de-

If

the di

Beam GAIN

Gain

CAL.

the

Gain

together. Set the

VOLTS

. Set the

adjust

splay

amplitude

ADJ

Adjust

Adapter

b. Lower Beam

Install the vertical plug-in unit brator tical deflection. Adjust R2027, the control, not correct.

Remove

in

the Lower Beam vertical plug-in compartment.

32. Adjust

Reset both TIME/CM switches to .5 INTENSITY factor

a.

Upper Beam

Install the 1 Beam vertical plug-in unit. Connect the

-150-volt of

the

Position the free-running

zontal centerline.

AC-the

at

AC for indicator neons show the screen, switch proximately on the centerline across slowly DC

SHIFT 1 millimeter Fig

. 6-16 for the location

It

may of the cedure if the setting

Gain

Adjust

Adapter

and

waveform to

if

the

gain

the

jumper

DC

controls for normal brightness. Set the deflection

of

each

vertical plug-

OX

probe

supply

other

regulated

trace

should move off the screen.

about

5 seconds, then when the horizontal

the

screen.

toward

trace

the centerline, adjust

control so

of

the

be

necessary

with

the

the Indicator Unit. Apply

the

adapter

of

the

lower

and

adapter

Shift

on the INPUT connector

lead

in

the

de

supplies.

Now

switch the input coupling switch to

the

spot

back

to

DC.

If

it starts somewhere off center

that

the

centerline

of

to

slightly readjust the quiescent level

Vertical Position control during this pro-

of

the

DC

between

and

check for 2

lower

Beam Vertical Amplifier is

and

reinstall the Type K

SEC

in

to 5 volts.

Power Supply Unit

trace

(spot) on the

is

approaching

The

spot

R1

091, the

switching

SHIFT

control

should

and

spot

after

the

SHIFT

appears

DC

remain there

b. Lower Beam

Move the

in

to tip connected to the free-running spot input coupling to

DC

and

R2091,

and

remains within 1 millimeter

ing to DC.

probe

the

INPUT of the Type K

watch the motion

the

lower

cable

one

AC.

Beam

from

the

Upper

of

on

(lower

the

regulated

the lower centerline, then switch the

After

about

of

the

DC

SHIFT

control, so the spot

of

Beam vertical plug-

Beam). With the

de

5 seconds, switch

spot.

If

the centerline

OUT connector

Adjust

adapter

AMPLI

INTENSITY

the Time Base A

is

incorrect,

control (see

and

the

lower

Beam GAIN

and

of

probe

upper

leave

the center

appear

as

Upper

remains within

back

controls.

is

changed

voltages, position

necessary, adjust

after

Fig

reinsert

Beam

the

cali-

em

of

ver-

ADJ

adjust

the

the Upper

tip to the

or

to

one

hori-

the switch

beam

ap-

it

proceeds

and

curves

Beam

to DC. See

.

probe

back

appears

switc

of

to

h-

Remove the

the following checks.

-

probe

and

set

the

Indicator Unit upright for

HIGH-FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENTS

The Vertical Amplifier high-frequency

pensation controls

.

adjustments to sional readjustment

it

is

fore

mal periodic recalibration unless frequency response. However, be

signed sine-w quency response of bration high-frequency a fast-rise (step function) input signal. Also the procedures necessary for checking the Vertical Amplifier tubes frequency

33.

no longer than 3 nsec the information nsec following

a.

Plug-In Unit other the instrument

-

before switch to OFF.

recommended

checked

The vertical deflection system

to

respond

ave

frequencies from

the

part

icular plug-in unit used.) This portion

procedure

and

adjusting the compensation controls

operation

Check Transient

To check the vertical system

displayed

Upper Beam

Turn off

vertical unit

making this check. Set

Front-panel controls should

are

the most difficult

be

made.

These controls require only

after

the initial factory calibration, there-

that

they not

they

the

each

time the instrument

equally

of

provides a

operation

well

to

de

the system will

of

to

complete

by

observation

the system

Response

an

is

waveform on the crt screen. The high-frequency

is

contained the

the

oscilloscope

in

the

and

applied

in

the pulse rise

rise.

Upper

in

the

allow

power

Beam plug-in compartment

lower

Beam compartment. Turn on

at

least 15 minutes warm-up time

the

be

Upper Beam

INTENSITY HORIZ.

DISPLAY

Lower Beam

INTENSITY HORIZ.

TIME/CM

VARIABLE

SWEEP FUNCTION

LEVEL VERNIER SLOPE COUPLING Time Base A SOURCE Time Base B SOURCE

DISPLAY

Time Base A

and

be

changed

are

degrading

vertical response should

is

calibrated.

of

the

oscilloscope

voltage

30

is

input pulse with a risetime and

AMPLITUDE

set

information

me. (The upper-limit fre-

depend

on

check

of

the response to

provided

not satisfactory.

the response noted

and

install

as

follows:

Counterclockwise TIME

BAS

Counterclockwise TIME

BASE B X1

Time Base B

.5

JL!)EC CALIBRATED NORMAL

Clockwise

Centered

AC UPPER

BEA

LOWER

delay

line com-

time-consuming

occa

during nor-

the high-

is de-

at

all

the

passband

of

the cali-

of

the vertical

here

are

if

the high-

the

first 450

the

Type K and

the

CALIBRATOR

E A

X1

M

BEAM

-

in

6-19

Calibration-

VOLTS/CM VARIABLE

A C-

DC

Type

555/21A/22A

Type K Plug-In Unit

.05

CALIBRATED AC

The VOLTS/CM switch

in

these positions throughout the high-frequency checks. Use

the controls

on

the display amplitude. Triggering will slope so there wi

result

of

triggering.

Adjust the

ll

DC manual for the plugthe

INPUT from the output th

e termination. Set the

put frequency

tude of

connector

of

approx

imately 0.3 volts.

of

approximately

Position the Upper Beam display

the Upper Beam

INTENSITY

and

VARIABLE

square-wave

be

no irregularities

Balance

of

in

of

the Type K unit. Install a 50-ohm te rmination the

Type K

the Type 107

square-wave

500

controls must

generator

be

for changing the

done

on

the pulse

as

and

connect a

Square-Wave

generato

kc

and

on

the crt screen

control to present a display

be

left

on the negative

top

as

described

coax

in

cable Generator r for

an

and

out-

amp

turn

an

output

that

the

on

is slightly dimmer than normal. Trigger the waveform with

LEVEL

the Time Base A sharp trace. With the Amplitude control

generator, ad 3

em

of

just the display amplitude for approximately

deflection.

,.....

control. Adjust the FOCUS for a

on

the

......

~

,...._

'

square-wave

-

to

li-

a

Fig.

6-18.

J.Lsec

graticule of

High-frequency

/ cm .

as

the pulse.

Type K Plug-

pulse

appearance

a reference, measure the

This

should

be

In

2.5 em

Unit

in

~

no longer than 12 nsec with a

the Type 555.

j

t

_,...

fooii~T

with

10%

2.0

,

em

sweep

to

90%

~

-

rate

risetime

of

.1

-

~-

Fig.

6-17. High-frequency

on

negative

slope,

with

~~

response

sweep

rate

to set

~

voltage

at

.5

step

J.Lsec

~

input,

/ cm.

1-

Compare the crt presentation with the waveform shown

Fig.

6-17. The top

and

smooth, cule lines. The CM

switch in the 1, 2

Return the TIME/CM switch to .5 Beam HORIZ. HORIZ

. POSITION control, center the first positive

wave

pulse on the crt screen. 6-18. The larities be

in

square

top

excess

Set the Time Base A TIME/CM switch to the rising portion play amplitude position the pulse rise

of

each

square-wave

and

should

be

top

should also

parallel with the horizontal grati -

appear

and 5 p.SEC

DISPLAY

switch to

Compare

of

the pulse should be smooth with no irregu -

of

one

with no

tracewidth. The front corner should

appreciable

overshoot

positions.

p.SEC

TIME

BASE

cycle should

level wi

. Set the

A X.2. With the

the display with

or

rolloff.

.1 p.SEC.

of

the square-wave pulse. Decrease the dis·

to

present exactly 2.5

as

indicated in Fig. 6-19. Using tht

em

of

th

the

deflection

triggering

be

level

TIME

Uppe

square

Fig

Center

and

Fig. 6-19. J.Lsec

b. Lower Beam

plugpartment Turn the

in

up. Allow 15 to 20 minutes lowed to cool. Reset the fronttions given

/

INPUT position the

r

Lower Beam dimmer than normal. Trigger the display with

.

the scribed

/ em,

Appearance

for

checking

of

system

fast-rise

risetime.

pulse

with

sweep

rate

of

Turn off the oscilloscope power. Remove both vertical

in

units, then insert the Type K

and

the other unit

power

on

again

at

the first

of

this step.

Connect the signal from the

of

the-Type K through

lower

Beam display

INTENSITY

B

LEVEL

control. Check the high -frequency characteristics of

lower

Beam Vertical Amplifier

in

the previous

paragraphs

in

and

control

in

the Lower Beam com-

the Upper Beam compartment.

allow

at

if

the instruments

square-wave

least 10 minutes warm

have

panel

controls

to

generator

the

50-ohm terminat ion,

on

the crt screen . Turn the

to

present a display slightly

and

for the

delay

Upper

the

Time Base

line

Beam.

been

the posi-

to

as de-

NOTE

If

the

high-frequency Amplifiers cated

by

and

the

characteristics

delay

lines

preceding

are

checks,

of

the

satisfactory

do

not

Vertical as

make

indi-

any

.02

al-

the

and

6-20

Calibration-

Type

555/21A/22A

adjustments through check,

34. Analysis

If

the operation of the vertical system the tubes described below, quired

of

The operating characteristics Amplifier tubes of the instrument. A

is

system acteristics of these tubes unit. Since of time, restore proper high-frequency response. before extensive

it

or

36

step

exchange

and

proceed

37.

of

the Display

any

directly to

previous checks indicated

is

in

the Vertical Amplifier should

and

perhaps

some adjustments

the compensation controls.

and

are

critical for the high -frequency operation

usually

caused

tube

characteristics normally

may

be

necessary

changes

change

in the transient response of the

by changes

and

the tubes

to

replace

have taken

tubes.

Omit

steps

34

the

passband

that

the high-frequency

not up to specifications,

be

checked first

will

be

balance

of the Vertical

in

the operating char-

in

the vertical plug-in

change

over a period

them occasionally

By

replacing tubes

place

in

their operating

re-

characteristics, adjustment of the high-frequency compensation controls

If

there

the previous check, but the top was generally level

risetime moved even minor irregularities may indicate

fier tubes

will

be

minimized.

were

minor irregularities

was

less than 12 nsec, the irregularities can

as

described

in

step 36c. Keep

in

the

that

are

beginning

to

change

their characteristics . If

top

of the pulse

and

be

in

mind, however, that

the Vertical Ampli-

the

re-

the compensation controls have frequently been adjusted

remove minor irregularities, the Vertical Amplifier tubes

should

be

checked.

as

to

in

to

conditions tubes have

ably

do

changed

(or unless

not become severe until the Vertical Amplifier

their

the

operating

compensation controls have been previ-

characteristics consider-

ously misadjusted).

If

the risetime

-I

n Unit, turn off the instrument power

Plug

Type K with a Type P or Type

power

and

time with the test unit.

reduced to 2.5 em, use the risetime over

risetime of the system should

risetime with the Type K

was

longer than 12 nsec with the Type K

TU-7

and

Test Unit.

replace the

Turn

on the

allow 10 to 15 minutes warm-up. Check the rise-

(If

the display amplitude cannot be

4

em

center 3.6 em.) With the plug-in test units,

be

was

less than 10 nsec.

lor.ger than 12 nsec, but

the

of vertical deflection

and

check

If

the

is

less than 10 nsec with the test unit, the Type K was causing the rolloff

and

should

be

long, first check the Vertical Amplifier tubes

recalibrated.

b I R th I · test unit

I -

.

Qi

.

-~~

-

If

the risetime

as

and

reinstall the T K .

is

still too

described

If the

part

of

controls

was

the pulse top affected by the high-frequency

quite irregular, sloping, the Vertical Amplifier tubes should voltages

and

balance

as

described below.

or

at

an

incorrect level,

be

checked for correct

In

general, these

,.,...

~

•

.;;.

I!

-

11

Fig.

6-21.

Location

of

Lower

Beam

delay

line

adjustments

After the Vertical Amplifier tubes have been checked

r

eplaced are frequency inductors

of these controls

The controls

play

as necessary,

if

still not satisfactory, the

will

are

to

shown

be

adjusted can

of the fast-rise pulse.

the high-frequency characteristics

delay

line

and

possibly the high-

require adjustment. The locations

in

Figs.

6-16, 6-20

be

determined from the dis-

NOTE

Due

to

the

ous

high-frequency

adjustment

not

be

These

eyesight,

attempted

adjustments

manual

considerable

extensive

of

amount

interaction

compensation

these

controls

unless it

is

require a calibrator

dexterity,

of

time.

between

controls, correct

is

difficult

and

absolutely

perseverance

the

necessary

with

.

and 6-2

numer-

should

good

and

1.

.

a

Fig.

6-20.

Location

of

Upper

Beam

delay

line

adjustments.

The displayed pulse may

areas

: the rise,

the

front corner

be divi

ded into three genera l

and

the top. Each of the

6-21

Calibration-

1---

~14-

\ I

'

-and

Type

Delay

HF

lndu1ctors

"last

capacitors

555/21A/22A

425

ns..C

-~

line..,..

Termination

4"-

Network

·~

De

Information

-+--+--"""-~

Sweep

rate:

0.1 pSEC/CM

r+-

b.

Grid Bias

Short the two distributed amplifier grid lines together with

the shorting strap.

V1

054

of

and the grid bios of between the grid line both tubes of

- 2.5 volts. Bias,

This

may

be

pin 1 of

each

V1

pair

and

any

pair not having bios between

and

the

done

064. With a de voltmeter, measure

of tubes by checking

either

cathode

balance

which

by connecting to pin 1

the

(pin

is

voltage

2).

Replace

-1

dependent

and

on

bios, changes during the first few hours of operation of new

be

tubes. Therefore new replacement tubes should for

at

least 10 hours before checking their balance.

c.

Overall

Balance

operated

Fig.

6-22.

Portions

of

the

quency

adjustmenh.

displayed

pulse

the

high-fre-

high-frequency compensation controls affects a particular point on the display. Fig. 6-22 relates the displayed pulse to the oscilloscope controls that affect the various portions of tile waveform. The

the front corner,

and

the

first 25 nsec following the corner

controlled primarily by the high-frequency inductors

Vertical Amplifier

of

crt end is

controlled by the

and

by

the inductors

the delay line. The next 425 nsec of the pulse top

delay

line

and

The final portion of the pulse contains only

and

is

not

is

used

affect~d

as

the reference level for adjusting the pulse top.

Distortion

pedance

mismatches

work. Since the

by the compensation controls.

in

the

top

of

the pulse

in

the

delay

line

is

reverse terminated, the controls

appearance

upper

part

of

of the rise,

in

and

capacitors

at

termination adjustments .

de

information

This

portion

is

usually caused

line

and

termination net-

by im-

the

are

the the

nearest the crt affect the portion of the display nearest the

any

front corner. The effect of

particular

on the displayed pulse depends also on the setting

delay

line capacitor

of

ad-

iacent capacitors.

All

of the trimmer capacitors

line,

as

well

as

the capacitors

tion network affect the display similarly

in

and

the

delay

inductors

and

line

and

in

plate

the termina -

ore adjusted the same manner. During the procedure given below, all of these controls will

35.

Check Vertical Amplifier Tubes

Lay

the oscilloscope on one side

be

referred to

as

the

delay

to

reveal the Vertical

line.

Amplifier circuitry. Fig. 6-16 shows the locations of test points

used

in

the following checks. The circuit numbers given

are those for the Upper Beam Vertical Amplifier. The procedure applies equally well for the Lower Beam.

The tubes

pairs

that

the Vertical Amplifier circuits

balance

each

other

and

mu5t be

are

arranged

closely matched

in

to avoid distortion of high-frequency signals. The two tubes of a pair

a.

With the de voltmeter, check the voltage grid (pin voltage must

any measured with a 20,000

least + 150 volts

are

positioned side-by-side on the chassis.

Suppressor

Grid

Voltage

at

7)

of each

of

be

the distributed amplifier tubes. The

between + 165

and

+ 185 volts. Re place

tube that has a suppressor voltage outside t

0/volt

if

measured with a 5000

meter. (Voltage must

0/volt

the suppressor

his

range,

be

at

meter.)

Set the

turn the

SWEEP

LEVEL

FUNCTION switch to AUTO

control fully clockwise

and

running trace. Determine the electrical center of the crt beam

by shorting the vertical deflection plates together (not to

of

the

ground). Note the position used

as

and

interconnecting socket. ance more than 1

a reference for checking balance. Remove the short

position the trace to the electrical center just determined.

Now

short together pins 1

This

of the Vertical Amplifier. The trace should not shift

em

from the electrical center. If trace shift ex-

ceeds this limit, check the fier

as

described

d.

Distributed Amplifier

in

the following

Position the free-running trace

trace. This

and

3 on the ·vertical plug-in

will determine the overall bal -

balance

of the distributed ampli-

paragraphs.

Balance

at

the electrical center of

the crt beam. Short together the two common grid lines of

and

the distributed amplifier trical center. The shift must not

shifts more than this, the

be

checked. Remove the shorting

pair

balance

.

Each pair of tubes

in

pair to cutoff

and

done by raising the

Bias voltage may

necting to the

pair

should not

It

is

usually most convenient to start

+ 225-volt supply. Trace shift

exceed 2 mm.

tributed amplifier

noting the amount of trace shift. This

cathode

be

applied

and

note the trace shift from elec-

exceed 2 mm

balance

is

checked

of

each pair of tubes should

strap

before checking the

by

separately

voltage (pin

2)

with a voltmeter

at

one end of the dis-

record the direction

trace deflection caused by each pair of tubes. Replace

in

pair producing more than 2

again

if

tubes

bias

of tubes

balance

If

there

may

be

and

of the distributed amplifier.

is

obtained

are

replacing where necessary, recheck the total

still more than 2

by exchanging the two tubes of a pair.

mm

trace

shift. Check the grid

replaced. After checking all six pairs

mm

total trace shift,

Switching the tubes reverses the directio n of the trace shift

produced by the

tributed amplifier, the

equal

the amount

will show

to produce a

if

Che

after

exchanging tubes.

that

in

the

other

and

direction of deflection

which pair should

balanced

ck

the total

pair. To

balance

produce a

tota

l deflection

balance

in

one

direction. Inspection of the record of

caused

have

their tubes interchanged

condition .

of the distributed amplifier

BASELINE,

center the free-

position

will

be

. If the trace

biasing the

to + 225 volts.

lead

by con-

caused

by any

and

amount of

any

balance

in

the dis-

direction must

by each pair

again

is

6-22

I

~I

e.

Driver

Stage

Balance

Position a free-running crt beam. Short V1

043

to

together

check the trace should not shift more than 5 amount, replace the driver tubes

f.

Input

Amplifier

With the distributed amplifier

anced

as

described of the Vertical Amplifier. 1 em, the unbalance and

V1

024.

Try

interchanging the two tubes. If this does not

produce overall

balance,

were new aged-and-matched tubes,

g.

Vertical

If tubes

the gain calibration

36.

Gain

have

been replaced

and

de

shift compensation

procedure

Adjust High-Frequency Compensation

trace

the two grids (pin

balance

Balance

above,

is

in

the input amplifier tubes,

replace the input amplifier tubes

and

Balance

.

at

the electrical center of the

of

the input driver

mm.

to

and

again

check the overall

If

trace shift

as

in

the Vertical Amplifier, check

7)

of

If

shift exceeds this

achieve balance.

driver st

as

age

is

now more than

listed

in

the Parts list.

given earlier

V1

033

stage

tubes bal-

balance

The procedures for adjusting the high-frequency controls

are

the same for both beams; therefore they will

scribed for only

you

read

through the entire procedure before attempting to

any

make

Fig. delay

the

As

adjustments.

6-23. Normal

line

section

near

adjustment

at

the

crt

a rule, the inductors setting unless they the

approximate

physico! positions of the inductor pacitor cores (slugs), those

of the other. Figs. 6-

of the beams.

pattern

rear

of

the

should

be

and

have

been badly misadjusted. To check

compare

23

and

It

is

recommended that

of

trimmer

instrument.

fairly

even

capacitors

Trimmer

(see

text).

will

not require pre-

the controls of one

6-24 show the

one

physical settings of the slugs when the instrument

be de-

capacitors

and

beam

apprcximate

is

properly

calibrated.

The capacitors

rear

of

shown

the instrument generally follow a wavy

in section nearer the crt should trimmer capacitors nearest the crt may

No slug should extend completely into the

The positions of the

by shining a light operate set

i, pairs, both slug;

at

approximately the

in

the long section

of

the

the illustration. However, those

appear

fairl1 even. The 3 or 4

be

as

far out

as

body

of the capacitor.

slu

th

gs

rough the coil

same

the delay line shield, nor

in

the

indu

form~.

in

a pair of inductors should be

depth

in

delay

line patte

in

!he

delay

some what irregular .

cror~

may

be

Since the inductors

the c

e;il

forms.

. The

V1

in

at

rn

seen

and

014

the

ca-

the

as

line

to

Calibration-

Type

t

l1071

l1073

Fig.

6-24.

inductors.

rect, that it

is

If

Approximate

If

the slug positions

do

not adjust them the inductors recommended

the inductors

check, recheck the characteristics of the displayed pulse.

will

There off can

now

be before making each

of

equal

the slugs

small amounts until the overshoot

Adjustment

in

formed

1. played portion

the following

Remove major irregularities from the

pulse with the

of

the pulse should match 107

Square-Wave

2.

Adjust the rise

ductors

and

the corner should

ities following the front corner. (Adjust only with a Type P

or

Type TU-7 Plug-In Test Unit.)

in

3. Remove minor irregularities from the

by "touching

The pulse

top

ularities exceeding

107

and

the Type K).

Since the tubes ·

above

the

making

de

lay line capacitors.

a.

Th

characteristics, the tubes must

any

Remove

e purpose waveform without introducing more than a minimum number of minor irregularities. The first be

raised, l

reference leve

top

pulse

will appear introduce minor irregularities to the display while attempting to adjust the level of the pulse can

be

kept

gested here.

L1014 l1024

slug

in

have

that

are

adjusted

probably

L1036 L1046

positions

the inductors

at

in

the

high-frequency

are

this time. However,

been misadjusted

the slugs

be

set

as

a result

be

some rolloff or overshoo

approximately cor-

by

illustrated.

of

corrected later, but overshoot should

any

other

in

of

the high-frequency controls should

the

height of the reference level.

Generator

and

compensation adjustment

inductors

delay

top

l1

014

and

l1

024 clockwise by

is

removed.

order

:

line adjustments. The adjustable

should

be

level, fairly regular

and

a Type K Plug-In

front corner of the pulse with the in-

last four capacitors. The rise should

be

square

with no overshoot

top

up"

the adjustment

should

be

smooth

one

tracewidth. (Adjust with the Type

in

the Vertical Amplifier can affect all of

of

the delay line capacitors.

and

continuous with no irreg-

be

adjustments except minor touching up of the

Major

owered

at

Irregularities

of

this step

l.

When

a minimum by following the procedure sug-

is

to produce a level top on the

or smoothed

ihe !evel

as

a straight line.

part

of !he pulse top must

as

required

and

slope

It

top

. These irregularities

555/21A/22A

L1354 L13SS

variable

if

it

a large amount,

top

are

appears

this preliminary

t.

Roll-

be

removed

s.

Turn

be

per-

of the dis-

and

(Use

a Type

Unit.)

be

fast

or

and

irregular-

of the pulse

checked before

to

match the

correct, the

is

very easy to

6-2

3

Calibration-

With the Type K

Type

555/21A/22A

Unit

installed

in

the plug-

in

compartmenl of the beam being calibrated, set up the display as indicated in

the transient response check (step

Fig.

play similar to

~18.

Turning the capacitor slug clockwise the affected portion of the display, clockwise

will

raise the level. of the displayed pulse needs to each trimmer capacitor

in

the delay line by a small equal

33),

and

obtain a dis-

will

and

If

the entire adjustable portion

be

raised or lowered, turn

tend to lower

turning it counter-

amount. Do not watch the crt display while adjusting these

controls, but rather watch the adjustment tool to see that each capacitor display to see what further adjustments capacitor display, minor irregularities

It

only certain segments of the pulse top require adjustment to the proper level, it tions that

ments

are

is

turned

an

equal amount.

is

turned

an

equal amount without observing the

will

be minimized.

is

usually best to begin with the por-

are

farthest from the correct level. These adjust-

are

Then

observe the

required.

If

each

also made by adjusting the capacitors without

watching the crt display. The portion of the display affected

by any particular capacitor can

be

located by turning the capacitor slightly while watching the crt display, then returning

it

to the original position.

locate

the group of capacitors affecting the portion of the display to be adjusted, then turn each capacitor

in

the group by a small amount.

After adjusting one segment of the delay line, check the display again. Continue adjusting small groups of capacitors by

this

of the display. Periodically switch the TIME/CM to 1

procedure to smooth

p.SEC

to check the level of the display.

justing each segment by a small amount

of

gradually smoothing

pulse.

It

is

not necessary ularities. When the top ably straight

and

level, the display

starting point for the risetime

and

partially correct the level

This

method of ad-

will

and

straightening the top of the

at

this time to remove minor irreg-

of

the pulse

will

and

smoothing adjustments

have the effect

appears

to be reason-

provide a satisfactory

and

that follow.

b. Adjust Rise

When the level of the pulse top time of the system using the Type K Wave

Generator response check. no overshoot, no adjustments should

frequency inductors. Remove minor irregularities

top

as

described below,

If

the risetime

has overshoot

or Type

TU-7

and

Front

Corner

is

correct, recheck the rise-

and

as

described previously

If

the risetime

if

is

longer than 12 nsec or

or

appears to need adjustment, use a Type P

Plug-In

Test

is

now less than

necessary.

Unit

to adjust the high-frequency

Type 107 Square-

in

the transient

12

be

made of the high-

in

if

the front corner

nsec with the pulse

inductors. A Type K should not be used for these adjustments because the performance of the system would then depend on the particular combination of the plug-in unit

is

beam that Type

TU-7

calibrated with that plug-in. The Type P and

units contain pulse generators with fast-rise pulses

and

the

of known characteristics.

The high-frequency compensation inductors consist of three

pairs

of

pairs affect the pulse appearance, the greatest effect

variable coils shown

duced by l1014

and

l1024 Vertical Amplifier. Generally these two coils sufficient adjustment of the rise

tions

in

the other inductors

in

Fig.

~20

.

Although all three

in

the input amplifier stage of the

and

are

corner, if the slug posi-

approximately correct. How-

will

provide

is

pro-

ever,

if

the risetime pair, the inductors in

the driver stage of the Vertical Amplifier can also

is

not short enough after adjusting this

at

the crt end of the delay line

adjusted.

With the Type P partment of the beam under to warm up for

secured tightly. Set the A

(or

B)

X1, pulse display for 3 and

the sharpest possible focus for viewing the pulse display.

or

Type TU-7 Test Unit

about

10 minutes.

HORIZ.

and

the TIME/CM switch

em

of vertical deflection. Use a dim trace

in

ca

libration, allow the instrument

Be

DISPlAY

the plug-

sure the plug-in unit

switch to Time Base

to

.1

p.SEC.

The portion of the pulse top immediately following the

corner

is

controlled by both the high-frequency inductors and

some of the delay line capacitors. Due to this interaction,

is

usually necessary

to

readjust the four delay line capacitors

nearest the crt after each adjustment of the inductors, to determine the correct inductor seHings. However, do not adjust any other delay line capacitors irregularities

in

the pulse top

will

at

this time. Minor

be

removed later using

the Type K unit.

If

the risetime

increase the inductance of l1014 slugs equal small amounts This

may produce some overshoot which can

is

too long

and

the front corner has rolloff,

and

l1024 by turning the

in

the counterclockwise direction.

adjusting the four capacitors nearest the crt. Continue alter-

nately adjusting the two inductors

until

a slight overshoot

appears

and

the four capacitors

that cannot

be

the capacitors. Then bock off the inductors slightly until the

2

overshoot

is

removed

and

readjust the capacitors for a

straight line out to the corner of the pulse. Set the TIME/CM

switch to 2

correct, then switch back to

If cannot it

will

l1024.

11SEC

to

be

sure the level of the front corner

.1

p.SEC.

the front comer of the pulse has minor overshoot that

be

removed with the four capacitors nearest the crt,

be

necessary

Turn

the slug

to

decrease the inductance of

in

each of these inductors clockwise by

a small amount, then recheck the crt display and adjust the four capacitors inductors

and

capacitors

as

before. Repeat the small adjustment of the

if

necessary.

After adjusting the input amplifier inductors, recheck the

risetime.

justed. The inductors l1355) the previous adjustments, but

If

are

it

is

still too long, the other inductors may

at

adjusted

the crt end

in

approximately the some manner

will

of

the delay line (l1354-

not have

as the crt display. (These inductors compensate primarily for capacitance of the crt deflection plates.)

If

you adjust

l1

036

and

l1

046

in

the driver Vertical Amplifier, set them to provide the squarest corner without causing irregularities following the front corner. They probably

will

not produce overshoot when they

After completion of the inductor adjustments, check the

displayed pulse

c.

Remove Minor Irregularities

again

for risetime

and

irregularities.

Since the adjustments for a level pulse top

t

ime

often introduce small irregularities, the removal of all minor irregularities should istics

are

line

satisfactory. The trimmer capacitors

are

used for removing

Touching up the delay line capacitors

be

left until the other character-

or

minimizing these irregularities .

will

pulse risetime.

and

those

in

com-

Adjust the

in

order

be

removed by

removed with

l1

014 and

be

ad-

much

effect on

stage

of the

are

adjusted.

and

short rise-

in

the delay

not affect the

be

is

it

is

as

6-24

Calibration-

Type

555/21A/22A

Install the Type K under calibration. Apply the fast-rise square-wave signal from

the Type 107 Square-Wave Generator through a

ohm termination to the

Set the switch to

to irregularities from the top of the displayed pulse.)

tion network line. display adjacent to the reference level with subsequent adjustment of the higher frequency controls.

While adjusting these capacitors

larities, observe the effects on the crt display. The adjustment

tool

introduce extra capacitance

in ful about capacitors of one group

lapping

procedure. Since there

controls, at the adjusting each group switch to the 2

level to restore the proper display level.

larity tends to move sideways on the display as capacitors

minimum distortion (the smoothest curve)

ther adjustment until after other capacitors

been adjusted.

tors should shoot.

minimized, check the pulse characteristics

in compensation controls have been adjusted correctly, the top of the pulse should

less of the position

37.

partment

Beam compartment. Allow 10 to 15 minutes warm-up. Set

front-panel controls

TIME/CM

Time

--

(Minus

Adjustment

In

this way the lower frequency controls affecting the

that

is

used to remove minor irregularities should not

Fig. 6-1

first.

During these adjustments,

When the front corner of the pulse

After the minor irregularities

Figures 6-17 through 6-19. When all

is

to subdivide the

apparent

designed for low capacitance.

10 capacitors

will

result

it

will

later

of

the pulse top.

is

be

Do

not readjust the high-frequency inductors .

Check

Install the Type K Plug-

SWEEP

SOURCE

and

HORIZ.

lEVEL TIME/CM

DISPLAY

FUNCTION AUTO

in

the plug-in compartment of the beam

INPUT

of the Type K Plug-In

switch to .2

Base A (or

slope must

of

the

delay

and

progress toward the crt

delay

each

as

in

a smoother display

be

adjustment

adjustment of

adjusted.

adjusted for the squarest corner without over-

is

necessary

of

p.SEC

position momentarily to recheck the

If

appear

of

the TIME/CM switch.

p.SEC,

the

B)

Xl,

and

be

used to eliminate triggering

line should begin

to

the circuit. The tool illustrated

line into overlapping groups of

. Include the last two

part

of

the next group.

extensive interaction between the

to

underadjust each capacitor

of

adjacent capacitors

any

ten capacitors, turn the TIME/CM

particular capacitor. After

necessary, readjust the

it

may

this occurs, set the capacitor for

in

the pulse

as

a straight smooth line regard-

HORIZ. DISPLAY

set the SlOPE switch

at

the termina-

end

of the delay

will

be

adjusted first,

remove minor irregu-

It

is

usually help-

or

This

at

the

end

of

will

change

delay

appear

that

an

irregu-

one

and

postpone

in

the group have

is

reached, the capaci -

top

have been

again

of

the high-frequency

with those

of the

three over-

Vertical Passband

In

Unit

in

the

the other vertical plug-in unit

as

follows:

Upper

Lower Beam

Time Base A

Beam

and

Time Base B

Upper Beam com-

Time Bose A

Time Base B

BASEliNE Ciockwise 1

mSEC

UP?ER

BEN.,;

in

the lower

X1

50-

Unit.

the

line

fur-

Type K

VOlTS/CM VARIABlE

A

C-DC

a.

Upper

Beam

Install a 50-ohm termination on the

the Type K. Set the Type

an

Generator for of 0.2 volts tion (using an play on the upper horizontal centerline FOCUS control for the sharpest focus of the edges of the display.

Adjust the signal generator to produce a vertical deflection of 3 to approximately 30 the frequency to produce exactly 2.1

tion.

quency should now

the risetime. is greater tions, the indication affecting the rise

b.

turn on the power again. Apply the sine-wave signal the signal generator to the Type K Unit compartment. After a brief warm-up period, check the passband

centered

of

38.

base Base A; base

a.

nector to the

the display with the Time Base A lEVEl control. Check for

Delayed Pulse amplitude between 5

layed Trigger pulse should move smoothly across the screen as

em

This

The passband

less than

than 30

Lower Beam

Turn

off the instrument, exchange the plug-in units and

of

the

about

Remove the input signal and the termination

this step.

Check Front-Panel Outputs

Six

outputs

units: Amplitude Calibrator; Delayed Trigger from

and

unit.

Reset the following controls:

LEVEl TIME/CM

Deflection Factor 5 v Input Coupling

Delayed

Connect a coaxial

the

DElAYED

Remove the coaxial cable.

output frequency of 50

and

connect the output to the 50-ohm termina-

adapter

on the crt screen. Increase the signal frequency

is

the upper-

be

of

In

general,

12

nsec, the upper-limit 3-db down point will

me.

and

lower

the lower horizontal centerline.

are

provided from the oscilloscope

Sawtooth

(The

calibrator has been checked previously).

Upper

Trigger from Time Base A

INPUT

TRIGGER

!Upper

if

necessary). Center the signal dis-

me.

Observe the crt display

limit

3-db down poin

at

least 30

the vertical system

if

the risetime with the Type K

Beam)

.05 CAliBRATED DC

190B

me.

INPUT

Constant-Amplitude Signal

kc

and

em

of vertical deflec-

t.

The signal fre-

is

closely related to

connector of

an

ampl

itu

de

adjust the

and

adjust

Unit

be

If

the passband does not meet specifica-

is

that

the inductors

front corner require adjustmen

Beam vertical circuitry, with the display

and

+Gate

Time Base A

Beam Vertical Plug-In

cable

from the

of the Upper Beam plug-in unit. Trigger

1-10

MUlTIPliER

and

the capacitors

t.

in

the Lower

signals from each time-

Clockwise 10

p.SEC

/em

(cal.)

DC

DLY'D

TRIG.

and

10 volts. The

control

from

Beam

at

the end

and

time-

Time-

OUT con-

is

turned.

De-

6-25

Calibration-

Type

555/21A/22A

b.

'A'

Sawtooth

Set the VOLTS/CM switch on the Type K to 5

Time

Base B

probe to the

Time

to the and

check the sawtooth waveform for

and

130

+GATE output on the Time Base A unit. Set the VOLTS/CM

switch to 1. Check the

between 20

c.

170 volts.

Move the probe from the SAWTOOTH output to the

Remove the probe.

'B'

Sawtooth

Reset the following controls:

and

+Gate

and

TIME/CM

INPUT

Base A SAWTOOTH output. Trigger the display

and

of

35 volts.

and

switch to 50

the

Type K

+Gate

waveform for

+Gate

,...SEC.

and

Connect the

connect the

an

amplitude between

probe

an

amplitude

set the

lOX

tip

Time Base A

TIME/CM

2mSEC

Time Base B

LEVEL

TIME/CM

Clockwise .5mSEC

Upper Beam Plug-In Unit

Deflection Factor 5 v Input Coupling

Connect the

Upper Beam vertical plug-in unit

Time

Base B SAWTOOTH output. Trigger the Upper Beam display with the Time Base A Base B sawtooth waveform for and

170 volts.

Move the probe to the Time Base B

check for an amplitude between 20

the probe.

lOX

probe to the

LEVEL

/em

(cal.)

DC

INPUT

and

an

connector on rne

the probe tip to the

control. Check the Time

amplitude between 130

+GATE

and

35 volts. Remove

output

and

6-26

SECTION 7

a or

amp

BHS

c

cer em comp cps crt

CSK

dio div •

EMC

EMT

ext

f

F&l

FHS

Fil

HS

g or G

Ge

GMV h

hex

HHS

HSS

HV

ID

incd

int

k or K

kc

m

me

PARTS

Replacement ports ore Changes to Tektronix instruments qre sometimes mode to accommodate improved

as

components improvements developed ordering ports, to include the following information any

suffix, instrument type, serial number,

If a port you hove

local Tektronix Field Office

amperes binding carbon cerom1c centimeter composition cycles cathode-roy counter sunk diameter division electrolytic, metal cased electroyltic, metal tubular external farad

focus

head

flat fillister gigo, germanium guaranteed

henry hexagonal hex

head hex socket steel high voltage inside diameter incandescent internal kilohms or kilo kilocycle milli, or megacycle

they become available,

head

steel

per

second

tube

and

intensity

steel

head

steel

9

or

10

mm1mum

steel

(10

1

10

-

liST

PARTS

available

in

our engineering department.

ordered

will

and

ORDERING INFORMATION

from

and

has

been replaced with a new or improved port, your

contact you concerning

ABBREVIATIONS

value

1

)

DIAGRAMS

or

through your local Tektronix Field Office.

to give you the benefit of the latest circuit

and

modification number

AND

It

is

therefore important, when

in

your order: Port number including

any

change

if

applicable

in

port number.

SYMBOLS

mm

meg

or

met.

p.

n

OD

OHS

p

PHS

piv plstc

PMC

poly Prec

PT

PTM

RHS

rms

sec

Si

S/N

t or T

TD

THS

tub.

v or V

Vor

w

w/

w/o

ww

millimeter megohms

M

metal micro, or

no no, or 1 o-

ohm outside diameter oval pico, pan

head peak inverse voltage plastic paper, polystyrene precision paper paper round root mean second silicon serial number tero, or toroid truss tubular volt variable watt with without wire-wound

or

10-

head

or

J0-'

metal cased

tubular or plastic, tubular, molded head

10'

head

.

mega

6

9

steel

2

steel

square

2

steel

(1

6

0

)

Use

SPECIAL

xooo ooox

•

000-000

Port first Port removed after this serial number. Asterisk preceding Tektronix Port Number indicates manufactured by

or Port number indicated

added

at

this serial number .

reworked or checked components.

0 Internal screwdriver adjustment.

Front-panel adjustment or connector.

NOTES

is

AND

direct replacement .

SYMBOLS

or

for Tektronix,

7-1

Parts

List-Type

555

EXPLODED

VIEW-FRONT GROUP

7-2

®®

REF. NO.

1

PART

NO.

333-047 6-00

---

213-0088-00

EFF

SERIAL/ .

MODEL

EXPLODED

NO.

DISC.

VIEW-FRONT

Q

T

Y.

1 PANEL, front

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

-

5

SCREW,

GROUP

thread forming

DESCRIPTION

1

4-40

x

/

4

inch

Parts

PHS

Ust-Type

phillips

555

2 366-0060-00

366-0115-00

7000 10869 10870

- - - - - -

213-0004-00

3 262-0212-00

------

260-0253-00

------

210-0413-00 21

0-0840-00

21

0-0013-00

210-0207-00

4 366-0033-00

366-0148-00 10870 1

-7000

10869 1 KNOB, FOCUS,

------

213-0004-00

366-0033-00 7000 10869

5

366-0148-00

10870 1

- - - - -

213-0004-00

401-0004-00 7000

6

8999X

------

213-0012-00

7 366-0040-00 7000

366-0160-00 10870

10869

------

213-0004-00 366-0031-00

8

------

213-0004262-0213-00

9

00

------

260-0269-00

10 406-0457-00

11

------

210-0583-00 21

0-0046-

00

12

214-0153-00

13

406-0464-00

------

21

0-

0406-00

21

0-0004-00

1

KNOB

1

-

1 1

-

1 SWITCH, ullwired

-

1 1 1 1 LUG, solder,

.

-

1 1

-

1

-

1

1 1

-

1 1

-

1 1

-

1

-

1

-

2 2

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR, large black

KNOB, AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR,

Includes: SCREW,

SWITCH, AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR, wired

Includes:

Mounting Hardware: (not included) NUT WASHER, .390 ID x LOCKW

KNOB, FOCUS,

Includes:

SCREW, KNOB, INTENSITY, KNOB, INTENSITY,

Includes:

SCREW,

CAM, nylon

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCRE:w,

KNOB, HORIZ. DISPLAY, KNOB, HORIZ. DISPLAY,

Includes:

SCREW, KNOB,

Includes:

SCREW, SWITCH, HORIZ. DISPLAY,

Includes:

SWITCH, unwired

BRACKET,

Mounting Hardware For Miniature Pot:

FASTENER, BRACKET,

set,

, hex, %-

ASHER,

set,

thread cutting, 4-40 x % inch

set, 6-

HORIZ. POSITION,

set,

switch

NUT, hex, 1/4-32 LOCKWASHER, internal,

support

Mounting NUT, hex, 4- LOCKWASHER, internal,

3

6-32 x

32

lfe

UPPER UPPER

6-32 x

32

6-32 x

inch

/

1

/

x

2 9

/

internal,

inch

3

/

16

UPPER UPPER

3

/

16

3

/

x

3

/

5

x

HSS

16

inch

16

OD

17

lfe

x

BEAM, small black BEAM, small charcoal

inch

HSS

BEAM, small black

BEAM, small charcoal

inch

HSS

UPPER UPPER

inch

HSS

UPPER

inch

HSS

UPPER

inch

/16

.400

snap, double pronged

Hardware

40

3

/

x

16

: {not included)

inch

#4

large

charcoal

/

inch

16

FHS

phillips

BEAM, black BEAM, charcoal

BEAM, red

BEAM, front, wired

x .

261

inch ID

OD

®®

7-3

Parts

u r.

NO

.

list-Type

PAIT NO.

555

SEIIAL/MODEL NO.

EFF.

EXPLODED

DISC.

VIEW-FRONT GROUP (Cont'd)

Q

T

Y.

DESCRIPTION

262-0613-00

14

- -

... ... ...

260-0270-00 384-0182-00

15

376-0014-00

16

-

...

..

17

-

210-0413-00

21 0-0012-00

18

------

21

0-0413-00 210-0840-00 210-0012-00 210-0406-00 210-0801-00 210-0004-00

19

337-0187-00 331-0045-00

20

21

200-0382-

--

-011

354

------

210-0424-00 21

0-0816-00

366-0040-00 7000

22

366-

0160-00

-

-----

213-0004-00

...

00

- -

6-00

SWITCH,

1

-

1

SWITCH, 1 1

-

2 1

-

1 1 1

2

1 1

SHIELD,

7000 7000

8999X 8999X

1 1 1

GRA

COVER

-

1

-

4 4

10869

10870

KNOB,

1

KNOB, HORIZ. DISPlAY,

1

-

1

Includes: ROD,

extension

HORIZ.

unwired

DISPLAY,

'

UPPER

COUPLING, pot Mounting Hardware

NUT,

hex,

LOCKWASHER, Mounting Hardware: NUT,

hex,

lfe-32 WASHER, .390 LOCKW NUT, WASHER,

ASHER,

hex,

5S

4-40

LOCKWASHER,

lfe-32

ID

internal,

x

9

/

x

32

internal,

For

X

v2

internal,

(not

X

v2

9

x

/

16

3

/1

inch

6

inch

Pot:

3fa

x

included)

OD

3fa

x %

#4

1

/

graticule light

TICULE, 5 inch

, graticule Includes: RING,

ornamental Mounting HQ(dware: (not included) NUT,

knurled, graticule,

WASHER

, rubber

HORIZ.

DISPLAY,

lOW LOWER

Includes:

SCREW,

set,

6-32

3

/

x

inch

16

lfe-24

x

ER

HSS

9

BEAM, BEAM

BEAM,

inch

2

inch

/

16

rear, wired

black

, charcoal

23

366-0031-00

-

213-0004-00

24

260-0269-00 25 26

27

214-0153-00

406-0464-00

28

------

21 0-0406-00

-----

262-0214-00

------

406-0458-00

- - - - -

21

0-0583-00

21 0-0046-00

210-0004-00

KNOB, HORIZ. POSITION,

1

Includes:

-

SCREW,

1

SWITCH,

1

Includes:

-

SWITCH,

1

BRACKET,

1

Mounting Hardware

-

1 1

FASTENER,

1

BRACKET

1

-

2 2

set,

HORIZ. DISPlAY,

unwired

switch

NUT

, hex, 1/4-32

lOCKWASHER

snap, double pronged

, support Mounting Hardware: NUT,

hex, 4-40

lOCKWASHER,

6-32

x

, internal,

x

internal, # 4

3

/

x

3

/

16

For

5

/

16

inch

16

inch

LOWER

HSS

LOWER

Miniature inch

.400

OD x

BEAM,

Pot

:

.261

red

front, wired

inch

ID

7-4

®®

Parts Ust- Type

555

EXPLODED

NO

REF

.

PART NO. T

NO

.

29

30 31 32

33

262-0614-

-

260-0270384376-0014-

------

21021

-

21 0-0413

21

00

-----

00

0182

-00 00

0413

-00

0·0012-00

--

---

-00 1

0-0840-00 1

SERIAL/MODEL

EFF

. DISC.

.

21 0-0012-00 21

0-0406-00 2 21 0-0801-00 21 0-0004-00

34 366-

366-

0033

-00 7000

0148-00

10870

10869

------

213-004-00

366-0033-00 7000 10869 1

35

366-

0148

-00 1

------

213-0004 131-0126-00 1

36

-00

VIEW-FRONT GROUP

Q

Y.

SWITCH,

1

-

1 1 1

-

2 1

-

1 1

1

KNOB, INTENSITY,

1

KNOB, INTENSITY, LOW

1

-

SCREW

1

KNOB,

HORIZ. Includes: SWITCH ROD

, unwired

, extension COUPLING Mounting

NUT,

Hardware For Pot :

hex,

lOCKWASHER, interna Mounting Hardw NUT

, he WASHER l NUT

x,

, .390 ID x

OCKWASHER

, hex, WASHER, 55 LOCKWASHE

Includes:

, set

FOCUS,

KNOB, FOCUS,

Includes:

-

SCREW,

1

set, 6-

CONNECTOR, chassis mount,

(C

ont'd}

DES

CRIPTION

DISPLAY, lOWER BEAM, rear

, pot

lfs

-32

x

lj

in

ch

2

l,

3fs

inch OD

3fa

x

ch

l,

# 4

BEAM

x % i

uded)

1

/

in

2

, sma

are

lfs

-32 x , internal,.

4-40

x

9

/

x

32

R,

interna

: (not incl

1

/

inch

2

9

/

16

3

in

/

16

in

ch

lOWER,.

ER BEAM, sma

6-32

x

3j

in

ch HSS

16

LOWER LOW

32

x

ER

3

/

16

BEA

M, small

BEAM,

inch HSS

BNC,

small charcoal

female

nch

ch

black

ll black ll char

, wired

coal

366-

37

366-

0033-00 0148-00

7000 1

0869

10870 1

------

38

213-0004-00

331-0022-

00

331-0091-00

7000

10870 1

10869 1

- - - - - - -

- - - - - -

------

352-0006-00 7000

39

352-

0064-00

11280 4

11279

------

11279 1

40

41

42

-----

42 44

211-0031

-00 7000 211-01 09-00 21

0-0406-00

134-0031 200-

--

-00

0112

-00

- - - -

200-0111-00 386-0647131-0107-

131-0073 200-011

00

-00

0-00 337-0304-00 131-02

79-

00

11280

-

------

211-0025-00 210

-0224-00 210-0812-00 210

-0004-

00

21

0-0406-00

406-0244-00

45

210-0961-00

7000

7588X

KNOB, SCALE

1

KNOB, SCALE

Includes:

-

SCREW

1

ILlUM

ILlUM.,

, set, 6-32 x

., small black

small charcoal

3

/

i

nch HSS

16

DIAl, black DIAL,

charcoal Includes: NUT,

1

pot mounti

ng

1 lUG, pot index

HOLDER

4

HOLDER

-

1 2

PlUG,

1

COVER, CRT

1

-

1 1

1 CONNECTOR, cable,

-

1 CONNEGOR, C 1 1 S

, neon, double , neon, double

Mo

unting Hardware SCREW, SCREW NUT

4-

40

, 4-

40

, hex, 4-

CRT

contact

x 1 i x

40

1fa

x

anode, assembly

Consisti

ng

CRT

Of:

anode

COVER, CRT PlATE,

Includes:

RT brush

CAP, CRT

HIELD

anode

, focus and intensity, left

For

nch FHS

inch,

100

3

/

i

nch

16

anode

Eac

1 CONNECTOR, chassis mount,

Mounti

ng

-

2 1 2 2 2 1 1

WASHER

SCR

UG

l WASHER, lOCKWASHER NUT BRACKET

Hardware: (not included)

3

40

/

x

in

ch

FHS

8

EW, 4-

, solder, #10, non-locki

rubber

, internal, # 4

3

, hex, 4-

, nylon, in

, plastic,

40

x

3fa

/

i

nch

16

sulator

ID x

13

h:

(not included)

°,

csk, FHS

assembly

BNC, fe

ng

/

inch

16

male

OD

@@

7-

5

Parts

Ust-Type

555

EXPLODED

IEF.

NO.

46

PAIT NO.

386-0896-00

SEIIAL/ MODEL

EFF

.

NO

DISC.

------

6-00

354-007

136-0035-00

47

------

211~534-00

210~803-00

21

0-0457-00

4()6.{)239 -00

48

49

348~2-00

337~305-00

50

51

348-0023-00 8

7000

8999X

52 122-0083-00

------

211-0011..()() 2

211-0038-00

386-0611-00

53

------

211~538-00

21

0-0006-00

210~7-00

VIEW

-FRONT GROUP (Cont'd}

.

Q

T

Y.

PlATE, front

1

Includes:

-

RING,

1

SOCKET, graticule light

2

-

2 2 2

BRACKET,

4

GROMMET,

3

SHIElD, focus

1

ornamental

Mounting SCREW, 6-32 x WASHER,

NUT, keps, 6-32 x

CRT

subpanel

Hardware

5

/

16

6L

x

3fa

spring

1

inch

/

4

and

intensity, right

DESCIIPTION

For Each: (not included)

inch

PHS

with lockwasher

inch

5

/

inch

16

FOOT, white nylon ANGlE,

2

-

2 SCREW, 4-40 x

PLATE,

2

-

3 3

3

brace, Mounting SCREW, 4-40 x

plug-in housing, Mounting SCREW, 6-32 x

lOCKWASHER, internal,

NUT, hex, 6-32 x

left

Hardware

5

/

16

5

/

16

Hardware

5

/

16

1

/

For Each: (not included)

inch

CRT

For Each: (not included)

inch

4

BHS

FHS

#6

phillips

left

phillips

and

right

386-0610-00 1

54

------

211~559-00

210~57-00

386-0614-00

55

--

----

211~538-00

210-0006-00 3

210~7-00

122-0072-00

56

------

212-0039-00

210~58-00

122-0082-00

57

------

PlATE, plug-in housing, bottom

Mounting

-

4 SCREW, 6-32 x

NUT, keps, 6-32 x

4

PlATE, plug-

2

Mounting

-

SCREW, 6-32 x

3

lOCKWASHER, internal, NUT, hex, 6-32 x

3

ANGlE,

2

Mounting

-

4 SCREW, 8-32 x

NUT, keps, 8-32 x

4

ANGlE,

2

Mounting

-

211-0011-00 2 SCREW, 4-40 x 211-0038-00

58 386-0752 -00

------

211~8-00

210-0004-00

210~6-00

2 SCREW, 4-40 x

PlATE, plug-

1

Mounting

-

4 SCREW, 4-40 x 4 lOCKWASHER, internal, # 4 4 NUT, hex, 4-40 x

Hardware

3fa

inch

5

/

in

housing, outside

Hardware

5

/

16

1

/

4

frame, bottom

Hardware

3fa

inch

11

brace,

right

Hardware

5

/

16

5

/

16

in

housing,

Hardware

1

inch

/

4

3

/

: (not included)

FHS

phillips

inch

16

For Each: (not included)

inch

FHS

phillips

#6

inch

For Each: (not included)

THS

/

12

phillips

inch

For Each (not included)

inch

BHS

inch

FHS

phillips

top

shield

: (not included)

BHS

inch

16

386~655-00

59

------

211

-0559-00 3 SCREW, 6-32 x

210~57-00

7-6

1

-

PLATE,

plug-

Mounting

in

housing,

Hardware

3fa

3 NUT, keps, 6-32 x

top

: (not included)

inch

FHS

5

/

16

phillips

inch

®®

Parts

List-Type

555

REF NO.

60

61

62

63 64

65

66

.

EXPLODED VIEW-FRONT

SERIAL/

PART

NO. T

37

6-0007-00

EFF.

MODEL

------

213-0005-00 386-0900-00

- - - - - -

211-0559-00 21

0-0803-00

21

0-0457-00

385-0135-00

- - - - - -

213-0041 -00 348-0003-00

406-0292-00

- - - - - -

211-0511-00 21

0-0803-00

21

0-0457-00

- - - - - -

212-0017-00 21

0-0008-00

21

0-0804-00

21

0-0409-00

343-0005-00

---

211-0513-00 21

0-0457-00

21

0-0803-00

NO.

DISC.

GROUP

Q

Y.

COUPliNG

2

Each Includes:

-

SCREW, set, 8-32 x

2

PLATE,

1

-

1 1 1

1

-

1

time Mounting SCREW, 6-32 x WASHER, 6Lx NUT, keps, 6-32 x

ROD, delrin

Mounting SCREW,

1 GROMMET,

1

BRACKET,

Mounting

-

SCREW, 6-32 x

2 4 WASHER, 2 NUT,

Mounting

-

base

Hardware:

thread

5

/

6

1

transformer

Hardware:

6L

x

keps,

6-32 x

Hardware

(Cont'd)

1fa

divider

(not included)

3fa

inch

3fa

inch

5

/

16

(not included}

cutting, 6-32 x

inch

support

(not included)

lj2 inch

3fa

inch

5

/

16

For Transformer:

4 SCREW, 8-32 x 5 inches

LOCKWASHER, internal,

8

WASHER, 8S x

2 4 NUT, hex, 8-32 x 2

-

CLAMP,

cable,

Mounting

1 SCREW, 6-32

NUT, keps, 6-32 x

2

WASHER, 6Lx3fa inch

2

3fa

5

/

7

/

inch

16

Hardware

x%

inch

16

For Each: (not included)

inch

5

/

16

DESCRIPTION

inch

HSS

FHS

phillips

inch

BHS

inch

HHS

#8

inch

BHS

inch

3fa

inch

THS

phillips

343-0004-00

67

--

211-0511 -00 21 21 21 348-0005-00

68

354-0048-00

69

385-0137-00

70

- - - - - -

213-0041-00

71

386-0654-00

- - - - - -

211-0507-00 210-0202-00 210-0006-00

210-0407-00 211-0522-00 210-0457-00

343-0006-00

72

- - - - - -

211-0513-00

21

210-0407-00

21

--

- -

0-0803-00 0-0006-00 0-0407-00

0-0202-00

0-0803-00 0-0006-00

CLAMP,

1

-

1

1 1

GROMMET,

1

RING, securing

2

ROD, delrin

1

-

1

PLATE,

1

-

6 2 6 6

2

CLAMP,

2

-

1 1 2

2

1

cable, Mounting SCREW, 6-32 x WASHER, 6Lx LOCKWASHER, internal, NUT, hex, 6-32 x

Mounting

SCREW,

plug-in housing, Mounting SCREW, 6-32 x LUG,

solder, LOCKWASHER, internal, NUT, hex, 6-32 x SCREW, 6-32 NUT, keps, 6-32 x

cable, Mounting SCREW, 6-32 LUG,

solder, NUT, hex, 6-32 x WASHER, LOCKWASHER, internal,

5

/

16

Hardware:

1

/

2

3fa

lj2 inch

Hardware:

thread

cutting, 6-32 x

Hardware:

5

/

SE6

x%

lj2 inch

Hardware

x%

SE6

6L

x % inch

inch

(not included)

inch

BHS

inch

1

#6

inch

/

4

(not included)

3fa

back

(not included)

inch

16

BHS

#6

lf-.

inch

FHS

5

/

16

phillips

inch

For Each: (not included)

inch

BHS

1

/

inch

4

#6

inch

THS

phillips

@@

7-7

Parts

REF

.

NO.

Ust-Type

SSS

EXPLODED

PART

NO. T

SERIAL/MODEL

EFF

.

NO.

DISC

VIEW-FRONT

.

GROUP (Cont'd}

Q

Y.

DESCRIPTION

131-0018-00

73

------

211-0016-00 166-0107-00 166-0030-00 21 0-0004-00 210-0406-00

74

386-0895-00

------

211-0507-00 210-0457-00 210-0805-00

75

214-007 4-00

76

131-0C1J7-00

77

------

355-0050-00 214-0123-00

21 210-0004-00 210-0406-00

386-0252-00

78

------

211-0534-00 21 0-0006-00 210-0407-00

79

200-0256-00

0-0801-00

9000

1(1)70

1(1)69

CONNECTOR,

2

Mounting Hardware

-

SCREW,

2

TUBE,

2

TUBE,

2

lOCKWASHER,

2

NUT,

2

PlATE,

1

-

4 4 2 2

2

-

2

2 2 2 4

2

-

2 2 2 1

time base, rear

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW, NUT,

WASHER, 1 OS

BOlT,

captive

CONNECTOR,

Mounting Hardware STUD, 4-40 SPRING, WASHER, LOCKWASHER,

NUT,

PlATE,

fiber, Mounting Hardware SCREW, lOCKWASHER, NUT, hex,

COVER,

chassis mount,

4-40

x

Sfe

spacing, %1 inch spacing,

hex, 4-40

6-32

keps,

3

/

internal,

x

5

x

/u.

6-32 x

7

x

/

16

,

11

3

/

inch

16

5

/

chassis mount,

13

/

x

inch

16

9

/

wire,

32

9

/

5S

x

32

internal,

3

4-40

smal!

x

6-32

/

x

capacitor

5

/

,

11

internal,

1

/

x

4

hex,

6-32

capacitor

For

inch

14

For

inch inch

,

11

For

inch

Each:

RHS

#4

inch

BHS

inch

Each:

long

#4

inch

Each: (not

PHS

#6

16

32

with

contact

(not

included)

contact

(not

included)

lockwasher

200-0257-00

80 81

384-

- - -

211-0507-00 406-

82

-

211-0507 21 210-0457-00

343-0047-00

83

------

213-0049-00 21 0-0949-00 210-0501-00

84

212-0548-00

85

179-0870-00

86

------

337-

87

------

0553-00

..

- - -

045

5-00

-----

-00

0-0803-00

136-0019-00 211-0017-00 210-0586-00

0282-00

211

-0538-00 211-0534-00 210-0803-00 210-0457-00

COVER,

1

ROD

1

, past, Mounting Hardware: SCREW,

1

BRACKET, CRT

1

Mounting Hardware:

-

SCREW, 6-32

4

WASHER,

4

NUT,

4

ClAMP,

1

Mounting Hardware:

-

SCREW,

2

WASHER,

2

NUT,

1 1

1

-

1 2 2 1

-

4 2 2 6

square, l 0-

SCREW, 10-

CABlE

Includes: SOCKET, SCREW, 4-40

NUT, keps,

SHIElD,

Mounting Hardware: SCREW, SCREW, WASHER,

NUT,

capacitor

nylon

6-32

x support

x

6l

x

keps, 6-32

CRT

6-32

x

%

4

32

x

1j

HARNESS,

raw,

x

4-40 x

CRT

6-32

x

6-32

x

6l

x

keps, 6-32

5

/

inch

16

5

/

inch

16

lJa

inch

5

x

/

16

5

/

inch

16

1

/

ID

x

32

x %

inch

8

CRT

STM14

3

/

inch,

4

1

/

4

5

inch

/

16

5

/

inch

16

3

/

inch

8

5

x

/

(not

inch

(not

inch

2

inch

RHS

socket

inch

(not

inch

16

included)

BHS

included)

BHS

included)

HHS

OD

RHS

included) FHS PHS

phillips

with

lockwasher

7-8

®®

I

Parts

List-Type

555

IEF.

NO

88

89

90

91

92

93

94 95 96

97

98

99

100 101

.

PAIT NO.

175-0585-00 175-0587-()() 175-0588-00

175-0589-00 175-0592-00 175-0593-00 175-0595-00 406-0456-00

------

211-0504-00 211-0507-()() 21

0-0803-00

--

----

21

0-0413-00 210-0840-00 343-0002-00

- - -

---

211-051

0-00 210-0803-00 21

0-0006-00

210-0407-00

406-057

6-00

-

--

211-0504-00

--

---

21

0-0583-00

21

0-0046-00

381-0210-00

--- ---

367-0040-00

- - -

--

367-0011-00 343-0073-00 211-0507-00 21

0-0457-()()

------

212-0039-00

381-0073-00 406-0245-00 355-0043-00

- - -

---

212-0507-00 210-0010-00

- - - - - -

210-0413-00 210-0840-00 210-0013-00 214-0433-00 354-0262-00 387-0917-00 386-0212-00

124-0166-00

348-0070-01

378-0541-00

·

-

X9000 10410 X9000 10410 X9000 11540 X11280

EXPLODED

SEIIAL/MODEL

EFF

. DISC.

10409 10409 11539

NO.

VIEW-FRONT

Q

T

Y.

WIRE,

2

WIRE,

1

WIRE,

1

WIRE,

1

WIRE,

2

WIRE,

2

WIRE,

I

BRACKET,

1

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

-

SCREW,

2

SCREW,

2

WASHER,

2

Mounting Hardware

-

NUT

1

WASHER,

1

CLAMP,

1

Mounting Hardware:

-

SCREW, 6-32

1

WASHER,

1

LOCKWASHER,

1

NUT,

1

BRACKET,

1

Mounting Hardware:

-

SCREW, 6-32

2

Mounting Hardware

-

1

NUT,

LOCKWASHER

1

BAR

1

bar

-

ASSEMBLY,

2

-

1 2 6 6

Mounting Hardware: (not included w/bar)

-

SCREW,

4

BAR

2

BRACKET

4

STUD

4

Each

-

SCREW,

1

LOCKWASHER

1

Mounting Hardware

-

NUT

1 1

WASHER,

1

LOCKWASHER,

SPRING

1 1

RING, ligh

1

PLATE

1

STRI

1

CUSHION

4

FILTER, lens,

8

GROUP (Cont't}

DESCRIPTION

CRT

lead, .290 foot, striped brown,

CRT

lead, 500 foot, striped red,

CRT

lead, .

883

foot, striped orange,

CRT

lead, 1.380 feet, striped orange,

CRT

lead, .960 foot, striped green,

CRT

lead,

.333

foot, striped blue,

CRT

lead, .960 foot, striped red,

pot

1

/

6-32

x

inch

4

5

6-32

x

inch

/

16

6L

x

3fe

inch For

Each

1

, hex,

cable,

lfe-32

.390 10 x

/

x

inch

2

9

/

3

16

/

inch

16

(not

x

3fa

inch

6L

x

3fa

inch

internal,

6-32

1

x

inch

/

4

hex,

miniature pot

(not

x

lf

inch

4

For

Miniature

32

5

x

inch

/

16

hex,lf4-

, internal, .

, top, w/handle

includes:

handle each assembly includes: HANDLE CLAMP, SCREW, 6-32

NUT,

handle

keps,

8-32

6-32

x

3fa

5

/

inch

16

5

x

/

16

, retaining

, ground clip

, graticule, replacement

Includes:

10-32

x

3fa

inch

, internal,

For

, hex,

3fa

.390

x

lj

inch

2

ID x '/

Each

16

internal,

, light reflector

t reflector plate , light reflector , light reflector

P,

CRT

shield

, sponge,

CRT

neon

PHS

inch

included)

PHS

#6

included)

PHS

261

PHS

inch

THS

PHS

#10

i

nch

3fe

Pot

:

OD

ID x .400

Pot

:

OD

11

x

/

16

with

Pot: (not

inch

with

connector

with

connector

shown)

OD

connector

®®

7-9

Parts

Ust-Type

555

EXPLODED VIEW-REAR GROUP

7-10

Parts

Ust-Type

555

EXPLODED VIEW -

SEIIAL/

IEF

NO

. .

PAll NO.

EFF

MODEL NO.

. DISC.

1 387-0719-00

------

214-0057-00 2

-

-----

105-0007-00 1

21

0-0480-00 210-0847-00 213-0033-00 1

211-0552-00 2

2

166-0038-00 2

3 4 166-0037-00 2

166-0029-00 2

5 6 406-0175-00

-

--

---

21

0-0006-00

210-0407.00

7 166-0103.00 4

8 337-0303.00 9

-

-----

210-0413..()() 1 21

0-0840-00

10

136-0008-00

----

213-0044-00

- - -

REAR

Q

T

Y.

1

PLATE,

cabinet

- Includes:

FASTENER,

-

Each Consisting Of:

STOP 1 1

NUT, latch, nylon

WASHER, nylon, .164

SCREW, fastening

SCREW, 6-32 x 2 inch TUBE,

spacer,

TUBE,

spacer,

TUBE,

spacer

BRACKET,

2

Mounting

-

LOCKWASHER, internal,

1

NUT, hex, 6-32 x

1

TUBE,

form, coil retaining

SHIELD,

1

Mounting

-

NUT, hex, WASHER, .

1

SOCKET, STM7G

32

Mounting SCREW,

2

GROUP

DESCIIPTION

side, left

cabinet

,

3

/

4

5fa

lfa

latch

BHS inch inch inch

plastic, coil mounting

Hardware

For Each:

1

inch

/

4

calibrator

Hardware

3

390

Hardware

thread

For Each Pot:

-32 x % inch

/

8

ID x '/

cutting, 5-32 x

, inch

11

For Each Pot: (not included)

assembly

ID

x .500 inch

#6

OD

3

/

:not

, inch

11

OD

included)

PHS

phillips

11

348-0003-00 3

12

348

-0002-00 32

13 385-0135-00 8

-----

-

213-0041-00

14 354-0068-00 15 352-0016-00

352-0017-00 16

16 17

337

-0008-00

18

386-0253-

- - -

211 21

00

---

-0534-00 2

0-0006-00

16

210-0407.00

343-0049..()()

19

337

-0007-

20 21

200-0257200-0293-

22 23 441-0168-

---

00 00 00 00

- - -

212-0023-00

212-0040-00

GROMMET, GROMMET,

ROD, delrin,

Mounting

-

SCREW,

1

RING, securing

2

HOLDER, HOLDER, SHIElD,

1

PLATE,

5

Mounting

-

SCREW, 6LOCKWASHER, internal,

2

NUT, hex, 6-32 x

2

CLAMP,

2

SHIELD,

1

COVER, c

2

COVER,

2

5

inch

/

16

1

inch

/

4

15

/

inch

16

Hardware

thread

For Each: (not included)

cutting, 6-32 x % inch

nylon, coil form, without pin nylon, coil form, with pin

tube

metal, small

Hardware

32

capacitor

For Each: (not included)

5

/

x

inch

16

1

inch

/

4

cable tube

apacitor

capacitor

1 CHASSIS, vertical amplifier

Mounting

-

4 SCREW, 8-32 x

SCREW, 8-32 x

2

Hardware

3fa

'3fa

: (not included)

inch

PHS

with lockwasher

#6

BHS FHS

phillips

THS

phillips

@@

7-11

Parts

List-Type

IEF.

PAD

NO.

24

NO.

386-0254-00

---

211-0543-00

21

0-0006-00

210-0407-00

25 386-0255-00

---

211-0534-00 21

0-0006-00

21

0-0407-00 26 348-0004-00 27 386-0252-00

------

211

-0534-00

21

0-0006-00

210-0407-0Q

28

348-0050-00

348-0012-00

'19

352-0015-00

30

--

----

213-0045-00

31

----

212-0037-00 21

0-0601-00

21

0-0205-00

--

555

SEIIAL/MODEL

EFF

.

EXPLODED VIEW-REAR

NO

DISC.

.

Q

T Y.

PLATE,

2

Mounting

-

SCP.EW,

2

LOCKWASHER, internal,

2

NUT, hex, 6-32 x

2

PLATE,

2

Mounting

-

SCREW, 6-32 x

2

LOCKWASHER, internal,

2

NUT, hex, 6-32 x

2

GROMMET,

5

PLATE,

2

Mounting

-

SCREW, 6-32 x

2

LOCKWASHER, internal,

2

NUT, hex, 6-32 x

2

GROMMET,

1

GROMMET,

4

HOLDER,

8

Mounting

-

SCREW, self-

1

Mounting

-

SCREW, 8-32 x 1

1 2

LUG,

1

GROUP

fiber, lc.rge

metal,

fiber, small

EYELET

solder, SEB

(Cont'd}

capacitor

Hardware

6-32 x

large

Hardware

3fa

For Each: (not included)

5

inch

/

16

1

/

inch

4

capacitor

For Each: (not included)

5

inch

/

16

1

/

inch

4

inch

capacitor

Hardware

3

/

4

5fs

For Each: (not included)

5

/

inch

16

1

inch

/

4

inch

nylon, coil form

Hardware

For Each: (not included)

tapping,

Hardware

For Each 8

3

/

inch

4

DESCRIPTION

RHS

#6

PHS

with lockwasher

#6

PHS

with lockwasher

#6

5

4-40 x

/

11

Fil

HS

, inch

Watt

PHS

phillips

Resistor:

32

348-0005-00

33

21

0-0202-00

-

---

- -

211-0504-00 210-0407-00

136-0015-00

34

------

213-0044-00

35

386-0963-00

------

21

0-0406-00

21

0-0004-00

36 386-0964-00

------

214-0013-00 211

-0504-00 2

21

0-0407-00 6

210-0006-00

37

441-0248-00

--

----

211

-0537-00

211

-0565-00 2

GROMMET,

4

LUG,

4

Mounting

-

SCREW, 6-32 x

1

NUT, hex, 6-32 x

1

SOCKET, STM9G

30

Mounting

-

SCREW,

2

PLATE,

2

Mounting

-

NUT, hex,

1

LOCKWASHER, inte rnal,

1

PLATE,

2

Mounting

-

BOLT,

2

SCREW, 6-

NUT, hex, 6-32 x LOCKWASHER, internal,

2

CHASSIS,

1

Mounting

-

SCREW, 6-32 x

2

SCREW, 6-

lj2 inch

solder,

SE6

Hardware

thread

termination

Hardware

4-40 x

line

Hardware

spade

32

delay

Hardware:

32

For Each: (not included)

lf

inch

4

lf

inch

4

For Each: (not included)

cutting, 5-32 x

For Each: (not included)

3

/

inch

16

3

/

16

#4

For Each: (not included)

1

x

inch

/

BHS

4

1

inch

/

4

#6

line, vertical, right side

(not included)

3fa

inch

THS

1

/

x

inch

4

THS

phillips phillips

inch

PHS

phillips

7-12

Parts

list-Type

555

liEF.

PAaT NO.

NO.

441-0250-00

38

441-0247-00

39

------

211-0511-00 210-alm-00 166-0093-00

.(()

387-0713-00

------

211-0510-00

41

-

-----

211-0553-00

21

0-0601-00

21

0-0478-00

211-0507-00

42

-

-- --

211-05«-00 21

0-0478-00

211-0507-00

441-0249-00

43

44 387-0712-00

-

---

211-0510-00 21 21

--

0-0202-00

()..02()4-00 1

SERIAl/MOOR NO.

EFF

.

EXPLODED

DISC.

VIEW-REAR GROUP

- -

Q

T

Y.

OIASSIS,

1

OIASSIS,

I

Mounting

-

SCREW,

1

l WASHER.

TUBE,

1

PLATE,

2

Mounting

-

SCREW,

3

Mounting

-

SCREW,

1

EYELET

1

NUT, hex, resistor mounting

1 1 SCREW,

Mounting

SCREW,

1

NUT, hex, resistor mounting

1

SCREW,

1

OIASSIS,

1

PLATE,

2

Mounting

-

SCREW,

3

LUG, solder,

2

LUG, solder,

delay delay

Hardware

6-32

6lx

spacing,

mounting,

Hardware

6-32

Hardware

6-32

Hardware

6-32 6-32

delay

mounting,

Hardware

6-32

(Cont'dJ

DESQIPTION

line, vertical, right line, horizontal, right side

: (not included)

x

lf

inch

BHS

2

3

inch

/

1

3

/w

inch

delay

line, horizontal

For

3

x

/

1

x 1 1f2 inch

5

X

/1,

3

/

x

1

5

X

/1,

line horizontal, right

delay

3

/

x

1

SE6 DE6

Each: (not included)

inch

BHS

For

Each

RHS

inch

BHS

For

5

WaH

inch

THS

inch

BHS

line

For

Each: (not included)

inch

BHS

10

WaH

phillips

Resistor:

phillips

side

Resistor:

side

441-0236-00

45

------

212-0040-00 21

0-0458-00

46 385-0138-00

-

-----

213-0041-00

47

337-0009-00 441-0115-00

48

49

441-0235-00

-----

212-0040-00 21

337-0005-00

50

0-0458-00

-

------

211-0033-00 21

()..()()()4-0()

21

0-0406-00 2

337

51

..()()()4-0() 1

------

211-0033-00 21

()..()()()4-0()

210-0406-00

OIASSIS, horizontal amplifier

1

Mounting

-

SCREW,

5

NUT, keps,

2

ROO, delrin, with four hales

3

Mounting

-

SCREW,

1

SHIELD,

2

OIASSIS,

1

OIASSIS, horizontal amplifier

1

Mounting

-

SCREW,

5

NUT, keps,

2

SHIELD,

3

Mounting

-

SCREW,

2

LOCKWASHER, internal,

4

NUT,

SHIELD,

Mounting

-

SCREW,

2

LOCKWASHER. internol,

4

2 NUT,

Hardware:

8-32

X 3/,

8-32

Hardware

thread

cutting,

tube

delay

line, vertical, left

Hardware

3

8-32

x

/

1

8-32

socket, 9 pin

Hardware

5

4-40

x

/w

hex,

.(...(()X

socket, 7 pin

Hardware:

5

4-40

x

/

1

hex,

.(...(()

X 3/16

(nat included)

inch

AiS

11

x

/

inch

32

For

Each: (not included)

6-32

: (not included)

inch

AiS

1

x

lf

inch

32

For

Each: (not included)

inch

PHS

3

,

#4

/16

inch

(not included)

inch

PHS

#4

inch

and

high

voltage,

phillips

3

/

x

inch

THS

1

side

and

phillips

·

high voltage, left side

with

lodwasher

with lockwasher

phillips

right side

7-13

Parts

List-Type

555

EXPLODED VIEW-

IEF.

NO.

52

PAIT NO.

385-009(U)()

---

SEIIAL/MODEL

Eff

.

NO

DISC

213..{)()41-00

210-0005-00

441-0264-00

53

-

-----

211-0537-00

211-0565-00 2

441-0114-00

54

441-0263-00

55

---

--

-

211-0511-00

21

0-0803-00

166-0093-00

214-021 0-00

56

--

- -

--

214-0209-00

----

- -

361-0007-00

57

337-0286-00

----

- -

211-0541-00 2

213-0054-00

REAR

GROUP

.

Q

T

Y.

ROD, nylon

-2 Mounting

-

SCREW,

1

LOCKWASHER, external,

1

CHASSIS,

1

Mounting

-

SCREW, 6-32 x

2

SCREW, 6-32 x

CHASSIS,

1

CHASSIS,

1

Mounting

-

SCREW, 6-32 x

1

WASHER,

1

TUBE,

1

SPOOL, solder, assembly

1

Includes:

-

SPOOL, solder

1

Mounting

-

SPACER,

1

SHIELD,

1

Mounting

-

SCREW, 6-32 x

1 SCREW,

(Cont'd}

Hardware

thread

cutting, 6-32 x

delay

line, vertical, left side

Hardware:

3

/

8

1f

4

delay

line, horizontal, left

delay

line, horizontal, left

Hardware

1f

2

6L

x

3f.

3

spocing,

/

(> inch

1

Hardwore

nylon, .063 inch

high

voltage

Hardware

1

/

4

thread

cutting, 6-32 x

DESCIIPTION

For Each: (not included)

3

inch

/

1

#6

(not included)

inch

THS

phillips

inch

THS

phillips

side side

: (not included)

inch

BHS

inch

: (not included)

, left

: (not included)

inch

FHS

phillips

5

inch

/

16

THS

PHS

phillips

58

406-0465-00

--- ---

211-0507-00 2 21

0-0006-00

21

(}.()4()7

-00

59 346-0001-00

--

- -

21 210-0004-00 2

60 337-0284-00

----

211-0504-00 2 441-0245-00

61

---

211 21

386-0897-00 1

62

------

211 385-0080-00 3

63

21 346-001 0-00 1

64

------

21 21

--

0-0406-00

- -

- - -

-0507-00

0-0457-00 6

-0507-00 6

0-0006-00 3

0-0406-00 0-0004-00 2

BRACKET,

1

Mounting

-

SCREW, 6-32 x LOCKWASHER, internal,

2

NUT, hex, 6-32 x

2

STRAP

1

Mounting

-

NUT, hex,

2

pot

Hardware

, transformer

Hardware

4-40

: (not included)

5

, inch

/

11

1

/

inch

4

: (not included)

3

/

x

, inch

11

LOCKWASHER, internal,

SHIELD

2

-

, horizontal display

Mounting

Hardware

SCREW, 6-32 x

For Each: (not included)

1

inch

/

BHS

4

1 CHASSIS, external amplifier

Mounting

-

SCREW, 6-32 x

6

NUT, keps, 6-32 x

PLATE,

Mounting

-

SCREW, 6-32 x

high

Hardware

5

/

16

voltage

Hardware

5

/

16

: (not included)

inch

5

, inch

/

11

board

: (not included)

inch ROD, hex LOCKWASHER, internal,

STRAP,

-

2

transformer Mounting NUT, hex,

Hardware

4-40

LOCKWASHER,

: (not included)

3

/

x

inch

16

in

ternal,

BHS

#6

#4

BHS

#6

#4

7-14

Parts

List-Type

555

IEF.

NO.

65

PAIT

NO.

337-0285-00

_.,.

____

SEIIAL/MODEL

EFF.

EXPLODED

NO.

DISC.

VIEW-REAR

211..()5.41-00 213-0054-00 1

66

406-0.466-00

------

211-0507-00 21

0-0006-00

21

0-0407-00

67

337-0281-00 1

68

386-0898-00

-----

-

354-0076-00

69

441-0246-00

-----

-

211-0507-00

21~-00

21

0-0457-00

70

635-0.409-00 635-0432-00

- -

7000 11480

----

11479

147-0001-00

---

-

-355-0044-00 21

0-041

0-00

21

0-001

71

72 369-0007-00 1

73

0-00

354-0053-00 1

348-0008-00

------

21

0-0409-00 210-0008-00 7000 21

0-0008-00

11480 1

11479

210-0205-00 11480

74 426-0047-00

------

213-01

04-00

75 334-0649-00 1

------

213-0088-00 2

GROUP {Cont'd)

Q

T DESCIIPriON

Y.

SHIELD,

1

-

2

BRACKET,

1

-

2 2 2

high voltage, right Mounting Hardware: (not included) SCREW, SCREW,

1

/

6-32

x

inch

4

thread cutting,

FHS

6-32

phillips

5

/11,

x

pot Mounting Hardware: (not induded) SCREW,

LOCKWASHER, NUT,

hex,

6-32

5

x

/u.

internal,

x

1

/

inch

4

PHS

#6

inch

SHIELD

1

PLATE,

-

1

CHASSIS,

1

- Mounting Hardware : (not included)

4

1 1

ASSEMBLY,

1

ASSEMBLY,

1

-

1

-

2

4

6

3

-

2 2

1 1

-

6

TAG,

-

rear subpanel

Includes:

RING,

ornamental

delay pick-off

5

SCREW, LUG,

solder,

NUT,

lceps,

6-32

x SE6

6-32

/11,

inch

PHS

5

/

x

inch

16

fan motor

fan motor assembly includes: MOTOR,

RING,

FAN, 7 inch

1500

RPM,

x 2

10-32

115 V

7

/

inches

16

5

x

/11,

internal,

inch

#10

Mounting Hardware: (not included) STUD,

10-32

NUT,

hex,

LOCKWASHER,

fan

blade

SHOCKMOUNT

Mounting Hardware NUT,

hex,

B-32 LOCKWASHER, LOCKWASHER, LUG,

MOUNT,

solder,

fan motor

x

internal, internal,

SE

#8

For

Each:

5

inch

/

16

#8 #8

Mounting Hardware: (not included w/assembly) SCREW,

thread forming,

6-32

x

3fa

voltage rating Mounting Hardware: (not included) SCREW,

thread forming,

4-40

x

1f

4

inch

PHS

phillips

(not included)

inch

THS

phillips

inch

PHS

phillips

76 387-0718-00 1

------

214-0057-00 4

---

- - -

1 05-0007-00

21

0-0480-00

21

()..{)847

-00

213-0033-00

-

1 1 1 1

PLATE,

cabinet bottom Includes: FASTENER,

Each STOP NUT, WASHER, SCREW,

cabinet latch assembly

Consisting Of:

latch, nylon

nylon, .164

ID x .500

fastening

inch OD

7-15

Parts

list-Type

555

EXPLODED

Iff

NO.

77

78

79

.

PMT NO.

~

378-0762-00

131-0077-00

- -

--

- -

SBIIAl/MODB. NO.

Eff'

. DISC.

211-0013-00 21

()..()()04-00

21

0-0201-00

21

().{W()6-00

380-0018-00

80

- - -

---

212-0031-00 21

0-0458-00

21

0-6402-00

81

366-0033-00

~148-00

-----

7000 10870

-

10069

213-0004-00

82

387~

- -

---

21~104-00

129-0036-00

83

-

7000 10069 2

129-0063-00 10870 2

--

- -

21 220-041 21

--

()..0.(.(5-00

0-00

0-001

0-00

7000

728)

7000

7779 1

7779X

VIEW-REAR

Q

T

Y.

1 1 1

-

2 1 1 2

GROUP (Cont'd}

FILTER, SCREEN,

air, foam

filter

CONNECTOR, chassis mount, 16 contact

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

SCREW,

4-40x LOCKWASHER LUG,

solder,

NUT,

hex, 4-40 X

1 HOUSING, air filter

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

-

SCREW,

2 2

NUT,

2

NUT,

1

KNOB,

1

Includes:

-

SCREW,

1

PLATE.

Mounting Hardware: (not included)

-

.(

SCREW,

POST, POST,

Mounting Hardware

-

NUT,

1

NUT

1

LOCKWASHER,

8-32 x 1

keps, 8-32 x

cap, hex, 8-32 x ext. ext.

set, 6-32 x

rear overlay

thread forming 6-32 X binding, black binding, charcoal

hex, 1

, keps, 1 0-32 x

, internal.

SE4

HORIZ HORI

0-32

3

/

inch

1

3

/,,

1

inch

/

4

11

/

32

. GAIN,

Z.

GAIN,

3

/u

x

lf

1

3

/

1

internal,

DES(alniON

RHS

#4

inch

RHS

inch

5

/1,

inch LOWER LOWER

inch

For

Each

inch

#10

BEAM. BEAM.

HSS

3

/,

inch

rns

: (not included)

small black small charcoal

phillips

84 387

-

---

-OIB4-00

--

214-0057-00

- - -

---

1 05-0007-00 21

0-0480-00

210-aW-00 1 213-0033-00

260-m()l}-00

85

-

-- --

21

0-0473-00

-

210-m02-00 1

354-0055-00

21

0-0414-00 1

129-0051-00 2

86

------

355-0507-00 2()(U)182-00

---

-

21 21

--

0-0455-00 0-0046-00

1

PLATE.

-

2

- Each Consisting

1 1

1

2 SWITOi,

-

1 1

POST,

-

1 1

-

1 1

cabinet side, right Includes: FASTENER.

cabinet latch assembly

STOP

NUT

, latch, nylon WASHER, SCREW,

fastening

CRT

nylon, .164

CA

Mounting Hardware

NUT,

switch, 12 si

WASHER,

RING, NUT,

Each

STEM.

.470

locking, switch

1

hex,

%,-32

binding,

a~bly

Consisting

adapter CAP Mounting Hardware

NUT,

hex,

lf

-

28

LOCKW

4

ASHER,

Of

TI-l

ODE

For

ded

2

ID

x

1f

9

x

/

Of

:

For

3

/

x

1

internal,

:

ID

x

500

inch OD

SELECTOR

Each: (no

inch

32

inch

16

, toggle

t included)

OD

Each: (not included)

inch

.-400

OD x

.261

inch

ID

7-16

Tektronix 555/22A, 555/21A Instruction Manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual